- x ^ , *-^^ 
 
 \- 
 
 • \ 
 
 ^ 
 
ly the InterneUArchive 
 ^ ^'^'■th funding%om 
 Corporation 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/elegantiaelatinaOOvalprich 
 
V(cLijpyx lld^Amv 
 
 OR, 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE OF 
 
 ^kQautUatin^jm^h:..^^ 
 
 ijY THE 
 
 T1TIVSES1T1 
 
 IiNTExVDEI) FOR _, _ 
 
 rSE OF THE MIDDLE AND HIGH 
 
 GRAMMAR SCHOOLS 
 
 ?p«a Oratio confermRnda iion solum »ilectione, sed etiam consiti\j:> 
 tione Vprbor«in. Cic. 
 
 FROM THE FIFTH ExNGLISII EDITION- 
 
 NEW-HAVEN: 
 Howe & Spalding Piblishkiu^^ 
 
 S. CONVERSE, PRlNTF.r. 
 
 IS 19. 
 
V 
 
 n-^ 
 
 f^% 
 
PREFACE 
 
 DURING the many years, in which I have been engaged 
 in the arduous but important task of teaching the Classics, it 
 has never failed to excite my wonder and concern, that in the 
 many attempts, which have been made to smooth the diffi- 
 culties, with which the road to classical excellence is attend- 
 ed, no method tending to facilitate Latin composition, has- 
 been successively pursued from the first introduction of a 
 Youth into the Elementary Exercises, to his arrival into the 
 flowery fields of correct elegance and dignity of style. The 
 greatest care is usually taken in condiictmg him to a certaia 
 point : when he understands the plain application of his rules 
 of Syntax, he is then thrown upon the wide world of elegant 
 Latinity, in which the range he is to take, though stripped of 
 the thorns of grammatical analysis, is still very precarious ; 
 his progress is still ascensu difficilis. For unless the Master is 
 at liberty to point out very minutely the particular words or 
 arrangement of words which constitute elegance, he must 
 greatly depend upon his own judgment and observation for 
 the knowledge of them. And there is as great a diflference be-.««^ 
 tween the mere grammatical structure of a sentence, and the 
 elegant usage and collocation of words, as between the rude 
 sketch of an imperfect outline, and the fine colouring of a fin- 
 ished painting. 
 
 Numerous are the books, both in this and otlier countries, 
 which have be^n pubfished upon the elegance of Latin style. 
 But none do I khow at all calculated to be put into the hands 
 of Youth. Philologi^ts^have displayed much critical knowl- 
 edge in their learned dissertations upon the style and the 
 beauties of the Lali^l Language. But that knowledge and 
 those researches were neither intended, nor calculated to be- 
 •iseful to young beginners. A pleasant little book, (Lea Deli^ 
 
niKFACK. 
 
 ff# d€ la Langne Laiine^) was published many yeiir« ago, and 
 in imitation of it, or rather compiled from it, appeared on<» o 
 two in this coimtry hy Dc-Biincy and others. But h. 
 
 thfir incon-'- •'^' — •,,,!<,,> ...... ..t • -. «i,. :- -. — 
 
 will imme* 
 
 pies, being all in L^atini and that not of the purest, can neithe. 
 
 • ^ ' y of the scholar. 
 
 T! ... . , .,v ' •' proprictv ♦- 
 
 Walker'j* Phrase?, and c | :i*s Par; 
 
 which, though rery useful and valuable, give the Latin of tho 
 Kngiiih idiom, nnJ thi; sjiy of research 
 
 and as they give n^ "< .v.... ..,. v..> ..^c or the appiica 
 
 lion of them, the li . c which ilic Scholar ia to derivo 
 
 Crom them, n^ust rest wholly upon his memory and mechani 
 
 ^..^ J .-rusal of Scheller':5 valu.ihic work upon the elegance 
 9f Latin style, first suggested the idea that something might 
 be attempted, which, with care and attention, might be adapt- 
 ed to the use of our Clns'iical Schools. 11' h 
 
 so severely lashed hy his countryman, conti: .^.. .:..■ g 
 
 sense, and was also instrumental both in tlie determination 
 and the execution of this work. With what degree of accuracy 
 and judgment it has been performed, it now rests with the 
 public to determine. If I have been mistaken in some points, 
 I shall hope to have the error candidly pointed out: "Nihil 
 '' enlm mihi snavius est, quJtm corrigi ; omnis enira corrcctio, 
 ^a mnguis viris pr(»recta, est via ad discendmvi lo 
 
 .'profrr:'* '^^^rt^ nni vitt:t(r'?:' D'jliin. inod<^> \ ^ it 
 
 Perhaps some of the practical observations, those th.it/elat 
 to the Uructurc of the Period, for instance, may at firi^t ap 
 pear intricate, and not so necessary as others. To a young^ 
 beginiicr, they might perhaps appear so. It would be as dif- 
 iW:uU a task, and might retard him as much in his acquisitir 
 
▼r. niEFACE. 
 
 of a pure Latin style, if he bestowed too miaute a labour upon 
 them ; as if he attempted to collect the scattered limbs of the 
 dissected Ahsyrtus. But as it is presumed the Scholar has 
 already made some progress in Latin, before he is introduced 
 to these Exercises, the study of those rules, as the knowledge 
 of anatomy to a proficient in surgery, which makes him ad- 
 mire the more the wonderful structure of the body, will 
 make the proficient Scholar sea and taste the beauty and ord- 
 er of the style the more, from the dissection of the several 
 parts. Some rules, especially those that relate to the use of 
 qui, quce, quod, may carry the appearance of repetition ; but 
 as they come in illustration of different heads, they only tend 
 to show in how extensive and various a manoer the same may 
 be used. It may likewise be observed, that the particular 
 method which the rule points out, is not always more elegant 
 than another ; but it is often merely to show the variation and 
 the manner in which one phrase or expression may be chang- 
 
 «dir>to another. 
 
 EDWARD VALPV. 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^ 
 
TO TIIK THIRD EDITION. 
 
 XT has been my principal care to siinpUiy, or wholU 
 to remove from this edition, those dilficult passages, which, 
 notwithstanding the general approbation with which this 
 work lias been received, must be acknowledged' to have ex- 
 isted in the former editions. When therefore tlie Scholar 
 is first introduced into this book of exercises, he should be 
 allowed to omit the sentences, which are marked with aa 
 asterisk, and confine liimself to the easier examples. The 
 second time he travels over the same field, he will be equal 
 to the more difficult passages, to which the asterisk is pre- 
 fixed, and to the whole range of Latin composition. \V hen 
 a boy has gone through these exercises a second time, lie 
 may be safely presumed to have made no small proficiency 
 in writing Latin* I have witnessed the most pleasing, 
 proofs of this assertion. It is presumed that this edition 
 embraces every thing within the scope of research, which 
 was likely to contribute to the elegant formation of style, 
 every thing by which a sentence ^por^crft/r, xrrigeiur^ per^ 
 fandaiur. As the rules for the structure of a regular Peri- 
 od, which is so essential to good Latinity, could not be so 
 easily reduced to practicaf illustration, an acquaintance 
 with them will chiefly rest upon the scholar's own study 
 iiod observation^ aided by the masters direction and super- 
 nitendance ; but a close examination of the rules and the 
 
 few examples which accompany them, will be sufficient tcta- 
 
 linprinl ihena on his mincf. 
 
CONTEXTS 
 
 CHAP, I. 
 
 ©F the choice and elegance of particular words, Page t 
 
 Rules for the pronoun quiyqucRf.quodj.dLnd other relatives, 2& 
 
 ©f Verbs, 4T 
 
 6fParticiples, G^^ 
 
 Gf Tenses, 73 
 
 Of the sucession of Tenses, --.--- 78 
 
 CHAP. n. 
 
 Of the order or an^angemcnt of words, ... 87 
 
 Of the arrangement of words, as they depend upon the natural 
 order of ideas, - - .... 106 
 
 Of the an-angement of clau8€s> or dififerent rasmbers of a sen- 
 tence, ---.►.-. 117 
 
 CHAP. Ill 
 
 Of Conjunctions,, and the mode of connecting words and 
 
 clauses, ..-•---. 12T 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 Of the simple variation of words, - . .. . 144: 
 
 CHAP V. 
 
 Copiousness of Style, ------ 16G 
 
 Pleonasm, - - 190 
 
 Dignity or strength of Style, 196 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 Of the structure of a period, ----- 204 
 
 Of Prose-measure or Harmony, - ► - - - 215 
 
 CHAP, vii: 
 
 Of Perspicuity, ► 221 
 
 Of the structure of Themes, - - - - ' 221 
 
ELEGANTI^ LATIN/E 
 
 ; \V^ OF '' 1 >• ' 
 
 CHAll EI^VX. ^ oir ,< 
 
 (y f/ic Choice and Elegance ofFc"^ ' "^ 
 
 Quinam igilur dicendi est modus raelior, qukm nt Latino, ut plane, ut 
 ornate, utad id, quodcuoci^ue agetur, apte congruenterquc dicamns. 
 
 Cicero. 
 
 JLllgance, according to the derivation of the 
 word, eUgere^ consists in the choice of the most 
 appropriate words and expressions, and in their 
 composition and clear and perspicuous order. It 
 depends chiefly on the usage of the best Latin wri- 
 ters. When therefore the scholar has selected 
 those words, which are appropriate in their 
 meaning to the sense of the subject, the next 
 thing will be to consider whether tliey ha^T heea 
 used by the best writers of antiquity. 
 
 But let it be premised, that no word can be 
 elegant or beautiful in itself, in its disjoined 
 state, but merely as far as it strengthens, con- 
 nects, or illustrates the subject ; or at least as far 
 us tlic Latin word conveys in its true meaning 
 the full force of the English expression. It would 
 be absurd, therefore, to use at random the first 
 word which presents itself, widiout considering 
 whether it is appropriate to the sense : as in sav 
 
inc; that ** the ^ood man is cheerful and re ' 
 
 at *^v^ l"^'!'- -fV death • <^ — --h tradltiis si^j^muts 
 rt . is, (i- :p^ it does by no 
 
 means express the English mc aning ; and tliere- 
 fore it would be r iry to search till a pi-oper 
 
 word ofTers itself ioi ' in the seii • ' Ich 
 
 it bears in this sr^i irh iv, tju..^j..u or 
 
 contented. 
 
 In investigatins; then the tine and i)roi)er sig- 
 nification of ^N'ords, it will be n ry to under- 
 stand each different sense in u nun they are us- 
 ed; and if the scholar accjuaint himself as much 
 as he can with their etymoloji^y and orip;inal 
 meaning, he will be enabled to write purer Lat- 
 in, and to avoid many Grecisms, obsolete and 
 barbarous words, and those which have too 
 great an affinity to the English, introduced into 
 use by several modern and inelegant writers, as 
 recommendare to recommend^ ij-c. 
 
 If the Latin should not furnish a word suffi- 
 ciently elegant, or fully expressive of tlie Eng- 
 lish idea, or if the force or dignity of the subject 
 require it, it may be necessary to vary an ex- 
 pression by means of a short periphrasis, or of 
 a phrase, instead of a simple word. But in the 
 choice of phrases, care must be taken that they 
 do not convey more meaning than we Avish to 
 express. Thus, in saying that mothers embrace 
 their infant?, though mere in ampJemm is some- 
 times a very good phrase for amjj/ecti, yet who 
 would say, matres solent in amplexum infantium 
 nierej when the simple word expresses tlic idea 
 so much J^otter ? And though inflcnnmatum esse, 
 
ird is often used for irascij yet it implies mucli 
 more ; and it would ))C absurd to say scripsit ei 
 j)ater pauliim irci injlmnmaUis^ for paulo iratiorj 
 rather angry. In short, the sense or the context 
 must be considered very minutely and accurate- 
 ly, before the scholar is enabled to judge of the 
 propriety or the elegance of the corresponding 
 expressions. Again, though utor is sometimes 
 elegantly used for the verb habeoj yet in its mean- 
 ing it must include the use as well as the posses- 
 sion of any thing. We would not say therefore 
 avarus vtiiur magnis opibus, if we wished merely 
 to say avarus habet magnas opes. These few 
 preliminary observations will be sufficient to 
 show the necessity of selecting such Latin words 
 •and expressions, as convey in their full force and 
 meaning, the true sense of the English. 
 
 Nothing indeed will be more conducive to 
 the purity and elegance of the Latin language, 
 than a happy contexture of elegant Roman 
 phrases, or forms of speaking, used by the best 
 and purest writers. With these, therefore, tJie 
 learner should be directed to store his memory, 
 and be taught how to use them in his own com- 
 position. For effecting this essential purpose, 
 which certainly requires time, diligence, and ob- 
 servation, it would be necessary that the scholar 
 should write down daily whatever Latin phrase 
 and elegant form of speaking he may occasion- 
 ally meet with in his lessons, and give a weekly 
 account of them to the master. Tliat excellent 
 little book, Valpy's Dialogues, should also be put 
 early into his hands : these should be thorougly 
 
learnt, and well impressed on the nionioiy, as 
 the phrases and tbrnis of speech tuc collected 
 from the purest wr-" v- 
 
 It will also be u- ry to observe that tlicre 
 
 ore many pecnliar modes of expression, or idioms 
 in the Enj^lish, which can only be rendered by 
 adoj)tinjr some Latin phrase, or usinir such a vari- 
 ation as u ill best suit the Latin style. These will 
 be gradually exemplified as the scholar proceeds 
 through these rules and exercises. For instance — 
 
 ^V ;/^/ me word by letter : 
 
 It) use a liti^ral or rather barl)<iiuii> t xjim -iwu, 
 w^e should say, mine milii verbum: to speak true 
 or elegant Ladn, we should Sc\yjfac me per lite/ as 
 cerlioixnu 
 
 I am short ofmonry : 
 
 Barbarously or literally, 6/7 > '»^' /)//;/>/>/ 
 elegantly, deficit me pecunia. 
 
 1 would he loth to make thee to be beaten : 
 
 I will make them friends: 
 
 He made as thons;h he wept : 
 
 Such expressions on the first view carry with 
 them the appearance of English idioms. It 
 would be tlierefore absurd carelessly to say essem 
 invitus facere te tapulare^ ^*c. but v\ ith a little 
 care and judgment^ and by considering their re- 
 al meaning, it will be easy to give them a turn 
 which may answer that meaning, and to find out 
 a corresix)nding Latin expresisioii. Thus w c shall 
 say : 
 
 / ivould he loth to m^'l^^' fhee be beaten : non In- 
 bens committerem tft . res^ that is, I ^^ouW 
 
 jaot willingly give cause that , 
 
I IV ill make tkemfiiends: t'etligam < gra- 
 
 iiam. 
 
 He made as though he ivcpt : simxdavit quasi 
 fleret^ or, seflere. 
 
 And so on of phrases in general : Thus agahi, 
 
 / imll make goody that is, supply, supplebo. 
 
 He made much ofme^ i. e. he treated me well, 
 comiter me tractavit. 
 
 He makes much of himself^ u e. he indulges 
 himself, sibi^ or genio indulget. 
 
 You make game of me, u e. you laugh at me, 
 ludis me, or ladibrio me habes. 
 
 You can do much with him, tu muliiim apud 
 €um. poles. 
 
 You knoiv ivhat account I make of him^ i. e. 
 esteem him, scis quanti eumfaciam. 
 
 Pll have nothing to do with your friendship, i. e. 
 I renounce . . . renuncio tuce amicitice. 
 
 I have my brother to entreat, i.e. my brother 
 remains to be entreated, rested mihif rater adhuc 
 exorandus. 
 
 Thou maystjor all me, licet tibi per me. 
 
 Thou mayst be gone for all me, licet abeas per 
 me. 
 
 To be spoken of and ire. 
 
 What trade are you of? i. e. do you pursue r 
 Quam artemfactitas ? 
 
 To ask the advice of any one, L e. to consult; 
 consulere. 
 
 You are sure to be punished, i. e. a certain pun- 
 ishment awaits you, certa poena te manet. 
 
 Be ruled by me, i. e. listen to me, ausculta m^hi. 
 
lam not in fault, i. c. blamcable, or I am free 
 from fault, vaco culpa. 
 
 Let him loscy he made to go Kiihouty his supper, 
 multetur cccnd. 
 
 To he sick of a disease, fever, want^ i. c. to 
 labor \mi\vr„Jahorare morho, ^^c. 
 
 Besides a great number of phrases, which arc 
 derived from the particular forms and customs of 
 the Romans, and which a more intimate acquain- 
 tance with Latin authors, will soon render familiar 
 to the scholar : as, to sell by auction, hastce suhji- 
 cere; with good or ill luck, honis autmalis avihus; 
 to marry, ducere uxorem, ^'C. 
 
 And so on of phrases in general : This shows 
 at the same time the absolute necessity of atten- 
 ding more to the sense than the words, and 
 of suiting the expressions accordingly. 
 
 Many English sentences may appear very dif- 
 ficult and hitricate, and sometimes at first sight 
 scarcely susceptible of being converted into ele- 
 gant and appropriate Latin. These sentences, 
 the scholar should be directed to read repeatedly 
 till he miderstands perfectly their sense and 
 meaning. His first business will be then, to 
 simplify, so as to reduce them to their bare and 
 original idea, divesting them of every superfluous 
 \\on\ and idiomatic expression: and he should not 
 begin to write any part of the sentence, till he 
 has furnished himself with the Latin correspon- 
 ding to the chief heads of it: for his first attemp 
 M ill not always embrace the full scope and pur- 
 port ^^ ^^^ meaning, and it may be necessary to 
 ^ .ivv lii^ sentence and give it anew aud dKYercm 
 
tarn, by the change of adive into passive, ov 
 passive into active, &c. ana then it will be easy to 
 give it a fuller dress, and so to connect it by the 
 •dddhion of any suitable and necessary words, as 
 may give to the whole, a force, ec(ual to that of 
 the English. 
 
 For instance : let us examine this sentence, as it 
 is ti-anslated from Cicero, which at first sight ap- 
 pears very difficuU, and which, if it could be turn- 
 ed into literal Latin, w ould be unsufferable to the 
 ear. ♦''But nothing," says he, "seems to me of su- 
 perior excellence, than for a speaker to have that 
 irresistible hold upon the assemblies of men, as by 
 the charms of his eloquence, to bend their minds 
 to his own purposes, to lead them to whatever di- 
 rection he chuses, o** dissuade them at pleasure 
 from whatever object they may have in view." 
 As soon as the scholar begins to dissect this sen- 
 tence, and reduce some of the expressions to thei;* 
 simple idea, ^f^ "^^^^ ^*^^ ^i^<x± it win soon admit 
 ol a plain, easy, and at the same tijne an elegant 
 dress. Thus, " of superior excellence" is a com- 
 mon English turn for the bare comparative, more 
 excellent, prcestabilms^ " for a speaker to have 
 an irresistible hold," is so perfectly English, that 
 a literal translation would not be Latin, and 
 means nothing more than " by speaking to hold," 
 dicendo ienere ; " to bend their minds to his own 
 purposes" is simply mentes allicere^ " to his own 
 purposes" being a mere English redundancy, 
 wholly unnecessary in Latin ; " to whatever di- 
 rection he pleases," is evidently another turn pe- 
 culiar to the English, which is fully comprehen- 
 ded in this plain expression, Qudvelit ; " dissuade 
 
iheirrat pleasure from \vhatever object they may 
 have in view," is equiUly nn English tum'of ex- 
 * K tiic II '"^of which is riilly included 
 
 :ii i.iv-o few w^fiKi^, untfe velit drducere : The 
 whole sentence being thus simplified, will now 
 appear plain and eas^y, and >\ ill (piickly assume 
 an elegant and Ciceronian dress. *' Necptcvero 
 
 '!n(jfn(l(ji(am^ iiuprlt, prccstabilius ridctnr. (pram 
 ^fossc dicendo tenerc hominum coetus^ mcntes alike' 
 re, impellere quo velitj nnde autem veUtj deducere.^^ 
 
 And as the young Latin writer is apt to follow 
 too closely the literal order of the English, it may 
 be necessary to guard him against this common 
 error, by the following observation, ^vliich, tho' 
 coming more properly under the head of the or- 
 der and arrangement of words, may be introdu- 
 ced in this place, as being applicable to almost 
 every example in this book. It is the genius of 
 *he Latin language, diat the order and position 
 of words, are not i>ov»xa Uy en strict and immuta- 
 ble laws as in other languages, though certam 
 rules must be followed, and such an arrangement 
 preserved, that the style may not be confused, 
 puerile, and inelegant. Seldom therefore does 
 the nominative case come first in the sentence ; 
 l)ut other cases, unless the sense and perspicuity 
 absolutely require it, are generally placed before 
 it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . C. Julius far surpassed all his eiders and contentporaries 
 in pUiosantrif and facetiousness, and lliough he was not a ve- 
 hement and impetuous orator, yet no man's spe«^ches were ever 
 more seasoned with urbanity, wit, and elegance. (Beijin witli 
 the ablatives and then the nominative.) 
 
2. Those men appear to mc very fortunate indeed, ichile I 
 revolve in my mindy and retrace in livj memory/, the annuls of 
 iiur ancestors y\\\\o\\\ ^\\q\\ eonstituted re])ublio, an< ' ' i 
 arrived at the summit of ^lory and honors, could fo'i ii 
 
 a mode of life, as to be able to pursue their high employments 
 without danger, or live in ease and retirement with liouor and 
 
 dignity. (Here begin with the dative, and change the verbs 
 
 revolve and retrace into participles, to agree with the dativ 
 But in order to see the necessity of this transposition, begur 
 with the nominatives, and preserve the grammatical order oj the 
 English, in these two examples ; and their inelegance^ when 
 compared with the other, will immediately appear,^ 
 
 But though elegance of style depends very 
 much on this transposition, care must be taken 
 to avoid a confused intermixture of words, that 
 for instance, what belongs to a clause of a sen 
 tence in which the relative, qui, quce^ quod^ oc- 
 ciu's, and is dependent upon it, may not be in- 
 termixed with the clause w hich contains the an- 
 tecedent; as. 
 
 The man who has once transgressed the 
 bounds of modesty, must be completely and per- 
 fectly im})udent. 
 
 It may not be inelegant to say, 
 
 Qui semel vereciindice fines transierit, tiuu j^n ui- 
 ms oportet esse impudentem. But to sa}^ 
 
 Qui semel verecundice^ eum prorsus oportet esse 
 impudentem^ fines transient^ would render the 
 sense obscure and unintelligible. 
 
 Besides this obscurity, whoever wishes to ac- 
 quire an elegant style will be cai'cful to avoid a 
 too frequent repetition of the same word, if it 
 does not tend to give greater weight or perspicui- 
 ty to the subject. The same syllable too closely 
 and frequently repeated, must be har<h to i\v\ 
 
in 
 
 ear, and therefore iiuic^iun,* ixs , nonet et hurUi- 
 tnr. I A\ou]cl not say, per pcrhrem tempus^ bur 
 })tr tcmpiis pa breve ; thou}z;h Cicero hiniseli' 
 sometimes falls into this apparent negligence, as 
 sed mulld etiam magis monentc et denuntiante ie. 
 Several words following each other with the same 
 termination, should be carefully avoided ; as eti' 
 (un eeiernos mvhos claros virus nominarem. And 
 w hat can be more oflensive to the ears than tJiesc 
 words^JIentes^plorantes^ lacrymantes^ ohtestantes f 
 To this negligence must be referred a too great 
 concourse or clashing of the same letter, which 
 either must produce a disagreeable hai'shncss in 
 the sound, if a repetition of the same consonants, 
 as Rex Xerxes, or if they are vo^\ els, must cause 
 such a hiatus as v^ill produce some dilliculty to 
 pronounce, as magna operto ore. Where it is pos- 
 sible to give a sti'ict attention to the smooth con- 
 coui-se of the ^vords, without endangering the 
 force of the idea, when the preceding word ter- 
 minates with a consonant the next should begin 
 with a vowel, and tiee versa. There are a few 
 words, however, the succession of w hich is not 
 arbitrarj^, but which has been fixed by the unva- 
 ried usage of the ancients. Ac is not found be- 
 fore a vowel, but always before a consonant 
 we do not say ac ego, but atqiie ego ; seldom 
 cque autem, but neque vera. It will also be verv 
 .( ccssary to guard against poetical endings of a 
 :>rose sentence, which though not very culpable 
 ►r disagreeable in themselves, yet will not fail to 
 displease, as they carry an appearance of aflbcta- 
 Tion and studied conceit. Th^^ fault indeed w^ 
 
1) 
 
 much sooner observed by the ancients, who are 
 supposed in their common conversation to have 
 pronounced the language more according to 
 metre, than it can be by us, who pronounce many 
 syllables different from their quantity; as this 
 hexameter of Tacitus ; 
 
 Urbem Romam a principio regeshahuere. 
 
 Or tiiis line from the same author, which is 
 still a more complete verse : 
 
 Auguriis patrum, et prised fonnidine sacram. 
 
 Every kind of ambiguity should also be care- 
 fully avoided, as for instance, in the case of ad- 
 jectives, where multorum^ if used instead of mul- 
 tarum rerum^ might be mistaken for the masculine 
 gender. 
 
 A List of Latin Prose authors, whose authority 
 may be safely followed by the young scholar, and 
 whose style may be imitated with advantage, as 
 exhibiting the purest standard of Latin elegance. 
 
 Cicero, C^sar, Livy, Nepos, Sallust, Te- 
 rence, flourished during the golden age, which is 
 commonly computed from the time of the second 
 Punic war to the year 14 after Christ. These 
 writers afford the best specimens of classic purity, 
 with resj^ect to the selection of words. At the 
 same time it may be observed, that words, which 
 occur only once or twice in Cicero, as munitare^ 
 invalitudoy may be considered of doubtful au- 
 thority ; and words which occm- in Livy, Ceesar, 
 C. Nepos, or Sallust, only, as/am^^, arum, equal- 
 ly doubtful. 
 
 QumituAN, Tacitus, CuRTius, Justin, Val. 
 
M vxiMus, Pliny ihe younger, flourished in the 
 silver age, which is computed iVoni the yeai- 14 
 to about the year 140 alter Christ. These au- 
 iliors may be safely followed, as the most repu- 
 table of that ai;e ; and though the Latin language 
 began to decline in their time, yet it exhibited in 
 their writings no unfavourable model of the pu- 
 rity and elegance of the Augustan age. 
 
 The word vir is used when the praise or excel- 
 lence of any one is mentioned, never when blame 
 is expressed : Homo is used indiscriminatPJv. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. >^ ?«rtw of the greatest virtue and honor lias been cruelly 
 put to death by a man of the most abandoned and infamous 
 character. 
 
 2. 1 am very intimate with Fabius, that most excellent ■.^\^d 
 learned man. (To be intimate witU, famili a riter uti. 
 
 3. He put them in niind, that as Darius had a greater num- 
 ber oipers>ons, so he had a greater number of men. 
 
 The same distinction is generally made be- 
 tween the pronouns ilk and iste ; ilk denoting 
 praise, and iste blame or contempt, as vir ilk 
 maximusj iste furcifer. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Behold that liberty, which you have so ardently desired. 
 1\ These thlrifrs (cruelty and insolence) are to be attributed 
 to arras and victory, not to Ca?sar. 
 
 Speaking of an obscure or contemptible person, 
 the Latins generally make use of nescio qiiis for 
 quidam. Though they also use nescio quis^ not 
 merely to vilify, but to magnify ajiy thing- 
 
13 
 
 1. W^Kit liare you to dread, when you are defendinc^ your 
 <'ause against some acciiaer^ whose eloquence no one ever leav- 
 ed ? 
 
 2. But then I affirm, tliat, when to a good and exceflent nat- 
 ural disposition, the eiDbellishments of learning are added (ra- 
 iio doctrinob) there results a something great and extraordinary. 
 
 Quispiam^ quisqnam^ iillus, and unquam are el- 
 egantly used after negatives and comparatives, 
 after vix^ and 5^, when there is any doubt, after 
 an interrogation or prohibition, and the preposi- 
 tion sine. Observe that quisouam, quispiam^ and 
 ullus are thus distinguished Irom qiiivis and qui- 
 lihet ; the former are generally used in a negative 
 or interrogative sense, the latter always in the 
 aflSrmative. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Qiiispiam: Is there o/zj^ person in the world o/ whom 
 you think better ? 
 
 2. Quisquam: You deny that the tyrant has been more 
 cruel to Syracuse than any one of his predecessors. 
 
 3. Let no mail's offence make you lose your greatness of soul. 
 
 4. They themselves had delivered many great men, tcithout 
 the suspicion of any one. 
 
 5. Ullus : Scarcely have you left the other orators (with 
 their leave let me speak it) any merit that they can reap. 
 
 Ullus should be always used instead of omnis alter the pre- 
 position sine ; as, 
 Without all doubt. 
 
 6. Unquam ; Darius having in his Jfliglit drank water, which 
 was muddy, and defiled with dead bodies, said that he had 
 never drank with greater pleasure. 
 
 (Observe that for the sake of brevity, the verb dico followed 
 by non is not inelegantly changed into the verb negOy as negavi 
 me esse fact urum^ for dixi me non factunun esse.) 
 
14 
 
 Neqh'M U rlrscnntly used for vt nemo. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. They discharged him from his office, that no one should 
 afterwards commit the same crime witli impunity. 
 
 2. They granted a writ auainst him, that no man might say 
 that they had not the power to degrade a man. 
 
 Nec qicidqitam is more elegantly said than et 
 nihil. 
 
 EXAMPLE, 
 
 ^nd physicians, generals and orators, though they under- 
 stand perfectly the principles of their science, can efl'ect nothing 
 very great or meritorious, without experience or practice. (Ar- 
 tie proecepta percipere,) 
 
 Ipse is often used for the adjective iotus or 
 integer, in defining numbers or space of time 
 with great exactness. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I have been absent three whole days. 
 
 2. I spent three whole months in visitmg and exploring a 
 country, wliich some writers have described in so lively a man- 
 ner. 
 
 The pronoun is, is most frequently used for 
 talis, followed by uty or qui; as, non is sum 
 quern contemnas. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. J am not sitch a man, that I sliould utter a falsehood. 
 
 2. t have seen surh a monster, that if I should see another 
 as terrible, I should die with horror. 
 
 3. We must use such liberality, as may profit friends^ anc* 
 hart no one 
 
^ OF TBB 'V- 
 
 15 ffUKIVEESIT'f' 
 
 4. Many were convicted of treasoir^^^^Ayij^^Fjl^l^^^ 
 clemency, that only three were execut^^t^^^Wtw2>F£^^ 
 afficu)^ ^ 
 
 5. iSwcA was the discipline of the Romans, that the son was 
 punished by the father himself: and thus this excellent young 
 man was capitally punished by his father for his excessive 
 courage. {Pconas morte dedit\) 
 
 Observe, that ?i^ poena properly signifies atone- 
 ment or satisfaction, it is put in the accusative, 
 the person who inflicts the punishment in the 
 dative, the crime for which it is inflicted in the 
 genitive, and the manner how in the ablative. 
 Literally, he paid by his death satisfaction to his 
 father for his courage. 
 
 Idem is most frequently used for item, porrd, 
 etiam, simul, and tum-tim : quod idem incestitiam 
 reprehendit, idemjocum. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. For we see that there have been those, who at the same 
 time could speak with dignity and elegance, at the same time 
 with artful evasion and subtilty. 
 
 2. Caninius, both your friend aiid ours, having come to my 
 bouse late in the evening, and told me that he would go to you 
 early the next day, I told him that I would give him something 
 in the morning, and begged him to ask me for it. 
 
 3. He used that kind of food, which was most sweet and 
 wholesome, and at thj^ame time most easy to digest. 
 
 Instead of rendering the English word all by 
 omnis, it will sometimes be necessary to use om- 
 7iind, sometimes, nullus non^ or quisque^ and 
 sometimes the relative qui, quce, quod. 
 
16 
 
 1, There were m 4ul but two \w.j >, Uy which tht-y oouki 
 go out of tlieir country ; one through the Scquiini, narrow and 
 dithcuh 3 the other through our proviuce, much ea^^ier and 
 reailier. 
 
 2. The queen most bountifully entertained him with all 
 courtesy and hospitality. 
 
 3, Because the iuiiahitauts offered so httle money to redeem 
 the town, they began to deraohsh all the nohlvst huUdbtgs^ 
 
 4. All the time that he spent upon his hists and sports, 
 {which was a great part of his time) he stole from the slate, the 
 governmeot of which he had undertaken. 
 
 For the English, all ofthcm^ allofwhom^ the 
 1)cst Latin writers use illi omnes^ qui omnes. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 1. Our men, seeing the enemy entirely dispersed, aU of 
 trhom had thrown down their arras, retired within their own 
 entrenchments. 
 
 The English word every may also be varicjus- 
 ly rendered by singulis qitisque, when it implies 
 each : sometimes by sijigtili repeated ; by alhfs 
 aliusy w hen it implies a diversity ; each in their 
 separate cases : as, Trahit sua ouemque Volup- 
 tas ; singulis legimiihus singiilos legatos, Every^ 
 before a word of time, or used distributively, 
 may likewise be rendered by in with an accusa- 
 tive case. 
 
 t 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . The strength of all sciences, like the old man's facrgot, 
 consists not in every a'mgle sticky but in all of them united in 
 the band. 
 
 2. The Biographer of Atticus observes, that they, who arc 
 one day at the height of power and honor, arc often the n^wt 
 
ir 
 
 ]JB the gulph of daoger and despair ; so that this remark i^ 
 generally very true : every man's manners fashion and shape 
 his fortune. 
 
 3. To every thinf^ there is a season^ and it is the duty ol 
 every man to use hrs time profitably to himself and others. 
 
 4. In every corner of the court there was a court, (plarai) 
 
 *5. Every man has his particular delight. As for me, my 
 pleasure lies in wise thinking and reasonable desires ; give me 
 a sound and a sober undei'standing — a temper that never 
 falls out with men and accidents — that takes all things with 
 good humor, computes rightly upon their value, and puts them 
 to the use for v^hich they are fit. (alia alium^ with a vetb ac- 
 tive.) 
 
 6. He changes his wavering mind every hour. 
 
 7. No one gave less than eighteen bushels evury acre. 
 
 The word some also, when repeated, or follow- 
 ed by the word other ^ is rendered by alifur^ aliv 
 oi* hie and ille. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Of the things objected to him, some be ackuowIorUred^ 
 some lie extenuated, some he excused by reason of huniaii 
 frailty, the greater part he flatly denied. 
 
 2. They, alledging some one cause^ and some another, with- 
 drew themselves daily, by degrees, out of that rude and barba- 
 rous country. 
 
 3. Certainly the inrhnation of princes to so?n€ men^ and 
 their, a version toothers, may seem fatal. 
 
 4. Some think one thing, some another. 
 
 One another is also rendered by hie and ilk^ by 
 alter alter^ alius aliiiSj and quisqile : as one man 
 
 3 
 
18 
 
 delights in 07ie style of speaking, another in 
 another : alius alio dicendi genere gaudet. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. It was agreed, that there should be free commerce, till 
 rnie prince should denounce war against the other, 
 
 2. There is o?ie kind of deportment due to a father, and 
 e^iother to a son ; one to our own countryman, and another ta 
 a strangei' j one to a friend or benefactor, and another to an 
 tneroy who has injured us. 
 
 3. It is very difficult to determine nicely, what one man 
 ought to make good to another. 
 
 Modern writers often place the preposition de 
 for of before the place of abode of any person, as 
 Thomas of Nonmch ; Thomas de Norvico. But 
 this is inaccurate, and never used by classical 
 writers. We should say, Thomas Norvicensis. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Aristotle of Stag)Ta slept little, and always had one arm 
 out of his couch and held in his hand a bullet, which by falling 
 into a brazen bason underneath, early awaked him. 
 
 2. Some writers have denominated Vatavinity^ those ex* 
 pressions, and a certain Dialect, which they seem to discoret 
 in the style of Livy of Patavium. 
 
 Instead of is expressed in Latin, 
 1st. Before a substantive, by pro with an abla- 
 tive, loco or vice with a genitive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Cato alone is to me instead of a hundred. 
 
 2. Men who read Luciljus imtoad of Horace, and Lucre- 
 tius instead of Virgil. 
 
19 
 
 3, You have so endeared yourself to me by y<1lir kindliest; 
 that you shall always be to me instead of a brother. 
 
 When a succession or change of place is ex- 
 pressed, instead of is rendered by in locum. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . When men are about to engage in battle, hov/ could thc} 
 shake off the fear of so many toils and pains, and even o 
 AJeath itself, if instead of tJiem^ piety and fortitude, and the 
 image of honor were not present to their minds ? 
 
 2. He sent me instead of another. 
 
 2dly, before a verb. 
 
 If the subject is a thing that ought to be done 
 instead of is expressed by cum with the subjunc- 
 tive of debeo ; as, 
 
 Instead of studying he plays. 
 
 We should say, 
 
 Ludit cmji studere deberet. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . The conduct of our generals deserves the greatest repre 
 hension. They waste their precious time in disputing amon^ 
 themselves, instead of marching directly against the enemy 
 and commencing the engagement. 
 
 2. Instead of showing his gratitude for the favors which he 
 has received, he wholly neglects his friends. 
 
 3. Instead q/*observing a strict discipline, the soldiers of the 
 enemy are now dispersed over the whole country. 
 
 If the subject is a thing that mifiht be done, in- 
 stead of is expressed by cum with the subjunc- 
 tive of posum ; as, 
 
We sliotild say, 
 
 ^^nJcf ctun hdere jpossa. 
 
 KXA>frL£.S. 
 
 1. Tnsfeadof b«f; msclf to n^t, after tie nKirtcCs aD<i 
 
 blioui-s of the (lay, h. . . v. to retire into his closet, where ke 
 ^^enerally dcvctccl several hours of the night to study and medi- 
 cation. 
 
 e. Instead of ?»li€ltering liimself umler a tree, he encoua- 
 ters the whole fury of the storm. 
 
 S, How pitial ' ' ' \ case, who, in his journey throu{^hli(e, 
 instead of eu]i)\\\ li moderation tlie fruits of his houesT 
 
 lUbors, even debars himself of those innoeent refreshments 
 Vhich oflftr themselves by the way. 
 
 Observe, if the verb is in a past tense, dtheo 
 ox possum must be put in the pluperfect; as, 
 
 He played, instead of studying ; 
 
 We should say, 
 Ludebat cum studere dcbuisset. 
 
 EXAMP1.KS. 
 
 1. Instead of pursuing the enemy, and reaping the fruit« of 
 his glorious victory at Canna?, Hannibal kept his army the 
 greatest part of the winter at Capua, th€ dissoluteness and 
 )uxiui«s of which city so enei*vated the minds and bodies of 
 his soldiers, that Marcellus seems to have said with great pro- 
 priety, that Cnpua had proved a Canna? to Hannibal. 
 
 *2. He retarded the progress of his attainments and studies 
 by a culpable carelessness and indifference, iixstead of putting 
 to the best advantai^e and improving those excellent talentj 
 which nature had given him. 
 
 3. The Tyrant Dionysius, instead of adx^rnlno; the miud of 
 the son of Dion with virtue and leaniimr, brought him up i 
 
 n plungec 
 
21 
 
 Sdly, If it is a thing that ouj^ht not to be 
 done, instead of is turned into and not^ or rather 
 than; as, 
 
 You ought to study, instead of playing. 
 
 We should say, 
 
 Stadere deberes, non autem ludere ; or, studere 
 deberes^ potiiis qncim ludere. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. A wise governor ought to encourage peaceful arts, ?«- 
 stead of endangering the safety of his country by useless 
 wars. 
 
 2. Shall we spend our precious time in ease and idleness, 
 instead of studying the liberal arts, and storing our minds with 
 va-rious kinds of knowledge ? 
 
 3. We ought to apply a part of our fortunes in relievingr the 
 indigent, redressing the oppressed, and in doing acts of kind- 
 ness to all, instead of squandering our riches in profligacy and 
 extravagance. 
 
 So far from is rendered in Latin sometimes by 
 adeb non^ ita non^ sometimes by tantum abest utj 
 followed by ut^ or by non modo non-sed etiam^ 
 non solum non-verum etiam ; as. 
 
 You are so far from loving me^ that you rather 
 hate me : Tantum abest ut one ames^ lit me potius 
 oderis. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He was so far from being superstitious, thai he despisr d 
 those many sacrifices and temples in his own country : so far 
 from being fearful of death, that he was slain in battle in the 
 service pf the public. 
 
 3 * 
 
72? 
 
 2. He was so far from beir v of mone;^', fkat he 
 
 made no other use of it, tliaa to i.. ^ ...s friends from dangers 
 -and inconveniences with it. (An ablative iciihparticij^lcfuL 
 in dus,) 
 
 '?. Attieiis' peacefulness and neutrality, were so acceptable 
 to Cresar, that when he was victor, and commanded money 
 f by letter*, he was so far from molesting 
 
 t. v\\ him up his sister's son out of Pompcv'S 
 
 vump. 
 
 4. You are so far from loving me, that you injuri' r.»<. ; ^ 
 iuuch as you can. 
 
 5. So far is. my grief /ro//i being lessened, that it is in^ 
 creased. 
 
 On the point qfy is rendered in Latin by in eo 
 ut; it is in agitation to, by itl agitar ut : and in 
 the case of before a noun, is expressed by in 
 with an ablative* 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. As he had been cast in his suit, he was on the point of 
 b^ing ruined. 
 
 2. They made a sally from ever>^ gate, and were already on 
 the point of being repulsed, when they sounded a retreat, and 
 leturned into the town. 
 
 3. He had as many votes as tha law required, and it was 
 understood that it teas in agitation to elect him consul. 
 
 4. What strange perverseness is that, if the same thing be 
 iione in your case^ which you yourself did in the case of 
 another. 
 
 5. He assured them that he would do, as he had done in the 
 ccte of his oilier enemies. 
 
 Primus^ %tnt^, sohsj uUimuSj frustra^ ^e. are 
 
 I 
 
f 
 
 used simply with the verb, instead of prmiisfmi 
 qui, ^-c.-as also the interrogative quis : as, 
 
 fVho is there that would not embrace virtue her- 
 self? Quis virtutem non ampleditur ipsam ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He was the only one who remained at his post. 
 
 2. Sicily was the Jirst of foreign states wfiich courted the 
 friendship of the Roman people. 
 
 3. But the Ubians, who were the only nation of all those be- 
 yond the Rhine that had sent Ambassadors to Caesar, earnest- 
 ly entreated him to come to their assistance. 
 
 4. It is in vain for a man to avoid prodigality, if he turn to 
 the contrary excess. 
 
 5. Who is there that does not hate a vicious and saucy 
 young man ? On the contrary, who is there who does not ad- 
 mire and love modesty and faithfulness, though they no way 
 concern himself ? 
 
 Without before a substantive after a negation 
 
 may be expressed by nisi^ nisi cum ; as, They 
 
 Jight not without pay : non pugnant nisi stipendiati. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Labienus, when he had spoken these things, swore that 
 lie would not return into the camp without victor}'. (Without 
 being victorious.) 
 
 2. The Queen answered, that she had no power to give the 
 daughters of her subjects in marriage, without the consent oi 
 their parents. 
 
 Or it may be expressed by a verb, a partici- 
 ple, or an adverb ; as, Grass groios xcithout bid- 
 dings or sowing: injussa virescunt Gramina, 
 
24 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. The death of this man was not without suspicion of poi- 
 son among the vulgar, who always suspect those to be poisoned 
 whom they love. 
 
 2. If Pompey, when he w*|s sick, had died in Naples, he 
 would not have been engaged in a war with h»s fatlier-in-law ; 
 he had not taken up arms without pj-ejiaration. 
 
 3. The best things which we do arc painful, and the exercise 
 of them grievous, if they arc continued without intermission. 
 
 4. He lluished the business without staying longer. 
 
 5. They went off without observing that they were closely 
 watched. 
 
 Let it be observed, that where the latter clause 
 is emphatical, the verb should be used instead of 
 the participle. 
 
 6. He walks through the garden without admiring the 
 sweetness of the lilies and roses, the beautiful order of the 
 walks, and the melodious singing of the birds, (^nec tatneu.) 
 
 WitJwuU before a verb, may be expressed by 
 the relative qui^ quce^ quod, by quin, or by an 
 ablative absolute ; as, He does nothing imthout 
 consulting you : nihil agit quin te consulate or te 
 inconsulto. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Since my father does nothing great or small urithout 
 communicating it to me, why should he conceal this from me ? 
 
 2. I cannot read Tully concerning old age ; concerning 
 friendship ; his offices ; or his Tusculan questions, without ai- 
 Bost adoring lliat divinely iriSpired breast. 
 
IS 
 
 3. It is a miserable thing to die before o»e*s iime. Wkat 
 time, I pray ? That of Nature ? Why Nature for h^r part gave 
 you the use of life, as of so much money, without setting any 
 Uciy of payment. 
 
 Opus est IS elegantly followed by the ablative 
 of the participle passive ; as, instead of muturare 
 opus esty we should say, rnaturato opus est. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Before you begin, it is necessary to deliberate, an(J when 
 you have deliberated, you must act with vigor and dispatch. 
 (mature facto ) 
 
 Observe that where there is a neuter adjective 
 or pronoun, especially when followed by quo^ it 
 is better for the sake of perspicuity to use opus 
 with the nominative ; or as some grammarians 
 have it, opus must become an adjective ; as, 
 
 He has need of what he enjoys : Id ei opus 
 est, quofruitur. It would not be so well to say, 
 opus est eo quo^ because they might be taken for 
 the masculine. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Yoti have no need of that ichich I have need of; whilst 
 you are contented with your own condition, and even superflu- 
 ities are become necessary to me. 
 
 2. He has need of that very thing which Hannibal and ma- 
 ny other generals used in the midst of the greatest dangers, and 
 i« every engagement which they call presence of mind. 
 
 We say that the verb sum is followed by a 
 genitive or an ablative when it serves to denote 
 a quality, praise and blame, &ۥ but it is only 
 
If 
 
 wlien there is an adjective added to the sub^taiv 
 live ; as, 
 
 That lady is of remarkable beauty. 
 
 We should not s?iy pidchntucUne alone. And 
 it must be observed that the genitives or abla- 
 tives are not ahvays used indiscriminately ; we 
 should not say est magni natus^ but magno natn. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. But lest I should entertain too sanguine a hope of suc- 
 cess in a pursuit, which admits of so much uncertainty, I com- 
 mit myself and my fortunes solely to your favour and well 
 known benevolence y for indeed what right have I to use so 
 pressing a solicitation to you, who are of the highest authority 
 and roost consummate wisdom ? 
 
 2. When Timoleon had so great an authority aud such 
 complete poirer^ that he might have governed them even against 
 their will, but at the same time so much possessed the love and 
 aflections of the Sicilians, that he might have obtained the king- 
 dom with the unanimous consent of all; preferring their love to 
 tlieir fear, he abdicated the sovereign power and lived a private 
 man at Syracuse. 
 
 *3. He is a man of consummate prudence but his brother tV 
 a youth of a daring disposition* 
 
 Oportei, opus est, necesse est^ veUniy ^c. usually 
 take an infinitive after them, or a subjunctive 
 with the conjunction ut : but it is more elegant 
 to omit this conjunction ; as it is likewise to 
 leave it out after the verb caveo. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 There is a certain intemperate degree of aflfection toward our 
 Iheods, which it is necessary that we should restrain. 
 
27 
 
 But instead ofnon opus est^ non oportet, quid 
 est opus J it is more elegant simply to say non est 
 quod^ nihil est quod ; as, nihil est quod mihi agas 
 graticis ; There is no reason that you should 
 thank me. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Concerning the affairs of Britain, I understand from your 
 letters, that there is no need to apprehend any danger. 
 
 2. I am distracted with my apprehensions concerning the 
 health of our Tullia, concerning which there is no need to 
 write more largely to you. 
 
 3. What occasion is there to build a tragedy on so trifling a 
 subject ? 
 
 
i8 
 
 1 
 
 RrCE^ F0» THE PilOMdfW ^l/t, ^Ji<f, ^iftrf, AST) OTirER REIATITE5 
 
 Nec quidquam est. quod tarn deceat studiosum rectte Latiai- 
 tatis, quam iste usus pronominis istius. 
 
 Nothing occurs more frequently in Cicero, 
 and in the best Latin authors, than the use of 
 qui^ qiice^ quod^ varied according to the sense and 
 structure of the sentence ; but in most cases it 
 Avill be found to contribute to brevity, as form- 
 ing an etsential part of elegance, and will give 
 a more compact and close connexion to senten- 
 ces. After digmis and indignus^ especially qui 
 Is used in its different cases for ut ego, ut tu, ut 
 is J lit mens, ut tibi, ut noster, ^c. followed by the 
 subjunctive mood : as, you are worthy to be 
 loved ; dignus es, qui aniens. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Your mother deserves, or is worthy, that yow should love 
 her, obey her, and learn of her, (Use the pronoun qui in 
 these different cases, as governed by the different verbs.) 
 
 2. You are worthy that I should look to your happinessr. 
 (Quorum,) 
 
 3. You have been wortliy that we should listen to you. 
 
 4. My parents are worthy that every kind of happiness 
 should befall them, 
 
 *5. But after they have spent their youth in the greatest de- 
 bauchery and profligacy, after they have disgraced their birth 
 mid noble name by the vHost actions, and mo^t atrocious crimes. 
 
^^ OF THB 
 
 tijcy arc indeed uninorthy that you should j^a^aj^lHiilQii^^ 
 mities, or again receive them into your society. ^""^ 
 
 One of the greatest difficulties which the scho- 
 lar meets with, in writing correct and elegant 
 Latin, is, to ascertain when the relative qui^ and 
 other relative particles, require the subjunctive 
 mood after them, though the sense of the Eng- 
 lish seems to demand an indicative ; I shall 
 therefore offer a few rules and observations on 
 this subject, for the substance of which I am in- 
 debted to the valuable remarks of Dr. Crombie, 
 in his " Gymnasium," who seems to l)e the first 
 critic who has suggested the principle of tiie first 
 rule. 
 
 When the relative clause does not refer to the 
 sentiments of the author, but of the person or 
 persons of whom he speaks, then the subjunctive 
 mood is used : as, Tarquin said^ that he (Servius) 
 was a partisan of the lowest rabble^ from ivhomhe 
 sprung ; that he laid upon the nobles all the bur- 
 dens^ which before were common : Esse fautorcm 
 infimi generis hominum^ ex quo ipse sit ; omnia 
 o7iera, qucB commu7iia quondam fuerint^ incUnaS" 
 se inprimores civitatis. Here the relative clauses 
 do not express the sentiments of the author, Li- 
 vy, but of the person, Tarquin, of whom he is 
 speaking. At the same time it will be necessary 
 to observe the distinction between the subjunc- 
 tive and the potential moods ; because, in many 
 cases, the sense may require the potential, without 
 being affected by the relative : as, He ordered 
 them to report ivhat they said^ quce dicerent^ ilmt 
 
 4 
 
so 
 
 is tvhat they should smjy potential. If, on the con 
 trary, the relative clause refers to thesentimenl- 
 of the author or writer, or is the actual language 
 of the person of whom the author is speaking, 
 tlie relative is followed by the indicative mood. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He declared that he was now eighty years old, and had 
 carried arms in the very territory now in question, not indeed 
 when he was a very young man, for he was then serving for 
 the twentieth time, when that war broke out. He wondered 
 in what manner those neighbours could hope to obtain from a 
 .people, to whose decision they appealed^ those lands, of which 
 they had never claimed the rights while that state flourish- 
 ed. As for himself, he had but a short time to live, but he 
 could not satisfy his mind, without lending his feeble voice, 
 old as he was, to assert their right to that tenitory,?rAt'fA he^ 
 %chcii a soldier^ had conquered by arms, fighting with all tlje 
 courage he possessed. (This evidently refers to the senti- 
 ments of the speaker, and not to those of the writer : as also in 
 the subsequent example.) 
 
 2. He rested the point of controversy not on the order of 
 succession, but on the felicity of his birth. That his brother 
 indeed had been born first, but it was while his lather was 
 yet in a private station; that he on the contrary was the first 
 born, after his father had been advanced to the throne. 
 That his brothers, therefore, who were born before hirjK might 
 claim as their right the private patrimony, which their father 
 jwssesffed at that time, but not the kingdom ; but that he was 
 the first, whom his father had brought np after he had obtain- 
 ed the kingdom. 
 
 3. You see, he said, the dress and ornament of your gene- 
 ral, which not any one of my enemies has laid ttpon me ; 
 for that would have been some consolation. (These are the 
 indentical v/ords of the speaker, and not the sentiments of the 
 author ; and therefore the relative clause is followed by an in- 
 dicative : if instead of being the very words of the speaker, 
 they had been his sentiments, as reported by the historian, the 
 verb would have been the subjunctive, imposuisHct : in this 
 manner, lie told tliem that they saw the dress, which not an 
 tncmy h^d laid on him.) 
 
31 
 
 « 
 
 4. He tlicn marched into Greece, and overlluew many 
 cities, by tlie extermination of which the Spartans, being 
 filarmed, enchjse with fortifications their city, which they had 
 always defended with arms, and not whh wails, in opposition 
 to their oracles, and the ancient glory of their ancestors. (This 
 refers evidently to the sentiments of the writer, and therefore 
 the relative is followed by an indicative.) 
 
 When the relative clause expresses the cause of 
 the action, and may be rendered in English by 
 the preposition in with the participle ; or when it 
 is used for et quod is, et qiioniam is, ^c. or comes 
 after ut pote, ut qidppe, it will be followed by 
 the subjunctive mood : as, omnes — laudare for- 
 tunas meas, qui gnatum haberem tali ingenio prce- 
 ditiim; All praised my fortunes, who had, or, in 
 having, or, because I had, such a son. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 1 . Happy sailor, who gained the shores, and was safely 
 drawn on dry land. 
 
 2. How imgrateful you are to fortune, whot\\\x% make a toil 
 of a pleasure. 
 
 3. Since there are many kinds of guests, icho estimate, or 
 and because they estimate my expense by their own, and des- 
 pise my homely fare, them I never will invite. 
 
 When the relative follows an interrogative, or 
 a negative, and expresses the same thing and 
 fjubject as the antecedent clause, it is joined with 
 the subjunctive mood : as, There is no one tvho 
 docs not hate you : nemo est, qui te non orderit. 
 This is for the sake of avoiding ambiguity ; since, 
 if we said, nemo est, qui te non odit, it might be 
 construed, he who hates you not is nobody. 
 
S2 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. h/to is {\w boy, who can ap^}Ii/ \o his studios, wUcic 
 there is surh a noise ? 
 
 2. There is ?io one who does not umlersfandj that the body 
 ' ' ' - ' " ' ' ' t recruiied, when it is 
 
 The relative coming alter the English verbs to 
 he, to be founds when preceded by the word there^ 
 is, for the sake of perspicuity, followed by the 
 subjunctive mood : as, There are men tvbo say : 
 sunt qui dicant. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Tliere have been found men, who voluntarily shortened 
 iheir own life : these I think worse, and more mischievous. 
 
 2. There are philosophers, who think that the most precious 
 thing in life is time. 
 
 When the relative comes after intensive word^, 
 as, such, so, and is used for ut ego, ut tu, ^-c. it 
 is followed by the subjunctive : as, lam not such 
 a man as to say, or, / am not the man, icho says ; 
 non snm is, qui dicam. This w^ill not take place 
 after the demonstrative pronoun is ; for it would 
 then be, / am not that man, who say, non sum is 
 qui dico, or, Lwho say am not that inan. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I am not so hard-hearted, as to deny you your request. 
 
 2 Such h the authority of this man, that it can neither be 
 shaken by the secret intrigue ol his enemies, nor by the opeu 
 attacks of the muhitadc. 
 
For the sake of perspicuity the subjunctive will 
 be used after qui^ \v hen it is preceded by such 
 resti'ictive words as, solus^ imicus, umis : as, He 
 is the only one of the family who learns ; est solus 
 exfamilid qui discat ; were we to say discit, it 
 might be mistaken for, he who learns is the only 
 one of the family. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He was the only one of the philosophers, iclio maintain- 
 ed that wisdoin was the only guide of life, which led to happi- 
 ness. 
 
 2. He was the only one who saidxh?iX the soul of man is the 
 man, that the body is nothing but a dwelling or an instrti- 
 ment. 
 
 When qui is used foi the interrogative indefi- 
 nite quis^ and not as a mere relative, it is follow- 
 ed by the subjunctive ; as Tell rne, ichom you see^ 
 . die mihi quern videas : if it was merely the rela- 
 tive, as in this sentence, / know the man whom 
 you see^ it would be, notus est mihi homoj quern 
 vides, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. As for me, from the time when I first saw you, and learnt 
 from most men, with whom I conversed, what erudition and 
 virtue ynu possessed, it became the first object of my wishes, 
 to gain your love and esteem. 
 
 2. Do you inquire to what end tend so many sciences, and 
 by what arts men hav£ polished the rude manners of barba- 
 rians, and have changed worse for better, disgraceful for excel- 
 lent, and the vilest for the most precious things ? 
 
 It is not only after dignus, that the relative qui 
 is used for ict^ but in general where the relati\ e 
 
 ... . 4* 
 
34 
 
 olausc indicates any final causr, design or piir- 
 jyusc, and might be rendered by a supine, by vt 
 or ae/j llieji qui may be elegantly used : a^ 
 He sent embassadors to sue for peace ; misit It ga- 
 tes qui pacem peterent. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 1. He sent certain men to bring him to town. 
 
 2. Then Romulus by the advice of the Fathers sent Embas- 
 sadors to the neighboring states ^;.sohcit the friendship anvl 
 connubial alliances with this newly established people. 
 
 3. I did not give you money to use at your pleasure. 
 
 4. He further enjoined them to send spies into all parts to 
 learn the designs ai>d motions of their enemies. 
 
 5. As he could not assault the place by covert ways, he or- 
 ilered the engines to be ready, to assault it by open force. 
 
 6. I gave you those books to send to your brother. (This 
 might aLo be elegantly rendered by the participle future pas- 
 sive.) 
 
 And in many other instances it is used for the 
 English infinitive, where the sense will easily 
 admit of it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. As a calm at sea is understood, when the least breath of 
 wind does not stir the waves ; so is the quiet and peaceful 
 itate of the mind beheld, when there is no passion to discon^ 
 pose it, 
 
 2. They have no clocks to distinguisJi hours, nor miles to 
 show the distance of places. 
 
 3. My drift is not to take away the army from Pompey, and 
 keep it myself, which yet were no difficult matter for me to do j 
 but that he may not have it to use against me. 
 
 4. Caesar does us wron^ to kssen our tributes by his 
 comiDg. 
 
Ill sentences which admit of a transposition, 
 without creating any obscurity, it is very elegant 
 to put the relative qui, quce^ quod^ and its com - 
 pounds^ before the antecedent, in the beginning 
 of the sentence ; as qnam mecum colis amicitiam^ 
 nmlti laudant : and to give greater force or stress 
 to the sense, and in order to form a stronger con- 
 nexion between the relative and the antecedent, 
 the pronouns is^ hie,, idem,, &c. are elegantly 
 placed before the second member of the sen- 
 tence ; as quern deus misit^ ei iion creditis, whom 
 God hath sent, him ye believe not. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. We commonly say that those men are always asleep, irho 
 ill our o})inion are indifTerent and careless about every thing. 
 (Quos })utavius,) 
 
 2. Nothing can be more foolish than those, who, in a free 
 city, behave themselves in an audacious and alarming man- 
 ner. 
 
 3. Let every man exercise himself in the profession, which 
 he knows ! 
 
 4. Whatever change of manners takes place in princes will 
 soon pass into the people. 
 
 *5. W^hat ! did not those men destroy every vestige of re- 
 ligion, who asserted that the opinion we entertain of the im- 
 mortal Gods W21S artfully inculcated by some wise men from 
 motives of state policy; that religion might lead those men to 
 the performance of their duty, wham no principle of reason 
 could influence. 
 
 *6. For certainly no one invested with supreme power and 
 authority, would (unless he was moved by the persuasion of 
 sublime and enchanting oratory,) so far condescend to listen to 
 justice, without a violent effort on his part, as to suffer himself 
 to be put on a level with those whom he possessed such means 
 of excelling y and of his own free will to depart from those dtr 
 
36 
 
 Hirhtful habits, which must already, from their antiquity, have 
 obtained the force of nature. 
 
 7. Drops of crimson blood' distil and stain the earth with 
 core fmm the tree, which I tore from the soil, having first 
 broken its roots asunder. 
 
 8. The same land shall receive you returning thither in its 
 fertile bosom, which first brought you forth the race of mighty 
 ancestors. 
 
 9. For every one after the loss of life covered with his body 
 that spot of ground, which he had chosen and occupied in the 
 engagement when alive. 
 
 10. Those monuments, which lie had erected to his fame by 
 the greatness of his genius and learning, lived many agrs 
 after him ; and even afterwards, when a thick and impenetra- 
 ble cloud had almost entirely extinguished the light of sciences, 
 they were indeed erased from the sight of men, but they left in 
 the minds of the learned an incredible regret and sorrow for 
 their loss. 
 
 When the relative in the beginning of a sen- 
 tence is used for hoc^ id^ ^c. and serves as a con- 
 nexion to what goes before, then it must always 
 be placed the first word. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . When cranes traverse the seas in search of warmer cHr 
 teates, they are observed to form the figure of a triangle. 
 Those at the base, nestle their necks and heads in the back 
 of those, that fly before them. Since the leader himself can- 
 not do this^ because he has nothing, by which he may sup- 
 port himself, he flies back that he may also in his turn rest 
 himself and one of those that have rested succeed to his place. 
 This mutual succession is preserved during their whole 
 flight. 
 
 Estj sunt, eritj ^c. elegantly admit the rela- 
 tive qui, quce, quod, witli the omission of the an- 
 
37 
 
 tx3cedent aUquis quoddam, ^c. followed by an iu* 
 dicative or a subjunctive ; as, 
 Est de quo tibi gratulor. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. There is some one to whom you can give tliese letters. 
 
 2. You have what to write, in these eventful times. 
 
 3. There were some men at that time wlio said Cicero did 
 not deserve so highly of his country. 
 
 4. There are some men lohose delight is to follow the campi 
 and to encounter the dangers of war. 
 
 The omission of the antecedent is also ele- 
 gant, where it may be easily inferred from the 
 sense of the subject ; as, 
 
 You have one, or, a friend, who w ishes you 
 well : 
 
 HabeSj qui tibi bene cupiat. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He sent men or servants^ to invite all his friends to sup- 
 per. 
 
 2. Sciences are soon acquired, if you have a master who can 
 t^ach them with diligence and faithfulness. 
 
 (This rule may be referred to the former.) 
 
 The pronoun is. or ille^ is oftener understood 
 before tlie relative qui., quce, quod. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He who despises riches, is a wise man. 
 
 2. Cut if we retreat through fear and consternation, these 
 same circumstances will be adverse to us; neither the advan- 
 tage of situation, nor the number of allies, will be able to pro- 
 tect himj whom arms could not protect. 
 
The rclath'cs qualis, qnaniu$^ quotj are ele- 
 gantly placed before the anttxedeuts, talis, tan- 
 tusj tot ; and the relative adverbs quanta ubi, 
 quo, quam, quamdiu qxtoties, before tantb, ibi, hoc, 
 or 60, tarn, tamdiu, toties ; as, 
 
 Atlas was made as great a mountain, as lie 
 was a man : 
 
 Quantus erat, tantus mons /actus Atlas. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Citizens usually conform themselves to the example of 
 those, who govern the state. (Say, suck as those, who govern 
 the state, such are usually citizens.J 
 
 2. There are almost as many different kinds of speaking, 
 cw there are orators. 
 
 3. The more elevated we are in rank, the more submissive 
 should we behave ourselves. 
 
 4. As long as the life of Crassus was harrassed by the toils 
 and intrigues of ambition^ so long did he receive greater 
 renown from his private actions and greatness of mind, 
 than profit or glory from the power and dignity of the 
 state. 
 
 *5. Spurius Cavilius having contracted a lameness from a 
 wound, which he had received in the service of bis country, 
 and being ashamed on that account to appear abroad, his 
 mother said to him, Why do you not show yourself before 
 the public, my dear Spurius, that as many steps as you take, 
 the mind may be struck with the remembrance of so many 
 virtues ? 
 
 For omnis qui, and omnia quce, it is often much 
 better, as it is more concise, to put quicunque^ 
 qnisquis, and quidqrdch 
 
S9 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 I wish 3'ou to consider that in all tlii<ng,<ij in tvJucJt you caa 
 siiow a kindness to my friend, you will bind nie to you by the 
 strongest ties of gratitude. 
 
 The pronoun quid is most frequently used for 
 tlie adverb cur ; as, 
 fVJiy do yo you weep ? 
 
 And on the contrarj'^ it is more elegant to use 
 the adverbs cur^ quare, quamobrcm, instead of 
 propter or ob querriy quam, qiiod^ ^c. as, 
 
 Many reasons occurred to my mind /or which I 
 thought that labour would prove an honor to you. 
 
 Multa mihi veniehant in 7nentem qiiamobrem il- 
 ium labor em tlbi honorifore jnUarem. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Nor yet have I been able to devise any reason, for tcMch 
 he ought to undertake their cause. 
 
 2. But if there is no reason for icliich you should load this 
 miserable wretch with so great calamities, my advice is that you 
 >;hould spare him. 
 
 3. But tlier«3 were many reasons for which I wished to be 
 there. 
 
 4. '^There will be that for ichich the enemy may strip you 
 of .your arms, not for iclilch you should be a terror to them. 
 
 To the interrogatives quis^ quce, quid^ qu% 
 qunndo^ the particle ec is elegantly prclixed ; as, 
 Brutus ecquid ngit ? 
 Wat does Brutus ? 
 
4(y 
 
 , EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. 1 pray you f/?/*^/ so great misfortune can you iraagin;!, 
 which does not fall to my lot ? 
 
 2. IFho had the power of entering into the forum ? 
 
 3. IFhcn did you suppose that you would give in an account 
 of your proceedings ? 
 
 Id quod is most frequently used for quod, when 
 it refers not merely to one substantive, but to the 
 whole preceding sentence ; as, 
 
 You love virtue ; ivhich I commend : 
 
 Amas virtiitem, id quod hmdo, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. The undeserving are often loaded with wealth and 
 honors, whilst the good meet with contempt and repulse ; 
 which is the reason that virtue itself is not practised with much 
 zeal. 
 
 2. But the man who feels no shame, lohich I find happens in 
 many, I consider not only worthy of reprehension, but even of 
 j)unishment. 
 
 S. You have signified your intention to leave this country 
 soon 5 ithich has aifected us all with the most lively concern. 
 
 When the pronoun is^ is used for talis, it is 
 olegantly followed by qui, quae, quod, instead of 
 ut is, ut ea, ^c. as by the same rule quantus^ 
 qualis, quot, quoties, will be more elegantly put 
 lor ut iantus, talis, tot, toties ; as, 
 
 Such, or so great is your desire of revenge, 
 that if I was inflamed with //, 1 should be very 
 miserable. 
 
 Ea or tanta est tua vindictce cupido, qua or 
 fjuantd si Jlagrarem. miserrimus essem. 
 
it 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Such indeed is your learning) that, if I possessed Uy 1 
 tiliould call myself fortunate. 
 
 '*2. For I would not have Civsiir, to whom I am bound by 
 the strongest obligations, imagine me capable of giving suck 
 advice to Pompcy, that, if he had followed it, he might indeed 
 have obtained the first celebrity and jwe-cminencein the forum, 
 but he would not have attained so great power as he now pos- 
 sesses. 
 
 *3. As for L. Ccesar, wlien I had come to him at Naples, 
 though he was bowed down and afilicted with diseases of the 
 foody, yet before he could have an opportunity of embracing 
 nie, he exclaimed, O my dear Cicero, I congratulate you on 
 having so much inlluence with Dolabella, that, if I had as 
 much interest with my sister's sou, i should pronounce myself 
 «]uite recovered. 
 
 4. You have read Homer f^o often, thai, if I had read him 
 m often, things would go on much better with me. 
 
 5. We have gained so many trophies from our enemies, thai 
 jio nation can boast of ever having gained so many. 
 
 Qui, quce, quod, is often elegantly used simply 
 for talis, or tantus, or qualis ; as, 
 Such is thy love towards me: 
 Qui tuns est erga me amor, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 T . Such is thy hardness of heart, the divine judgments will 
 t last fall upon thy guilty head. 
 
 2. Cities also, as well as other things, spring from the 
 lowest beginnings; afterwards, such as their own bravery 
 ;jnd the gods assist, get themselves great power, and a great 
 name. 
 
 3. Every person holds an inward and secret conversation 
 with his own h^rt, diwd such as it highly concerns him to regu- 
 late properly. 
 
42 
 
 And what deserves to be imitated, as beiii}!; 
 particularly elegant, is the use of qaalis, without 
 being preceded by talis ; as, 
 
 You cxre blessed with such a child, tliot if I 
 had such a one, 1 should greatly rejoice : 
 
 Felix es pueroy qualis si mihi esset, magnopere. 
 gauchnem. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Especially as the senate and people of Rome had then such 
 a leader, that, had they now his fellow, Uie same fate would 
 overtake thee, which then befel them. 
 
 Qui, quce, quod, w ith or without quippt, is very 
 elegantly used for cum, or quod ego, cum tu, ^c. 
 and cujus, for cum ejus, cum meus, cum tuus ; cm 
 for cum mihi, &^c. Avith the verb that follows in 
 tlie subjunctive mood ; as, 
 
 What w onder that men die, ivhen we know 
 that they are mortal? 
 
 Quid minun homines mori, qiios sciamus mar- 
 tfiles esse ? Quos used for cum cos. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Ilow is it possible that you should converse on the sub 
 Vcct of literature, since you never paid the leajJt attention tc 
 iif 
 
 2. And certainly that conduct of mine is entitled to the hieii 
 est^commendation, in that I was unwilling that my fellow citi 
 zens should be exposed to a band of armed rufiians. 
 
 ru They rated and blamed the Belgae, for having svrrcib 
 dercd themselves to the people of l^ome, and abandoned th< 
 bravery of tln.'ir proeenituj^. 
 
43 
 
 *4. The RuniHii power had already acquired sufficient 
 strength and stability to become a match for any of the neigh- 
 bouring states in war ; but from deficiency of women, it was a 
 Gfreatness that could last but one generation of man, since they 
 had -at home, no hope of progeny, and were debarred from all 
 intermarriages with their neighbours. (Say, unce neither the 
 hope, &c. nor intermarriages were to thcm^ &c. And use the 
 relative qui^ qitccy quocL) 
 
 The relative qxii^ qucb^ quod, is elegantly used 
 after idem instead oi ac or cum ; as. 
 
 Nor had he the saine master as his father : 
 Nee eodern magistro, quo pctter^ usas est. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . The wise man is not confined within the same bounds irith 
 the rest of the world. No age, no time, no place, limit his 
 thoughts, but he penetrates and passes beyond them all. 
 
 2. At the same time icitli the ^dui, the Ambarri also ac- 
 quaint Caesar, that their country being depopulated, they 
 cannot easily keep off the violence of the enemy from their 
 towns. 
 
 3. This nation is not so warlike as the neighbouring states; 
 and it does not make use of the same weapons in war, as other 
 nations. 
 
 Qui, quce, quod, is also elegantly used for et is, 
 et ego, et tu, <^'C. foi- is vero, tu veto, ^c. in the be- 
 ginning of a sentence, or a member of a sen- 
 tence, when it may be easily referred to what 
 goes before ; as, 
 
 It happened in my absence, and had I been 
 present : 
 
 Me absenie accidit, qui si adfuissem; ior et ego, 
 si, or si vera, ^^c. 
 
RXAMPLfeS. 
 
 1. You hfiVe al'vays given me wholesoni*? advice; end if I 
 Uiul always I'ollowcd it, I should have been happy. 
 
 2. When I received the iururmation of the death of your 
 drtugliler TuUia, 1 leh indeed that sorrow and aflliotion for her 
 loss, which 1 could not but feel ; I looked upon it as a common 
 calamity ; and if I had Been present at it, 1 would not Jiave 
 feeen wanting to you. and I would have openly nianifesied and 
 declared my own grief to you. 
 
 *3. But he employed the interval that followed, not in en- 
 deavouring to blot out the memory of the ancient quarrel, 
 bat in concerting- measures to renew the war ; and after he had 
 built and equipped the most formidable fleets, and had raised 
 powerful armies, under pretence of carrying the war into the 
 flominiona of the neighbouring states, he sent Ambassadors into 
 Spain to those commanders, against whom the Romans were 
 in actual hostilities. 
 
 4. A friend was then at my house, and he told me that he 
 feared it would not succeed. (Utsuccederet, Vereornejiaty 
 expresses what we wish not to happen ; vereor utfiat, what we 
 wish to happen, but are afraid it may not.) 
 
 6. I asked hira this question \ and when he did not answer I 
 refused to do it. 
 
 Qiu*, quae^ quody may also be used for quia^ 
 nam ego, tii, is,, ^c. when it is clear from the 
 context, that though the causal conjuiiclion is 
 not inserted, yet it may be easily inferred from 
 the sense ; as, 
 
 You are truly reprehensible, for when you 
 stand in need of the friendship of all, you injure 
 all: 
 
 Vert rpprehensione dignus es, qui, cum omnium 
 amicltid indigeas, omnibus noces ; for 7iam cum tv 
 omnium, ^-c. 
 
45 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 *1. And even our calamities will furnish some variety to 
 your writings, not unaccompanied with that kind of pleasure, 
 v/hich has the power of arresting the mind in the perusal of 
 history. For nothing is more calculated to aftord dehght to the 
 reader, than the changes of times, and the vicissitudes of fortune. 
 For though to our own experience the?/ could not he very desi- 
 rable, yet in the perusal, they will be entertaining ; and, indeed, 
 the remembrance of past calamities, when no longer attended 
 with danger, affords a sensible deliglit. 
 
 2. For, certainly, it is not my part, since, as you are used 
 to wonder, I apply generally so much industry in writing, to 
 commit myself so far, as to appear to have been negligent in 
 it, especially as that would be the crime, not only of negli- 
 gence, but also of ingratitude. 
 
 5. It was not the part of that general, since he knew that ho 
 was in the midst of enemies, to suffer his soldiers to go out of 
 the camp unarmed, and to straggle about the fields. 
 
 Qui^ quce, quod, is also often used for cwn in a 
 narration. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Caesar knowing that the enemy would immediately aban- 
 don their camp, advanced with his forces against them. 
 
 2. The man being of some authority, of a grave demeanoui . 
 advanced in years, and a father too, was struck dumb with as- 
 tonishment, at the barefaced proposal of this shameless man. 
 
 The relative qiiij quce, qnod, is often used for 
 a substantive, especially after the verbs sum and 
 habeo, when the sense seems to demand such a 
 variation ; as, 
 
 I have a request to make to you. 
 
 Est quod te rogem. 
 
 6 * 
 
EXAMPLK?. 
 
 1. If thou brinej thy sift to the altar, an<l thfrc rrni»'ni!)rn..st 
 dial thy hrotlior hath ous^ht ng(finsf (hff, (thatis^n comphunty 
 that of trhich he may complain) leave there thy. gift before the 
 cihar, and go thy way ; first be reconeiled to thy brother, and 
 then come and ofler thy gift. 
 
 2. I have an accusation against thee, that thou has deserted 
 thy fii*st love. 
 
 Qui, mice, q^wd, may in some injslances, be used 
 for the English particle after ; as, 
 The fourtli year after he had come : 
 Quarto quo venerat anno^ 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 What ! have you not heard of Ca3sar-s achievments in 
 Spain ? Two armies beaten ? Two generals defeated ? Two 
 provinces taken ? These things were done forty days after 
 Caesar was come in view of the enemy. 
 
 It must be observed, that though the English 
 very often omits the relative, yet the ellipsis must 
 always be supplied in Latin. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 l.The man I saw yesterday, told me of your disaster. 
 
 2. Go into the village over against you, and bring away all 
 the provision^ you can collect^ that we may set sail again im- 
 fnediutely. 
 
'ir 
 
 OF VERBS. 
 
 As it is 5^ometimes difficult to determine, when 
 an accusative with the infinitive is to be used, af- 
 ter the English conjunction that^ and when it is 
 better to turn that into quod or ui with a nomi- 
 native followed by an indicative or subjunc- 
 tive, it will be proper to attend to these few ob- 
 servations. 
 
 We always use ut^ and never the accusative 
 with the infinitive, after ita^ sit, talis, or is used 
 for talis, tantus, adeo ; after verbs of causing or 
 effecting, persuading, impelling, exhorting, advis- 
 ing, compelling, entreating, beseeching, decreeing, 
 commanding, except jubeo ; and after verbs of 
 telling, writing, and armonncing, when they cai'- 
 ry with them the force of a command ; as, 
 
 Tell him to come. 
 
 The Senate wrote to him to return. 
 
 And also after accidit. Jit, contingiL 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Heipersuadedftne to write. 
 
 2. I beseech you to come. 
 
 3. I happened to see you. 
 
 4. He commanded me to come. 
 
 5. Your neighbor is plunged into such profligacy and ktxu- 
 ry, that words cauuot describe his desperate condition. 
 
49 
 
 C. Tlierefore lie goes directly to Marius ; he informs him of 
 what had been done, and advises him to attempt the castle on 
 the side, by which lie had chmbed up ; he promises that he 
 himself would point out the way and share the danger. 
 
 But let it be observed, that when moneo de- 
 notes information, and not advice, it is always 
 joined with the infinitive ; as, 
 
 He apprised him by a trusty messenger, that it 
 was in agitation to break down the bridge. 
 
 In the same manner, persnadeo, though gene- 
 rally followed by nt^ when it signifies to convince^ 
 is always followed by an infinitive ; as, 
 
 I wish you thoroughly to convince yourself, 
 that no one is dearer to me. 
 
 Observe also, that the articles of every agree- 
 ment, or condition of a bargain, are expressed 
 by ut. 
 
 After verbs denoting a doiiht or opinion^ the 
 Latins elegantly use/ore or futimim esse, follow- 
 ed by tit or qui J with the subjunctive, instead of 
 the future of the infinitive ; as, 
 
 I doubt not thai there will be many who 
 
 No7i dubiio fore plerosque, qui 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . I hope that he will return into your favour. 
 
 2. I do not doubt that many ivill think this mode of writing, 
 trifling and insignificant, and altogether unworthy of the char- 
 acters of those great personages. * • 
 
 3. I never thought that a power, which seemed so firmly 
 established, would so soon fall to the ground. 
 
 This form seems to have been originally made 
 use of in verbs, which wanted a supine, and 
 consequently a future of the infinitive, and to 
 
49 
 
 iiavc been afterwards adopted more nniversaliy 
 on accotmt of the elegance of the variation. 
 
 After the verbs to will, to wish, to desire, to suf- 
 fer, and after csquum est^ oportet, necesse est, se- 
 quitiir, either iit, or the accusative with the infi- 
 nitive may be used indifferently. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I desired that my father should write. 
 
 2. A man must die. 
 
 3. It is right this should be done. 
 
 4. Hence it follows, that no man can make a great progress 
 in literature without genius. 
 
 5. He wished him to assemble his forces and to march 
 against the enemy. 
 
 Actives should be changed into passives, or 
 quod and ut, should, if possible, be used wiiere 
 two accusatives with an infinitive might create 
 an ambiguity, which of the two was the case of 
 the infinitive ; as patrem te amare diciint : Here 
 it is doubtful, whether you love the father, or the 
 father you. You will therefore say, either pa- 
 trem (l te amari, or a patre te amari. 
 
 Quod may be used when it implies the cause 
 or reason, of what goes before, when it might 
 easily be changed into quia, and alter verbs of 
 certain affections, as of rejoicing, griemng, ^^c 
 
^juod may be safely vised, as well as the accusa*- 
 
 (ivo with the infinitive ; as, 
 
 I am glad that you are returned safe : 
 
 Quod redieris incolumis^ oi*, te rcdiisse incola- 
 
 meiriy gaudco. 
 
 KXAMI'LES. 
 
 1. After the troubles of mind and the pains you have eii- 
 ♦ Inred, I cannot but rejoice that you are so well. (Qudd here 
 implying the cause or reason, that I rejoice, may be equally 
 used, or the accusative with the infinitive.) 
 
 2. I have received letters from homo, and am overwhelmed 
 with the deepest sorrow, that my fathw is so ill. 
 
 With these few exceptions, however, the ac- 
 cusative with the infinitive, is most frequently 
 used by the ancients. 
 
 But the conjunctions ut and qnod are not to be 
 used indiscriminately : the chief difference seems 
 to be, that when the preceding clause is or ought 
 to be the cause or reason of the following, we 
 should use ut ; otherwise the accusative with the 
 infinitive, or sometimes quod. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. You have often exhorted me to make a collection of my 
 epistles, if I should write them with any degree of acourarv- 
 ("Here the exhortation is evidently the cause of collecting tl»e 
 epistles.) 
 
 2. So many and rrreat favours have you heaped upon nu . 
 that so far from ropayiug them, I must live and die ron«( i<:u.s 
 •f my own ingratitude. 
 
^ 
 
 After the comparative, the sign 
 too, too mack, we must make use o^^^/a t/^ \^8)|^ 
 the subjunctive ; as, ^ ^ ^ 
 
 He is too proud to teach youjt U N I V K it- S I T 
 Superbior estj qmm ul te doce^^. ov ^k 
 
 EXAMPLES. ^^^i^ ^IjFOIS^ ^ 
 
 1. His learning and virtue are too great to he setfortli witli 
 advantage by me, and too well Jcnoicn every where to need it, 
 unless I would, according to the proverb, show the sun with a 
 lantern. 
 
 *2. Caesar \vas too old, in my opinion, to amuse himself 
 with projecting the conquest of the world. Such an imagina- 
 tion was excusable in Alexander, a prince full of youth and 
 fire, and not easy to be checked in his hopes ; but Csesar ought 
 10 have been more grave. 
 
 3. Some boys are too idle to learn, and too contumacious to 
 obey the precepts of their masters. 
 
 The conjunctions ut ne joined together are 
 often elegantly used for ne ; as, 
 
 The first principle of justice is, that no one 
 should do an injury to another : 
 
 Justitice primum mimus est, ut ne cui noceas. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. And do not so far commit yourself, lest when you have 
 been supplied with every thing by us, you should appear to have 
 been wanting to yourself. 
 
 2. We must also take care that we may not appear to do this 
 through anger. 
 
 3. When you return from abroad, always remember, tliat 
 the death of your wife, or the illness of your daughter, arc 
 common and possible events^ in order, that nothing may be 
 new and unexpected to you. 
 
5^ 
 
 Tlicxrommon rule, that when two vcrbitoiiK 
 together, the second is put in the infinitive, must 
 be resti-icted within very naiTOw limits. It is 
 chiefly and only used after certain verbs, as volo, 
 nolo^ cupiOj amo, conor^ tento^ audeoj studeo cogi- 
 tOy possum, nequeo, obliviscor, debet, ccepi, incipio, 
 constituo, soleo, consuevi, cogor, scio, ^-c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . IMy father urged mc to write to liim, by the tendcrest 
 motives of aflection and gratitude. (We should not say im- 
 j)ulit scribere, but ad, or ut). Per anwrem et omnia pietatis 
 officia. 
 
 2. Since my parents wish to educate me in the liberal arts, I 
 ^Itall do my utmost endeavours to learn many things. 
 
 Care must be also taken not to fall into Gre- 
 cisms, by too rash a use of the infinitive ; as, 
 
 He instigated him to ask for this. (Here the 
 infinitive ivoidd be tvrong.) 
 
 He xcent to the river to wash away the blood. 
 
 The same caution must be used after adjec- 
 tives; as, 
 
 He is a fit person to do that. 
 
 My brother is very desirous to learn. 
 
 That lesson is very easy to understand. 
 
 Quin is used for ut no/i, followed by a subjunc- 
 tive. 
 
 It is impossible that a man of genius and of 
 great industry should not be a learned man. 
 
 Often for quod non : 
 
 I dare 7iot blame what you have done^ not that 
 I do not differ from you in my opinion, but because 
 I know you have acted from the best of mot ices^ 
 arid to the be^t of your judgment. 
 
S6 
 
 For qui non^ in tliese forms : 
 
 There is none^ who dors not know. 
 
 Who is there, who does not believe it ? 
 
 Very often for cur non, followed by an indica- 
 tive. 
 
 Why do you 7iot fly hither ? 
 
 Why do you not arm yourseJf? 
 
 JVIiy, if we feel the vigor of youths do we not 
 mount our horses ? 
 
 After a negative expression, or even an inter- 
 rogation, the Latins make use of nisi, quin, where 
 the EngUsh usually has the particle but ; and 
 sometimes of quij quce, quod : as, 
 
 They are fit for nothing, but to be slaves: 
 
 Eos non decet nisi esse servos. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. There is a time, when the richest women ought to mnr- 
 ry ; they seldom let slip an opportunity at first, but it fills their 
 minds with disappointment and hitter anguish. 
 
 2. Among the Epicureans, there is nothing, but wiiat a 
 crowd of atoms can perform. 
 
 3. Caesar's translation of estates from the rightful owners ({J 
 strangers, ought not to he accounted liheral 5 for nothing is lihe- 
 lal, but what is, at the same time, just. 
 
 4. What is it to recollect one's self, but to i-ally the scattered 
 and disordered parts of the soul into their proper place r 
 
 5. When riches take their flight and forsake us, we should 
 consider, they deprive us of notliing, which was properly and 
 truly our own. If they should slip away from us, they'll take 
 nothing away but themselves. 
 
 *6* When Romulus was snatched from the people, the sena- 
 tors ruled by turns. Upon this, the commons murmured 
 that their slavery was multiplied, that a hundred lords were 
 
 6 
 
put upon them for one: nor did tliey any longer sicm likely 
 to endure any other but a king, and liini too of ihcir own 
 making. 
 
 The conjunction quasi has a subjunctive mood 
 after it ; but it must be observed that it is al- 
 ways used by the ancients with a present, if the 
 precedhig verb, or the subject itseh' be concern- 
 ing a thing present, though the English has the 
 perfect or imperfect ; and if the subject refers to 
 the past, it is always used with the perfect, though 
 the English has a pluperfect ; as, 
 
 You are silent, as if you did not know that 
 the thing is so : 
 
 Tacesj quasi nescias rem ita esse. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. You are silent concerning this business, as if you did not 
 know it. 
 
 2. Are you not a foolish fellow, to ask me what I think will 
 be done in this business, as if I was acquainted with what he 
 himself does not know? 
 
 3. For he writes in such a manner, as if I had been obliged 
 to go to them, and not they to me. 
 
 The conjunction qmim, or cum, when implying 
 a reason previously known, or given, and an- 
 swering to the English since, is usually followed 
 by the subjunctive ; and when it is used for et^. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. JFhen I know you are accustomed to read pood books, I 
 wonder tliat you reap so little ac! from them. 
 
55 
 
 "5. Things heing sOy or this being the case, I shall say Uo 
 iTiore. 
 
 3. Since this is the case, and as he loves tliese studies, let 
 Iiiin be indulged. 
 
 4, Though ihey pleaded his cause with great eloquence, yet 
 he was condemned to be banished. 
 
 The English panicle heiiig, implying a cause,; 
 is variously rendered into Latin : chiefly by quuniy 
 cmij quippi qiiij ut qui, utpote, ut pole ciim^ ut. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He was noted for the wisest person, that had ever been ; 
 there heing no sort of knowledge, with which his mind was not 
 stored in great abnndance. 
 
 *2. Music lays us asleep, when we would go to rest ; recre- 
 ates our spirits, when we are tired with business ; banishes mel- 
 ancholy, when we are oppressed with sorrow 5 and augments 
 our pleasure, when we would be merry; being no less fit to 
 wait upon feasts, than they, that attend at the table. 
 
 3. He was as much valued and esteemed by the whole party, 
 as any man ; and he deserved it, being more accomplished thaa^ 
 any of them. 
 
 4. This we most earnestly request of you, as being a thing 
 so agreeable to equity, that we think we cannot demand a more 
 equitable one. 
 
 5. The king honors him greatly, being a person in whose 
 fidelity and prudeiice he can confide. 
 
 When a subjunctive goes before in a sentence, 
 conjunctions, which in themselves govern an in- 
 dicative, or even the simple relative qui^ qticBj 
 quod J will generally require the verb following to 
 
tie likewise in the subjunctive, if the two xortiis 
 are closely connected in tht idea ; as, 
 
 It is right, that, when we arc in health, wc 
 ihould think of death : 
 
 ^quiim est, utj cum sani simus^ ile 'inorte cogi- 
 
 (Note, That the subjunctive ivc should think j 
 though by transposition it comes in the last 
 clause of the sentence, must be considered in 
 sense as the lir^t subjunctive.) 
 
 IXAMPLKS. 
 
 1. He is so fond of writing, that he immediately commifs 
 to paper all the undigested thoughts, which come into his 
 mind. 
 
 2. It often happens that those, whom we love most, aie the 
 soonest snatched away from us. 
 
 S. The king commanded that thopp things, trhich were 
 necessary for the war, should be got ready with the utmost 
 iiastc. 
 
 4. Since I had been first accosted by those men, ir/so said 
 that our troops had met with a terrible rcvei'se of fortune, I 
 eould not but believe it. 
 
 5. I determined to remain in the country, that, whilst the 
 season of the year was convenient, I might pursue rural occu- 
 pations. 
 
 And in the same manner, after an accusative, 
 witli the infinitive, a verb preceded by those 
 conjunctions, or by the relative qnl^ quee, quod^ 
 will more elegantly be in the subjunctive ; as. 
 
 Who will deny that 1 have performed u!" 
 you enjoined me ? 
 
 Q set 77i€ peijecissej qttod prceceperis ? 
 
57 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 1. Iknowtliat my father will soon reurn, because he has 
 not written to us. 
 
 2. It behoves us not to undertake any thing of moment, 6e- 
 fore we have well considered it. 
 
 3. But know, that there are more, who refuse to pay the tri- 
 bute, than tiiose who wish to have it exacted. 
 
 Observe that the English participle active or 
 verbal in ing, in several colloquial or vulgar ex- 
 pressions, is more elegantly rendered by turning 
 the verb into a passive impersonal ; as. 
 
 There is no trusting to the bank : 
 
 Ripce non bene creditur. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. There is no more resisting uncontrollable folly, than the 
 violent course of a river. 
 
 2. He denies that there canhe any living pleasantly ^ withcxct 
 living virtuously. He denies that fortune has any ascendant 
 over a wise man. 
 
 3. These briars and thonis being platted close together, were 
 fences to them ; into which there was not only no entering j but 
 
 ^7ioteven any seeing through, 
 
 4. He commends the courage and constancy of the senate ; 
 he acquaints them with his forces, that he has ten legions ready ; 
 besides, that he knows, and has found for certain, that Csesar^s 
 soldiers are disaffected to him, and that there is no persuadirig 
 them to defend or follow him. 
 
 Verbs which cannot be used personally in the 
 passive, must be used impersonally, or with a 
 transposition of the active : as, He was succeeded 
 by his soriy successit eifiUvs. It may be observed 
 
 6 * 
 
that verbs wJiich do not govern an accusativ^em 
 the active, do not admit of the corresponding 
 jierson in the passive ; as, / am believed ivhen I 
 ^eak the truths mihi vernm dicenti creditur. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . In your wisest desi^s you arc resisted by the rashness of 
 your intenperute and ignorant colleague. 
 
 2. Though the}' just now wished tosojnd a retreat, they 
 r.ow feel their breasts warmed with the hope of victory, and 
 the general is cheerfully obeyed through the whole army. 
 
 The English termination in ing belongs to 
 both voices, active and passive, and denotes that 
 the action is progressive or imperfect. It re- 
 fers either to past^ present or future. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. The master is writing, but the boys are playing, 
 
 2. The house was building, when the floods suddenly came 
 upon it, and left not a vestige behind. 
 
 3. The dinner loiU be getting ready , while the guests are 
 assembling. 
 
 The Enghsh verbal in ing*, after verbs of pre^ 
 venting^ prohibiting^ ^c. is rendered by the sub- 
 junctive mood, with the conjunctions, quin^ ne^ 
 ^nd quo minus ; as 
 
 I will not hinder you from studying , 
 Per me non stabit quo minus studtas. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . We were not able to deter even the Rheni, our brethrec 
 aftd kinsmcD ia blood, fjvw consenting mth these people. 
 
5^ 
 
 2. As our enemies found the means fo disturb the former 
 league, so they left nothing neglected, to hinder the renemng of 
 the same. 
 
 3. Be not hindered from paying your vow in due time, nor 
 put it off till death. 
 
 4. The winds hinder the bees from carrying their food 
 home. 
 
 0. Why do you keep me from using my own. 
 
00 
 
 As there is some difficulty in the use of PAR- 
 TICIPLES, they will require to be more par- 
 ticularly considered ; since they contribute great- 
 ly to the elegance of style, when judiciously 
 used, and will as much injure it, if adopted too 
 indiscriminately. 
 
 In general, as often as the relative, qui^ qtirTj 
 quod, occm's, it may be omitted, and the verb, 
 before which it goes, may be changed into a 
 participle, which must agree in case with its an- 
 tecedent; as, 
 
 I wdsh to satisfy my friend, who desires what 
 is honorable : 
 
 Amico honesta petenti satisfacere volo. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. By the studying of the liberal arts, a name is often ac- 
 quired, wJiich will never perish, 
 
 2. When a bungling cobler, who was perishing with want, 
 had begun to practice medicine in a place, in which he was not 
 known : 
 
 3. At length, O Romans, have we driven away, discarded 
 atid pursued, with the keenest reproaches, this wretch who ivcts 
 intoxicated with fury, ivho was breathing mischief, and impious- 
 Jy threatening to Jay waste this city with fire and sword. 
 
 4. Some shepherds beholding this conflagration, and having 
 collected a band of five hundred, pursued the enemies, who 
 tcere dispersed^ and were ignorant how great the numbers 
 were, because their own fear and the smoke of the fires had in- 
 tercepted their view, and having slain nine thousand, put the 
 rest of the plunderers to flight. 
 
To define this more fully, wc may $ny, thai 
 when two verbs, or two divisions of a sentence 
 are so closely connected together, that the one 
 is the cause or the antecedent of the other, and 
 both refer to one subject, having the relative qutj 
 or the conjunctions ubi, quando, duni^ postquamy 
 ^"C. between them, these last are rejected, and 
 the clause, before w hich they were to be put, is 
 expressed by the participle. 
 
 EXAxMPLES. 
 
 1. And first I will vindicate my present behaviour to Cato, 
 mho governs his life by the certain rule of reason, and diligent- 
 ly weighs the motive of every duty. 
 
 It must be observed, that the participle must be 
 put in the case, which the noun or the verb of 
 the other clause governs ; as. 
 
 When the Roman citizen was fixed to the cross, 
 his hands dropped with blood. 
 
 Here, hands is the substantive, which governs 
 the genitive, and the participle consequently must 
 be put in the genitive. Therefore we should say, 
 
 Civis cmci adfixi manus safiguine stillarunt. 
 
 2. When I think of this circumstance, it appears wonderful 
 to me. 
 
 Here the verb videtitr requiring a dative, the 
 participle must be put in the dative, and we^ 
 should say, 
 
 Cogltanti mihi hac de re, permirum videtur. 
 
 *3. Uliile I considered with myself, and for a long time 
 revolved in my own mind, in what way I could best benefit as 
 many of my follow citizens as I could, there occurred to me 
 none more effectual, than to give them rules and precepts for 
 ihe attainment of the liberal arts. 
 
4* 
 
 4. TJut as she did not tnist in his promises, he seinh li^r 
 icord tliat he wished to associate her sons into a share of the 
 kingdom, with whom he had carried on the war, not with a 
 view of depriving them of the kingdom, (that he might de- 
 prive thorn,) but that he might bestow it as of his own free gift. 
 
 5. M hen he entered the vestibule on the very threshokl, 
 "^oplioiiisba, the wife of Syphax and daughter of Asdrubal, 
 met him ; and having descried Masinissa in the middle of the 
 trooj) of armed men, conspicuous above the rest for his armour 
 and other habiliments, supposing, as really was the case, that 
 it was the king, she fell at his feet and said, ^' Both the Gods 
 and your valor and fortune have given you an absolute power 
 over us.'' 
 
 But when two parts or divisions of a sentence 
 "have each a separate nominative, and refer to a 
 different subject, the clause, which generally has 
 dum>, cum, quando or postquam with it, if it is 
 rendered by a participle, will be turned into an 
 ablative absolute ; or, for the sake of brevity, in- 
 to some other case dependent on the noun or 
 verb, as in the last examples : as for, 
 
 When my father died, we sold his books, 
 
 We should sav, 
 
 Paire mortuo, ejus libros vendidimns : 
 
 Or perhaps still more elegantly, 
 
 Patris mortui libros vendidinius. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. But when his friends exhorted him to reduce Greece 
 under his power, Darius fitted out a fleet of fixe hundred ships. 
 
 2. But as, or when^ our men still demurred to leap into the 
 sea, chiefly on account of the depth of the water in those parts, 
 the standard-bearer of the tenth h^i^ion, having first invoked 
 the Gods fgr success, cried aloud, " Follow me, fellow soldiers, 
 
6i 
 
 «tttlcss you will betray the Roman eagle into the hands of ihe 
 enemy." 
 
 3. They say that wJiile the boy was sleeping, his head ap- 
 peared suddenly in a blaze ; and that, ivhen the tumult was ajv 
 peased, the queen forbade the boy to be moved, till he awoke 
 of his own accord. 
 
 4. These atrocious crimes were not unpunished. For zcJiile 
 the Gods pour down their vengeance on so many perjuries, 
 and such bloody parricide, he is himself stript of his kingdom, 
 and being taken in battle, he loses his life by the sword of the 
 enemy. 
 
 5. When the enemy was thus entangled in the narrow 
 stroights, and reduced to extreme necessity, he sent an officer to 
 their camp, to demand that they would surrender themselves. 
 
 The force of these two rules may be more 
 clearly and briefly illustrated by these two short 
 examples, in which it is shown, v/hen the abla- 
 tive absolute may, or may not. be used : 
 
 fVheii the sun rises, the moon ivithdraivs her 
 light. 
 
 Here are two nominatives to two different di- 
 visions of a sentence, the first of which may be 
 rendered by the ablative absolute : and. 
 
 When the sun rises^ it piits the stars to flight. 
 
 Here is only one agent or nominative case re- 
 ferring to two different actions or verbs, \\ hich 
 are, however, closely connected together, and 
 consequently, though the first division may be 
 changed into a pai'ticiple, it must remain in the 
 nominative. 
 
 But it is not solely by the rejection of tlie rela- 
 tive, or of these conjunctions, that participles are 
 to be used ; for very often and with greater cic- 
 
gancc, a substantive will be changed into a par- 
 ticii)le; as, 
 
 At the sight of my father, 1 ran away. I re- 
 ceived him 071 his return, (redcuntem.) 
 
 Though in this cai^e also, the substantive be- 
 ing thus turned into a verb, and admitting the 
 conjunctions mentioned above, might be referred 
 to the foregoing rules. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Tills officer /rom Ms mistrust of his own safety, and that 
 cf the legion, rushed unarmed out of his tent. 
 
 *2. And we shall devote ourselves wholly to the contemph' 
 tion and consideration of these subjects ; because, first of all, 
 there is implanted in our minds a certain i 'satiable desire of 
 discovering the truth ; and the more the very skirts of the pla- 
 ces, whicii we have already reached, facilitate our knowledff^ 
 of heavenly objects, the more do they inspire us with the desire 
 of perfecting that knowledge. 
 
 3. If therefore I am under the necessity of arraigning one, 
 I still seem to adhere to the rule which 1 have proposed to 
 myself, without deviating from the patronage and defence of 
 men, 
 
 4. For my mind is agitated with many serious and distress? 
 ing thoughts, which suffer me to take no rest either by day 
 or by night : first the cares and anxieties of my consular of- 
 fice, which, whatever troubles and difticulties it may occa- 
 sion to others, to me, above all men, cannot but be most bur- 
 densome and perplexing. No indulgence would be given to 
 me in any error y and the most s})lendid merit would be recom- 
 pensed by the small and reluctant voice of praise. In my 
 doubts, 1 could expect no friendly and disinterested advice, in 
 7ny labors J I should receive no efiectual assistance from the no- 
 bility. (Say, no advice to me doubting; uo assistance would be 
 to me laboring.) 
 
65 
 
 XL\er post especially the substantive is elegant- 
 Jy changed into a participle : as, 
 
 EXA3IPLES. 
 
 1 . ^fter the building of the city, many years elapsed Lt'- 
 fore any form of government was settled. 
 
 2. yifterj or since, the birth or creation of men, our com4.. 
 lias not been desolated, by so long and dreadful a war as ti' 
 present. 
 
 Of two verbs that have a relation to each oth- 
 er, and have a case common to both, instead of 
 l)eing connected by the conjunction et, and put 
 in the same mood, the one is elegantly turned 
 into a participle passive and becomes the case 
 of the other, or if the sense requires it, will agree 
 with the nominative case ; as, 
 
 He took and killed him. Captum interfecit. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 3 . Some of these ivere selected and sent to consult the Del- 
 phic oracle. 
 
 2. Besides the conspirators were many, who went to Cati- 
 line, in the beginning. Among these was A. Fulvins, the son 
 of the Senator, whom his father drew back from his intended 
 journey, and ordered to be killed. 
 
 3. He made an obstinate resistance, and fought desperately 
 to defend the house in which he was ; but within an iiour or 
 two, he is taken and carried away to prison, 
 
 *4. Other useful and liberal studies appear to me to have 
 been pursued with the greatest celebrity by the wise and good 
 men in their leisure and retirement, (concelebrata) and to have 
 derived the greatest spleytdor and perfection : (enituisse) but 
 this science seems to me to have been deserted by the greatest 
 part of them, and to have fallen into neglect at a time when 
 it was necessary that it should be encouraged and promoted 
 with more than usual zeal and ardor. 
 
66 
 
 The nominative of the participle present ac- 
 tive is very inelegant, and is better rendered by 
 a periphrasis with a conjunction ; and where 
 two verbs come together joined by the conjunc- 
 tion, and, if the first is of the past time, it may 
 be turned elegantly into the participle of a verb 
 deponent; as, 
 
 He kissed me and forbad me to cry : 
 
 Me oscidatiis vetuit ftere. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. He tJien complained bitterh/ of their inactivity, and in- 
 formed them he had sent Manlius forward to that multitude 
 whom he had instructed to take up arms 5 and had dispatched 
 others to convenient places, to make a beginning of the war, 
 ;tnd that he himself wished to take his departure for the army, 
 if he could first dispatch Cicero, who stood very much in the 
 ^vay of his design. 
 
 2. A very few, trusting to their strength, swam over ; all the 
 rest, our horse overtook and slew. 
 
 3. He promised better things of himself for the future, and 
 then he raised iiis eyes to Heaven, and invoked the protection 
 of the Gods. 
 
 4. He thought that he could easily escape out of their hands, 
 and suddenly rushed i\\xoug\\ the thickest of the enemies, but 
 he soon fell to the ground pierced with a thousand weapons. 
 
 After the verbs malo, volo, nolo, euro, ^c. par- 
 ticiples passive agreeing with their case are more 
 elegant than the present of the infinitive active ; 
 as, 
 
 Fll take care to find you, and bring your 
 Pamphilus with me : 
 
 Inventum tihi cvrabo et mecum addxietum tuun 
 Pamphilum, 
 
or 
 
 EXAMPLE, 
 
 1. We beg this one thing of yon, that, i^f out ot your cle- 
 mency you have determined to save us, you would not strip 
 us of our arms. 
 
 2. But there is also something, of which I should tvish to ad- 
 ttse you in a ^q\\ words. 
 
 3. lie loiskes now more than ever that his son should die. 
 
 4. The tyrant would not wish to free him from his anguish. 
 
 5. In obedience to the orders of the King, he took care to 
 provide all things necessary for the expedition. 
 
 6. Pie ordered that he should tahe care to slay him, under 
 pretence of holding a conference with him. 
 
 The participle future passive, with the dative 
 of the person, is more elegant than the verbs 
 debeo, oportety necesse est ; as 
 
 Diogenes being asked at what age a man 
 ought to marry, said, young men not yet, old 
 men never : 
 
 Diogenes interrogatus qua cetate ducenda sit 
 uxor ; juvenibusj inquit, nondiim, senibus nun- 
 quam. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . There is nothing, which old age ought to guard agaimt 
 so much, as sinking into languor and inactivhy. 
 
 2. We must not only acquire wisdom, but we should exer^ 
 eise it for the good and advantage of mankind. 
 
 The gerund in do is often elegantly used, with 
 the omission of the adjectives signifying conven- 
 ience, &c. as Par, idoneus, ^c. as, 
 
 He is equal to paying ; Est sohendo. 
 
6S. 
 
 EXAMPLKS. 
 
 i. Farmers slioultl lake caro y^-hai .^r.u 
 
 ■\ ^lUl ill Hi. 
 
 iith : for okl and woni-out seed is not ft for b-owing, 
 
 •L\ Brown or pack paper is not Jit for wrtting. 
 
 3. I know not \s herlier I ever saw a stronger man : Uc h 
 • quid to batrin'j iniy \\<M^r},t. 
 
 The gerund followed b> a substanlivc is ele- 
 gantly changed into the participle future pas- 
 ive, and agrees with that substantive in gender, 
 number, and case : but only in those verbs that 
 govern an accusative ; as, 
 
 I shaJl ease all my regret hy sending and re- 
 ceiving letters : 
 
 Omne desiderium Uteris mittendis accipiendis- 
 que Uniam. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . In all my distresses and difficulties it has always afforded 
 me a heartfelt satisfaction to behold your alacrity and readi- 
 ness in defending my cause, 
 
 2. I have always been the foremost in defending your lib- 
 erty, (Frinceps with a genitive.) 
 
 3. What can be more difficult than, in determining the dif' 
 ferences of adverse parties, to acquire the good will of all ? 
 
 4. We are by nature prone to love virtue, and to detest vice. 
 
 A finite verb, or a verb, which determines th( 
 sense, or the action, is often changed into the 
 participle future passive, with or w^ithout csscy 
 where the subject depends upon the will or tin 
 judgment of the agent, and the verbs pulo^ cu 
 bitror, existimo, credo^ censeo.jvdico^ statiio. ducc. 
 
69 
 
 tideor or video^ ctiro^ ^c. are added ; as scriben- 
 dum putaviy for scripsi ; but care must be taken, 
 that the choice of tliese verbs be appropriate to 
 the sense, as we should not say, that a man mo- 
 riendum pittavit for mortuiis est, as not depend- 
 ing upon his will. 
 
 EXAMPLES. ♦ 
 
 1. Caesar, seeming sufficiently to understand the minds or 
 his soldiers, tried, (or thought Jit to try,) what intention or 
 inclination Pompey had to fight. 
 
 2. When the Temple of Janus was shut, and he had by 
 means of treaties and alliances conciliated the good will of all 
 the neighbouring states, and thus removed the dread of foreign 
 dangers, lest the minds of his subjects, whom the fear of the 
 enemy, and a strict military discipline, had hitherto kept un- 
 der restraint, should become enervated by luxurious ease, he. 
 instilled into them the fear of the Gods, which he thought 
 the most efficacious method to restrain a multitude in that 
 age so rude and uncivilized. 
 
 3. What so popular as peace? which methinks brightens 
 not only those beings, to whom nature has imparted animal 
 sense, but the very houses and fields with the smile of joy ; 
 what so popular as liberty? which you see not only men, 
 but the very beasts of the fields longing after, and even pre- 
 ferring to every thing else ; what so popular as ease ? which 
 is so gratifying, that every man distinguished for his bravery 
 will gladly undergo the greatest toils and difficulties, that he 
 may one day live at ease, especially if accompanied with 
 power and dignity. 
 
 *4. No avaricious views diverted him into the pui*suit of 
 plunder ; no criminal passion seduced him into pleasure ; the 
 charms of a country provoked not his delight ; the reputation 
 of a city excited not his curiosity ^ nor could even labour 
 itself sooth him into a desire of repose. In short, he did not 
 so much as visit thqse paintings, statues, and other ornaments 
 of the Greek cities, which the other Gejierals canted off at 
 pleasure. 
 
 5. I wish to explain more at large, ia this assembly c€ 
 
 7 * 
 
70 
 
 learned men, that discipline wliich Petronius has lightlv 
 loiiclicd upon, especially as in die examination of it, I may 
 be able to exliibit and explain that plan and method of doc- 
 trine which 1 myself pursue. 
 
 6. The wisest men have dratcn from these sources, that is 
 from Greek and Latin, every improvement of human genius, 
 all true and solid learning, every precept of true wisdom and 
 prudence, and ^hat is of much greater consequence, the best 
 examples for the •formation and direction of a good life fbcnc 
 instituendce vitao.) 
 
 A pai'ticiple passive is often elegantly joined 
 to a verb as antecedent to it, and put into the 
 neuter gender, being made to agree with the 
 sentence, though either of the two verbs would 
 liave been suflicienty as, Qimm relaium legerint. 
 
 A similar mode is very frequently adopted 
 Avith the verb habeoj when the English word to 
 have refers not merely to the perfect but to the 
 present ; as, 
 
 JVe have found or discovered that the sun 
 > lands still : 
 
 Covipertum hahemus solem consistere. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . AVe have received it from tradition^ (or we have recciv- 
 ' d it as delivered from antiquity.^ 
 
 2. I comprehend in my mindy (or I hold it comprehended in 
 my 7nind.) 
 
 3. Yqu could scarcely mention any thing which he did not 
 know : for as we mark with letters, whatever we wish to 
 commit to a lasting monument, so he had engraven all things, 
 on his mind. 
 
 The participle future active should be used^ 
 
71 
 
 instead of the verbs cupio^ volo, and statuo, with 
 the omission of the conjunctions cmn and si, 
 when they merely imply something future ; as, 
 
 If you intend to set out on your journey, shake 
 off your sleep : 
 
 Iter initurus eripe te somno, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. When you wish to write verses, read Virgil, and thus hi> 
 manner may, by degrees, be imperceptibly transfused into 
 your poetry. 
 
 2. When I was thinking of writing this letter to you, intel- 
 ligence was brought to me, that you were gone into Italy. 
 
 All verbs signifying motion to a place, may 
 be variously rendered : either by a supine, a 
 gerund, or by ut with the subjunctive ; but with 
 greater elegance by the participle future active ; 
 as, 
 
 He came to snatch away the boy : 
 
 Venit ut eriperet puerum ; 
 
 Venit, ereptum puerum ; 
 
 Venit J eripiendi puerum causa ; or ad eripicn- 
 dum puerum : 
 
 But more elegantly, 
 
 Venit erepturus puerum. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. He was so harrassed by remorse, and driven to despair 
 by the stings of an evil conscience, that he retired into the 
 deepest recess of a wood, to kill himself by his own sword ^ 
 but when he thought he had collected sufficient resolution, and 
 was already on the point of plunging the steel into his owr 
 breast, his courage failed him, and he returned home without 
 accomplishing his purpose. 
 
 2. I am come to extricate you from all your difficulties. 
 
3. ne retired into the temple, to imjyiore the favour of the 
 Cods, arul to consult the oracle, but a band of ruffians, un- 
 mindful of the sacred place in which so foul a deed would be 
 perpetrated; rushed upon him and slew him before the altar. 
 
 One or two more words in a sentence are ele- 
 gantly placed between the participle and the verb 
 sunij which, in that case, generally comes first. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I think I shall not be very far from the truth, in assertinj^, 
 that among all those, toho have been employed in the most libe- 
 ral studies of the arts and sciences, there have existed a very 
 small number of excellent poets. 
 
 2. I had not the least doubt, that many messengers, and re- 
 port itself, would, by its rapidity, anticipate this letter. 
 
 *3. But those, whose grovelling souls are fixed upon the 
 earth, whose whole thoughts are bent on worldly and perisha- 
 ble objects, those men we see depart from life with manifest re- 
 pugnance and difficulty. And not without a reason. For hav- 
 ing a nearer view of the immortality of their souls, they already 
 feel unspeakable torments, as if eternal punishment teas on the 
 eve of overtaking a life spent in the commission of enormous 
 r rimes* 
 
 '^^-j^^H%'^ 
 
rs 
 
 OF TElNSES, 
 
 In a coiitinucd narration, which is intended to 
 I epresent circumstances as it' they were present 
 to the eye, the present indicative is more in use, 
 than the perfect. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. The Commander, observing the general consternation, 
 called a council of war, and having summoned all the Centuri- 
 ons of the army to be present, inveighed against them, with 
 great severity, for presuming to enquire, or at all concern them- 
 selves, which way, or on what design, they were to march. 
 
 2. A few days after, Ennius liaving come to Nasica, and 
 asking for hiro at the door, Nasica cried qui that he was not at 
 honae. 
 
 It is usual with the Latins, in a narration, to 
 make use of the present infinitive instead of the 
 indicative, with the ellipsis of ccepij or of some 
 other verb ; this is called the historic infinitive : 
 as in that line of Virgil : 
 
 Nos pavidi trepidare metii^ crinemqueflagrantem 
 
 Excuterc. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . In the mean while, both knights, patricans and consufs, 
 were predpitittwg fast into slavery. Those chiefly, who werr 
 distinguished by thf ir dignity and eminence, assumed the mask 
 Mf hypocrisy: put on a hurried step, aud displayed reserve ami 
 
74 
 
 « omposure in their countenances, and from a dread of manift'>- 
 lirifr at first too great an excess either of joy or sorrow, at tlu 
 <leccase of the Prince, tliey took care to blend equally togeiijci 
 their tears and joy, their adulation and complaints. 
 
 *2. The Vjneae were worked, and drawn up, with tHee^reat- 
 s-t danger, and to no purpose; for as soon as they had brought 
 -iiem reasonably close, the fire and stones that poured upon 
 them soon destroyed and nMidered them useless. The sol- 
 diers could neither stand before their works, on account of tlie 
 inequality of the ground, nor be of any service among the ^ i- 
 ne£e, without the most imminent danger. The bravest of tin* 
 troops were cither slain or wounded^ and the rest were struck 
 with an irresistible panic. 
 
 3. Then all in the assembly exclaimed that the country was 
 m danger, and that tiie enemies were already at the gates ; they 
 then suddenly rushedforth, determined either to conquer, or to 
 die bravely for their country. 
 
 4. The man being struck with the fear of impending danger, 
 faulteredy hesitated^ and blushed. 
 
 Where the subject is general, and the word 
 man is either expressed or understood, the passive 
 is not always used, but it is as elegant to put the 
 second person singular of the subjunctive, or the 
 infinitive, with the verb est or licet ; as, 
 
 A man may easily understand what use is to be 
 derived from literature : 
 
 Animadvertere est^ quanta ex re literarid quceri 
 possit utilttas. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. 2d. Persov Pres. Sub. — In every business, before m^/i 
 undertake any thing of moment, they should first deliberate, 
 and use the utmost caution. 
 
 2. What is promised with an oath, as if God were a witness, 
 must be inviolably kept. 
 
75 
 
 S. In FIN. wiih Est or Licet. — Men are seen everywhere 
 covetous of mone3\ 
 
 4. Men are often seen, not so much from a natural benevo- 
 lence, as from a desire of appearing generous, doing actions, 
 which seem to proceed rather from ostentation than good will. 
 
 5. 77^^« maj/ be seen in our other senses, that we are not so 
 long delighted with perfumes of a very high and sweet savour, 
 as with those that are more moderate. 
 
 In the epistolary style, instead of the present 
 tenses, the past tenses are often used ; most fre- 
 quently the imperfect. The writer seems to 
 consider the time of the letter's being read, not 
 of its being written, as the moment of narration : 
 as, / am ill : the letter writer should say, JEgro- 
 taham^ because his illness may have left him be- 
 fore the letter is received. A future is rendered 
 by the partciple future, with the imperfect of the 
 verb sum. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . There is (say was^ a report, that you have succeeded in 
 3'our enterprize. 
 
 2. I am thinking of setting q^ to-morrow. (Participle fu- 
 ture with imperfect of sum.) 
 
 3. If there shall be a long interval between my letters, do 
 not wonder at it ; (perfect subjunctive,) for I shall he absent 
 o r a whole month. 
 
 4. I write this on the twelfth of June, and send it by the 
 letter-carrier. 
 
 There is some difficulty in the use of the fu- 
 ture perfect, owing to the incorrectness of the 
 
76 
 
 English, which generally nses the sinij>le prt^i 
 ent lutiuT, or perfect, ^^ here It (Might to ha\ e n 
 future perfect. It generally follows these parti 
 cles, c?7m, ubij 5/, (juando, and is used w^heu ili« 
 \ erb, that accompanies it, is in the future im- 
 perfect, and itself denotes a future action abso- 
 lutely completed ; as. 
 
 When he comes, we shall sing. 
 
 Cum venerit ille^ canemus. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . When your fallier comcs^ I shall tell him wiiat i>rogrts - 
 } ou have made in 3^our learning. 
 
 2. When you have sent me that book, I shall give it to m 
 father.-' 
 
 S. If you do thisj I shall be highly indebted to you. 
 
 4. Whatever you resolve^ will please me. 
 
 5. To-morrow ifi\\G enemy go out of their camp, to forage 
 and lay waste the nritrhbouring country, I shall give orders for 
 a chosen troop to sally forth, and if possible, to take the forag- 
 ing party in the rear, and cut them off from their main army. 
 
 6. And if I show, as fully as I am able, that there is no 
 >ulid doctrine or useful art, worthy the cultivation of a liberal 
 juind, which the Greeks have not either invented, or of which 
 they have not as it were most abundantly sr ' the seeds 
 if) all parts of the world; and if 1 prove at 1 ^ .0 lime by 
 the most convinciiig reasons that it was they who from the 
 depth of darkness not only brought to»light and cultivated the 
 noblest sciences, but also carried them to such a he ii>hl of per- 
 fection as almost to take away from us every hope of following 
 or imitating them ; what youth ivill not feel his breast glow 
 with the warmest zeal towards that learned nation, and attach- 
 ment to it ? 
 
 This tense is by some e:ranimarians very er 
 
5wv or THE 
 
 roneously called a future subjunctj 
 ins invariably use the participle future, and the 
 verb sum^ to form a future subjunctive ; as, I do 
 not doubt but he w^ill prove a learned man : Non 
 dubiiOj (juin evasurus sit doctus. When verbs 
 have no supine, and consequently want a parti- 
 ciple future, they employ the periphrasis/ore utj 
 as we have already observed ; as, 1 hope he will 
 learn ; spew ^ fore ut discat. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Such is his skill, bravery, and knowledge of the military 
 art that he will without doubt extricate Jdmself from that 
 danger. 
 
 2. He will use so many arts, that he will corrupt ray son. 
 
 3. I think that^ if misers bury their treasures in a chest, 
 not only their thoughts but their bodies will always havg over 
 that chest. 
 
 And often where the English has a future, the 
 Latins, speaking with greater accuracy, make use 
 of a present, when the matter relates to a tiling 
 present. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Who i/?i7Z e/cwy this ? I am so far from invalidating the 
 force of this argument, that I wish to pay all possible resperi 
 to so high an authority. 
 
 2. Every one mU easily understand^ that the whole of my 
 discourse tends to confute so erroneous an opinion. 
 
 The Latins often very elegantly use the pfc- 
 tcrperfcct subjunctive, instead of the present. 
 
 8 
 
78 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 1. Some one wm^ s«y, that virtue is Its own reward ; but 
 rew men will be induced to love virtue for its own sake, if tliey 
 are not at the same time impelled by other more powerful rea- 
 
 (»ns. 
 
 2. You may object to this, that man is born to labor, and 
 therefore he cannot e.xpcct a life of repose. 
 
 The present siibjiinctive of the verbs volo^ ma- 
 lo, 7iolo, possum, is often used for the imperfect, 
 as is the case with other verbs, when there is an 
 nterrogation. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I would ratJier please you and Bnitus. 
 
 2. If he must be sent for, which I should hij no means wish 
 e cannot but be struck with astonishment, at this unheard of 
 
 ;)rodigy. 
 
 S. Who could not understand a thing so intelligible ? 
 
 4. Who coidd believe, that you, who are already so much 
 ^ dvanced in years, should think of marriage ? 
 
 Concerning the SUCCESSION OF TEN- 
 
 '^ES to eacli other, as far as it varies from the 
 
 ^^nglish, as it is often attended with some diffi- 
 
 ulty, it may be observed, that after ut, ne, quo, 
 
 'UO minus, quin, qui, quce, quod, (piis, and other 
 
 articles, that govern the subjunctive, if a pres- 
 
 1 nt or future goes before, it is right to use tlie 
 
 >rcsent ; if an imperfect, perfect, or phiperfect, 
 
 hen the imperfect follows : as, he will be wor- 
 
 hy to be loved : dignus erit, qui ametur : he 
 
 /vas worthy to be loved : dignus ernt qui amarc- 
 
79 
 
 tur. But it will be necessary to pay strict re- 
 gard to the nature of the tenses, and the sense of 
 the subject ; hence some exceptions may some- 
 times occur. 
 
 A Present after a Present. — When speak- 
 ing of things present. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. YLoJiglitSj as lilie contended for his life^ 
 
 2. You tell me that your destiny is placed in my own hands, 
 as if it were possible^ that I should obtain this boon. (Here 
 it would be wrong to say consequerer, because ^en possit goes 
 before, though the English might seem to authorize it.) 
 
 3. I do not think, that tJiere are any men, who would not 
 wish to be informed of the fate of their absent friends. 
 
 *4. Do yon imagine that we could be supplied with sufficient 
 materials y so that loe could plead every day on such a variety 
 of subjects, if our mind were not cultivated with science; or 
 that it could bear being stretched to such a degree, if it were 
 not sometimes unbent by the amusement qi learning. 
 
 5. You write me word, that men are struck with amaze- 
 ment, how I should dare to do that, because it is not credible 
 that a man in his senses, could undertake so hazardous aa en* 
 ferprize. 
 
 But these will be excepted : 
 
 A perfect must come after the present, if 
 speaking of a circumstance that is past ; and a 
 future, if speaking of the future. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. You are now afraid, as if youfiad not at all^eenpreff- 
 ent, as if you yourself had not obtained that wealth un- 
 justly. 
 
so 
 
 ^. Is U nui rt'iij orcessaryyilmi a man /^iitjiUd itarn, M:(niitl 
 jiave Iciirnl) many things, before lie ventures to instruct others > 
 (Here h would be very improper to say, nt discal.) 
 
 n. IIow rash and impious are those men, who, in the hoiii 
 of despair, often ?mA, that they had never been bom, 
 
 4. It is to be hopcdy that that report of the murder of om 
 friend teas false. 
 
 r>. It is not possible, tliat an indolent man can ever acquire 
 dignity. (A future.) 
 
 6. I fear lest my father should return before that can be 
 done. 
 
 7. I am not a man, who never is to die. 
 
 8. Tell me, when your father comes. 
 
 In like manner, an imperfect, or a pluperfect, 
 must come after a present, in such forms as 
 these : 
 
 1 . Tell me what you would do. 
 
 2. Tell me, whether you would have come^ Sfc. 
 
 3. I wish that you Jiad avoided those associates* 
 
 In a succession of three verbs, where the prin- 
 cipal verb is in the preterite, and tlie two fol- 
 lowing denote a future, that which comes after 
 the future infinitive, and implies an event then 
 completed, will be elegantly put in the pluper- 
 fect potential : as, he promised that he would da 
 it, when they returned. Se idfacturum esse^ cunt 
 rediissentj pollicilus est. 
 
 IBXAMPLES. 
 
 1. O the memorable voice of that youth, who having sha- 
 ken off the chains of idleness, and removed far away every al 
 
61 
 
 lureinent to pleasure, declared tliat he tcould follow that mode 
 of life, whicli his parents advised. 
 
 2. He said, that he should cease to be the master of the ship, 
 if his favorite mates did not embark with Iiim. 
 
 3. But he refused to leave the ship. He said, that he iconld 
 perish f when his beloved riches were sunk. 
 
 4. He answered, that he would preserve the state, if they 
 surrendered before the battering' eng-ines reached the wall, but 
 there could be no other condition of their surrender, than to de- 
 liver up their arms ; and that whatever he did in the case of 
 his other enemies, {in aliis hostibits) he would do in their case. 
 
 But when tlie principal verb is not in the pre- 
 terite, then the otlier verb wliich comes ai'ter the 
 future infinitive, will be usually put in the fu- 
 ture perfect : as, hiovj that you ivill do me a 
 great kindness, if you come. Sclas. pcrgratum 
 te mihi facturum, si veneris. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 27tei/ say, that they will leave o^' childish plays, whm fh'if 
 are become great boys. 
 
 A Present after a Future. — Generally after 
 (tj ncj qub^ quin, 
 
 EXAMPLE?. 
 
 1. Whoever will persuade me to utter a falsehood, wiU at 
 last force me to consider him, as an impudent wretch. 
 
 2. If I do any thing, I shall inform you of it, novthall I ever 
 send letters home, without adding those which I wish to b(-* 
 delivered to you. (Not adjuncturus sim.) 
 
 And always after qui, quce, quod, in these ex- 
 pressions : 
 
 1. There icillhe some, who will say 
 
 8 * 
 
82 
 
 ?. There tciU he found some, who trill affirm 
 
 3. B(it be well assured, that I shall certainly do what I 
 know you will wish me to do. 
 
 And after these particles, wti, quis^ quid^ quan- 
 do, cur, i^. when the idea of a thing present 
 may be inferred ; as, 
 
 1. I shall see to-morrow wftat you do, and in what kind of 
 house you dwclL 
 
 2. I shall soon be able to tell you, whence it comes, that 
 you give me so much displeasure. 
 
 But other tenses will also come after a future, 
 if the sense require it, as a perfect after the fu- 
 ture. 
 
 1. If ray father does not return to-morrow, I shall fear that 
 he is killed by robbei*s. 
 
 2. Some one loill complain perhaps, of your being so long 
 with us, without any advantage. 
 
 And also a future after a future ; as 
 
 1. If your father does not soon return, I slutll fear that he 
 may not return for many months. 
 
 An Imperfect after the Imperfect. — And it 
 may be observed, that though a pluperfect, if 
 the sense require it, sometimes comes after an 
 imperfect ; neither a present, nor a perfect, nor 
 a future, should ever be placed after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 J. The house shone, as '\iit hud been of gold. 
 
 3-. I have received your letters, which informed me vfcat 
 
83 
 
 yuu employed yourself in, and when / Muld see you, ( I Im- 
 rus esee/n,) 
 
 3. Though these thhigs seemetT to surpass my beUef, yet 
 when I received your letters, I did not entertain the least 
 doubt, but that things were in tliat situation. 
 
 4. I should leish indeed never to have seen that wicked 
 wretch. (A pluperfect.) 
 
 An Imperfect after a Perfect, especially af- 
 ter Ut : After verbs of imshing, asking, advising^ 
 persuading, permitting, after necesse fuit, cequum 
 fait, and other verbs, that require the conjunc- 
 tion ut after them ; and after sic, talis, tarn, ita^ 
 tantus, quin, qui, ne, ^c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Your father took care to be thought rkh. 
 
 2. Though I spoke the truth, being once detected in a lie, I 
 could not persuade men to believe me 
 
 3. Pompey by his actions, obtained the name of Great.— 
 (Assecutus est ut.) 
 
 4. I have been prevented by that circumstance, from being 
 able to perform this business so soon. 
 
 5. I never entertained the least doubt, but I am, (or was) 
 very dear to you. 
 
 6. And when he could clearly distinguish the threatening as- 
 pect, and heard the menacing words of tlie approaching, and 
 enraged multitude, and he wanted the courage to fall upon his 
 own sword, a friend was found to dispatch him. (Qui.) 
 
 Let it be observed that when the action is im- 
 plied as fully completed, the pluperfect is ele- 
 gantly used. 
 
84 
 
 * EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He ' ' ' him to come into school till his hands and 
 ice were < ., and his head combed, 
 
 2. He tcould not suffer him to depart, till the business traa 
 jimshcd. 
 
 There will also occur many exceptions to 
 this : the perfect must sometimes be used alter a 
 perfect, as, 
 
 1 . He enga^d m so narrow a strait, tliat the whole line of 
 his ships could not be extended. 
 
 2. So far loas he from betraying the insolence of triumph^, 
 that he even pitied the fortunes of his fallen enemy. 
 
 And if the sense require it, a present or a fu- 
 ture will also be found after a perfect ; as, 
 
 1 . This man has learned so little, that he can now scar(fely 
 read. 
 
 2. You have been the cause by your own perfidy, that no 
 one will for the future, repose any confidence in me. 
 
 An imperfect is also used after the pluperfect, 
 subject to some exceptions, which the sense will 
 easily point out. 
 
 / EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. If you had delivered this message to him, notJiing would 
 have prevented him from coming to us, 
 
 2. If you had persuaded him to pursue tliose measures, he 
 certainly would have followed your advice. 
 
 As to the succession of tenses in the infinitive 
 mood, concerning which such various opinions 
 
rj 
 
 liave been given by grammarii^, it must be ob- 
 served, tliat, though it may be assumed with 
 Sanctius and others, that the infinitive is often 
 \ ery indeterminate in its tenses, since we say 
 cola legere, and volni Icgere^ and Terence says, 
 eras mihi argentum dare se dixit, and Virgil, Pro- 
 geniem sed enim Trojano a sanguine daci audie- 
 rat, yet we may safeJy give it as a general rule, 
 that the tense of the verb, w^hich is used in the 
 infinitive, must be determined by the time of its 
 action, or state, relatively to the former verb. 
 Thus w^hen Cicero says, vidi enim, (nam tu abe- 
 ras) nostros inimicos cupere bellum : cupere is 
 present in relation to the time when he saw that 
 they wished for war, and therefore it is put in 
 the present, and cannot be said, as some gram- 
 marians would affirm, to be used for cnpivisse. 
 Had it been cnpivisse, it would have had a re- 
 ference to that wish of the enemy, as existing 
 prior to the vidi, which is a sense not intended 
 to be conveyed. Sed abunde erit ex iis duo exem- 
 pla retulisse. The circumstance of having pro- 
 duced these two examples, is antecedent in time 
 to the former verb : it would therefore not have 
 been so correct, and quite a different meaning, to 
 have said referre. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. On that day there was much speaking on our side, and 
 my words seemed to make a strong impression on the senate. 
 
 2. J kneto there had eocisted men of the first celebrity for 
 learning and wisdom in the state. 
 
 3. When he heard ih?it the enemy had declared war, and 
 understood at the same time that thei/ ravaged the noighbouc- 
 ing states. 
 
;i^ 86 
 
 4. Tlie wisest jfflWsophers maintained that there was only 
 one God. 
 
 5. He then takes a magnificent view of himself, and derives 
 delight and no small advantage from storing Wis memory wiili 
 an immense mass of names and deeds, and aequiring a variot y 
 of erudition ; and though he does not himself neglect true learn- 
 ing, yet he determines this to he the most solid advantage of 
 history, in contemplating the splendid and immortal genius of 
 great men, to form his own mind and that of his pupils, by 
 their eminent virtues, and thus to receive the assistance of their 
 wisdom and niiulcnce, rather thaii of mere erudition. 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 OF THE ORDER OR ARRANGEMEMT OFV WORDS. 
 
 Felicissimus sermo est, cui et rectus ordo, et apta junctura, et 
 cum his Humerus opportune cadejis contingit. — Quint, 
 
 A.S these three requisites, order or arrange- 
 ment, connexion and harlnony, seem to be point- 
 ed out by Quintilian, as necessary to form an 
 elegant style, we shall offer some observations 
 upon each. 
 
 The order or arrangement of words is either 
 fixed or arbitrary ; that is, words must either re- IR 
 tain the same invariable order, which tlie an- 
 cients have assigned them, or will chiefly depend 
 upon the natiu^al succession of our ideas. 
 
 These words, for instance, arc always placed 
 in the beginning of a sentence, n«m, at, vcriim, 
 sedj quart, quamohreyn, and si, nisi, etsi, quan- 
 quam, quia, quoniam, cum ; except in few cases, 
 where, if these words occur, they will claim the 
 .first place, as, qui nisi, quod si, qui quia, tu si, ^t. 
 
anvavs 
 
 On the <^*^^^V^ 7 fiiun^ vera, autemy quoquc, 
 quidemj arc aW^s useil after one or tA> o, but 
 geiy^rally after the first word of a sentence. 
 
 *1. For I much fear that nature, \\\ giving us weak and in- 
 hrm bodies, and subjecting tliem to incurable diseases and in- 
 sufferable pain!^)»has also given us minds both ready to sympa- 
 tldse with the pains of the bodies, and often tormeUted with 
 their own separate anguish and disquietude!|p 
 
 2. But we both magnify future evils, by our dread of them, 
 and aggravate present calamities, by our unavailing sorrows, 
 and choose rather to throw the blame on the nature of things, 
 than on our own errors. 
 
 3. Philosophy indeed is so far from meeting with the just 
 commendation, which its benefits to mankind deserve, that by 
 most men it is utterly neglected, and by many it is openly con- 
 demned. 
 
 Etenim^ itaque^ ergh^ deniqxie^ tandem, are us- 
 ed either as the first or second words. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. A debauched and intemperate young man will undouht- 
 edly, if he live, transmit weakness and infirmities to his latter 
 days. 
 
 2. Let us then sufler ourselves to be exercised and porhops 
 cured by this wholesome discipline. 
 
 Ne quidem are elegantly separated by one or 
 more words coming between them, generally by 
 that or those words, on which the stress of th** 
 restriction is laid ; as, 
 
1 
 
 He is ofibiidcd not even at the smuUe^i triilo : 
 A^e minima quidem re offenditur, 
 
 EXAMPLKS. 
 
 1. For my part I do not thinky that the knowledge offut> 
 rity would even be attended with any utility to ws. How mii- 
 erable, for instance, would have been tlie life of Priam, if. he 
 had known from his youth tlie calamities, which were to befal 
 him in his old age. 
 
 2. So far are you from Iiaving perused all those !)ooks, tb . 
 you have not even read one, 
 
 3. The poor are sometimes so destitute of necessaries, that 
 ihey have not even enough to clothe themselves. 
 
 4. Hence it follows, that if one body is not driven by an- 
 other, they cannot even touch one another. 
 
 The parts of a compounded word maybe cl 
 egantly divided by some other word coming 
 between the parts ; as rem vero publicum amls- 
 simus. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. You will do me a very great favor ^ if you will \(\\e me 
 an opportunity of showing the high regard, I entertain for you ; 
 as I wish, by every means in my power, to satiyfy our love and 
 friendship. 
 
 *2. To a reliance on the divine goodness, this roust be ad- 
 ded, that we should acquiesce in the divine will, and bear with 
 patience whatev^ accidents may befal us, ichattoevrr they 
 may appear to human nature. 
 
 3. Since you postpone all things to silver. 
 
 Nullus and nunquam are elegantly divided, 
 principally when coming with the conjunctions 
 et^ nee or neque ; as, 
 
 9 
 
90 
 
 Any c\il catl nf re/ lmj)ptn lo a gooJ m 
 Arc cjiim tnujuam bono quidquam /' '^'* 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. There is nothing which I desire more than to speak to 
 , ou : for I have no leisure to write lo you, and no messenger 
 t* ver comes near me. 
 
 *2. I confess that iIr* ronsciousncss of v'l^j^ht inuniious is tliC 
 greatest comfort in any accident that niay befal us, ajid tliat 
 there is jio greater evil than the persuasion that it is our (»wn 
 fault. 
 
 When two words are joined together b}^ a con- 
 junction, some other word, having a reference to 
 them, will be elegantly placed between tliem; as, 
 A rural and rustic voice delights some men : 
 Rustica vox et agrestis quosdam delcctat. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . See the levity and the inconstancy of men. 
 
 2. O Brutus, we are attempting quite a cliJicuU and arduous 
 4.ask ; but nothing is difficult to a lover ; and 1 love and have 
 
 tlways loved your genius, your pursuits, and your principks. 
 
 Anie^ priiis^ postj and poste(\ arc elegantly sep- 
 irated from quom ; as, 
 
 I shall sooner fiTrgct my own name, than the 
 benefits which you have conferred upon me : 
 
 Nomcn meum prius ohliviscar^ quum qua; apud 
 me collociisti henejicia. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Vou know, that at a certain time I went to Metapontus 
 vilb you, and that/nerer retired to my host before I had 
 
?^er. the very place and tii^ 
 his Hie. 
 
 \vllt'l>' I S lli.I''Ul .1-5 
 
 2. I shall answer, that Caesar, if I know him well, will con- 
 cult your honour, b.fore his own interest. 
 
 3. It becomes a wise man fo fry every thing by words and 
 persuasion, 6r/Io»re h<^ \yA< n<n.n>;.' t.^nrm^. 
 
 Qm<m plarod hct\v(\^n two words, may be 
 mai e elegantly put before the eompai'ativc ; as 
 Amciiia quam pccvnia delectat ampiws : Except 
 when it comes with mac:is and potius, which it 
 should immediately follow. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. It is very unpleasant for a prudent man to ask a g^^eat 
 favor of one, whom he thinks he has obliged, for fear of ap- 
 pearing to demand, leather than to beg, and to place it to the 
 account of a recompense, rather than of a favor. 
 
 2. Hence friendship seems to originate from nature, ratlier 
 than from weakness. 
 
 3. More people study to obtain riches than virtue. 
 
 4. Good men are always more suspected by tyrants than 
 bad men : for virtue is always very formidable to them. 
 
 5. Though Themistocles is justly celebrated, and his name 
 more illustrious than Solon's, yet virtue and wisdom, though 
 not dazzling, are more beneficial to mankind. 
 
 G. For guilt in point of time, goes before punishment, (^pri- 
 or) and to be reformed grows out of, or, is posterior to abuses. 
 (Peccai^e,) 
 
 When tiie English word the other, or another^ 
 is rendered by a repetition of the same substan- 
 tive, to v/bi^h it refers, or two words occiu* in the 
 

 mic sentence, one of which is derived from the 
 >ther, they must closely follow one another; as, 
 
 One love is expelled by anothn\ as one spike 
 i< removed by the other: 
 
 jimore amor^ utchtvusclavo^ tnidhur. 
 
 As also tw o words ha\ in;; u contrary signiii- 
 * acion, if they are opposed to each other, give 
 i;reater elegance to the sentence, if no other word 
 intervenes between them, as thus their opposi- 
 lion becomes more evident ; as, 
 
 They, who wish to appear learned in the sight 
 of fools J appear /bo/6 in the sight of the learned. 
 
 Qui stultis eruditi videri volunty stulti eriiditis 
 ridentur, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . One wedge drives in tlie other. 
 
 2. One hand washes the other, 
 
 3. The rashness of the son verified the wise saying of the 
 father. 
 
 4. For how is it, that old age creeps upon youth, faster than 
 7jouth on childhood ? 
 
 5. Friends tdike the greatest delight in the society of friends. 
 
 6. That is called a civic crown which a citizen presents to 
 the citizen^ by whom he has been preserved, as a pledge of his 
 safety and of the preservation of his life. 
 
 7. You covet money and reject virtue. 
 
 8. Despair and necessity render even the timid braise. 
 
 9. Socrates used to exhort young raen to view themselves of- 
 ten in a glass, that, if tliey were handsome, they niiaht render 
 themselves worthy of tiiat beauty, and '\( deformed, they miL'hi 
 skreen and qualify that deformity by learning. 
 
 10. It was ' ill his pride or his wealth, that the nolle 
 claimed a sujm ^ over XhQ ig^noblr^hui in his good name 
 ^d brave exploits. 
 
93 
 
 11. In my ahfiencCj I cherished andeiijo3^ed the recoUeciion 
 of my absent friend, iu the same manner as in his jjrcscnre I 
 had been accustomed to enjoy his familiar converse, fprvesvnn 
 prccsentis,) 
 
 12. You went poor into your province, you returned rich to 
 Rome. 
 
 When, for the sake of brevity and elegance, aliuSj 
 alius^ or diversi, diversi, each in their proper ca- 
 ses, are used for one man thisj and another man 
 that ; different people this ; and different people 
 that ; as, one man says this, another that, Aims 
 aliud dicit; they must closely follow each other. 
 And so, alius alid, or aUorsum^ for one man to 
 one place ^ another to a different place ; and alius^ 
 aliunde, for one man on this side, the other on that 
 side. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. Nor indeed did he think that he could find in one bod3'' 
 all the qualities which he sought to constitute beauty ; because 
 there is nothing in its simple and individual kind, which nature 
 has polished and made perfect in every part; therefore, as ii 
 she was not likely to find what to bestow on the rest, if she 
 granted every thing to one, s\e dispensed one advantage to owe, 
 and another to another, with the mixture of some disadvan- 
 tage. 
 
 2. One patron has defended my cause with much more zeal 
 than the other, 
 
 3. They were disputing across the river, one on this side, 
 the other on that side. 
 
 4. When war was declared, the king sent one .army to one 
 r^acc. and another to another, hoping that he would surprize 
 
 9* 
 
04 
 
 tiie enemy, and defeat their design^: ; but ?^^ one historian i j- 
 lates ofte t/fiuir, another anoikcr^ it is difl'icult to delennini 
 wiiat credit is to be given to them. 
 
 Alius, aliusy signifying so7nej and other^ will 
 be separated, and if we speak of only two, the 
 adjective alter will be used, instead of alius. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Some men we see, who excel in swiftness for the course, 
 and others in strength and vigor for wrestling. 
 
 2. One of whom has betrayed the troop, and the other h<« 
 sold them. 
 
 The pronoun qnisque is generally placed after 
 suns, sibi, se, and when it is joined to superla- 
 tives and comparatives, as it were a substantive 
 with its adjective, or coming with numeral and 
 cardinal nouns, it should always be placed after 
 them ; as, 
 
 Suum cuique ptilchrmn est. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Every man loves his own verses best. 
 
 2. Such is the alarming situation of affairs, that evcrf/ Tnan 
 dreads his own destiny. 
 
 3. Every seventh day is dedicated to sacred purposes. 
 
 4. Every good scholar thinks so. ( Optimus.) 
 
 ♦j Do not imagine, as you often read in fables, that those, 
 who have been guilty of impiety or wickedness, arc terrified 
 and tormented by the burning torches of the furies. Every 
 man^s own wicked fraud, and consequent terror are his chief 
 
95 
 
 tormentors; every inarvs own iniquity Ijarrasscs and drivr- 
 him to madness; his own wicked thoughts and remorse of con- 
 science terrify him. These are the constant and domestic fu- 
 ries that attend the wicked ! which night and day inflict on the 
 polkited ofispring the punishments due to the crimes of the pa- 
 rents ! 
 
 6. The more virtuovs a man is, with more difficulty is he 
 led to suspect others of being dishonest. 
 
 7., The more learned any one is, the greater pains he takes 
 in teaching. 
 
 On the contrary, the possessive pronouns 
 meiis^ simsy ^^c. are generally placed after their 
 substantives, as pater mens ; except when an ad- 
 jective or a preposition is added to the substan- 
 tive, and then the possessive is usually placed 
 first. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Onr love towards you is very conspicuous. 
 
 2. I only beg of you, that you will substitute me in the place 
 of Hirtius, both on account of your love for me, and tny res- 
 pect for you. (Though, as Quintilian remarks, there is no 
 great certainty in these exceptions, as they depend wholly up- 
 on the perspicuity and harmony of the sentence.) 
 
 Observe, likewise, that a pronoun primitive is 
 elegantly placed between the pronoun posses- 
 sive, and the substantive, witli which it agrees ; 
 as, 
 
 Your labor is profitable to me. 
 
 Tuus mihi labor prodesL 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 
 1. Owr studies delight Am greatly. 
 
96 
 
 2. Your letters were brought mc at a time when I could not 
 uit receive the greatest comfort from them : for your imimacy 
 
 IS by no means impleasing to me. 
 
 3. Some news have been brought, which affected me more 
 on i/our account, tlian on mme. 
 
 Thougli adjectives should, in general, be pla- 
 ced before their substantives, yet comparatives 
 and superlatives, nouns of number, these adjec- 
 tives, omnis^ nullus^ alienum^ aliud, alterum^ 
 utrumquej solum^ ullum^ tahj quodvisy quodlihety 
 totitm, singula^ costera, reliqua, mxilta^ are more 
 elegantly placed after their substantives. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. But we are impelled to learn, hy a fairer Aope, and 
 greater rewards, 
 
 2. He was invested with the raoBi honorable offices and (he 
 most important employments* 
 
 3. All the merit of virtue consists in action ; in which, how- 
 ever, there is often some intermission. 
 
 4. He has comprised in one book the history of sere/i /ii/ti- 
 dred years. 
 
 5. He has already reigned twenty-three years since that 
 time. 
 
 6. We often see, that shame gets the better of those, whom 
 no reason could overcome. 
 
 7. The management of other people^s lousiness is very diffi- 
 cult, and often thankless. 
 
 Nouns of dignity, profession, praise, con- 
 tempt, are generally placed before the proper 
 nsunes, to which they belong. 
 
97 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 i . Vou see beibie your eyes Catiline that mo9t audacioun 
 man, 
 
 2. Lucius Colta, a rdan of excellent understanding and ex- 
 emplar i^ prudence, 
 
 S. We are here warring against Anthony our colleague^ the 
 ^nost infamous of all gladiators. 
 
 Observe that the proper name agrees more el- 
 egantly by a[)position with the person or person- 
 al pronoun, than with the common name ; a?, 
 Whose name is lulus, Ciii nomen hdo. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ataulphiis, after the birth of a son, to whom he gave the 
 name of Theodosius, seemed to feel a greater regard for the 
 Romans. 
 
 If there are several pronouns in a sentence, 
 they are elegantly placed together, if it can be 
 done without causing any confusion or ambigu- 
 ty to the sense ; and, indeed, the best writers, 
 in order to give more force and energy, either 
 to a primitive or a demonstrative pronoun, join 
 several of them to the very same substantive ; 
 as, 
 
 I come from your brother ; he connnends him- 
 self to you, 
 
 Venio ufratre tuo^ is se tibi commcndat 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Yott, that i^ery same wretch, who have threatened de- 
 struction to whole cities and countries. 
 
Voii have done so Will, that no onr tliijiks ji;/;?«c/f well 
 comnu nded to i/ou, without sorae h.'tters of mine, 
 
 3. luit if tills is cflected, not only by nature and exercise. 
 It is also obtained by some kind of artifice, it does not seem 
 
 improper to examine what ihosc men say, who have left us 
 fotne rules concerning this business. 
 
 4. But the first great rule of justice, is, that no onc^ witlioul 
 being attacked by an unprovoked injury, should commit vio^ 
 ''Mice against «>?^ one. 
 
 There is a peculiar elegance in the structure 
 of a sentence, when the relative of one clause can 
 be immediately followed by the relative of the 
 subsequent clause, if it is in a different case from 
 the former: as, I admire their folly icAo arrogate 
 to themselves alone thqse divine arts, icliich 
 they ought not even to meddle with : Eomm 
 stultitiam miror^ qui^ quas ne attingere quidem de- 
 bebantj has divinas artes sihi solis arrogant. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Some philosophers of our age are also guilty of this er- 
 ror, who e^^press in words far removed from common usage, 
 new, and often inelegantly coined by themselves, and with an 
 affectation of too great subtility, those things tchich they might 
 deliver in popular and perspicuous languasfe. 
 
 2. I have seen those, who would exhort their scholars to the 
 irsuit <»f learning, in tlie very same words \n which Alexander 
 
 the Great would encourage his men to fight bravely ; and I 
 have seen those who, being about to declaim against rude des- 
 pisers of the gentle Muses, would steal Cicero's invectives 
 afraiii^t Catiline. 
 
 If we wish to add some circumstance to the 
 
subject oi* which \ve are speaking, or to gaii 
 more attention to it, then we may add one of the 
 demonstrative pronouns, is, idem, ^-c. with the 
 conjunction et or que, and thus form an addi- 
 tional member of the sentence ; as, 
 
 He wore a garment which came down to his 
 ankles, mcaii and dirty : 
 
 Veste erat indutus talari, et ed tetrd, ct sor- 
 didd. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . I have a son, an only one, 
 
 2. Pansa, tlie Consul, did not blush to declaim. 
 
 3. Alexander defeated Darius with his immense army, and 
 that when a young man. 
 
 4. I have only received one letter from you, and that a very 
 bhort one. 
 
 5. This sort ol' discourses, maintained and supj3orted by the 
 autliority of old, and at the same time illustrious men, seems, I 
 know not how, to have more weight and dignity. 
 
 6. I was certainly out of my senses to endeavour to enter jr.- 
 to a contest with an academician, and rhetorician too. 
 
 The pronouns ille, iste, ^-c. are also added, 
 w ith the word quidem, when one quality is to hv. 
 granted and the other denied on the same sub- 
 ject ; as, 
 
 Philosophers not bad indeed, but not ingen- 
 ious enough : 
 
 Phdosophi minimi' mali illi quidem, sed non sa- 
 tis acnti. 
 
100 
 
 I. V \r:Pi V V 
 
 1. \V o niu.M iL-e me grcuu ;r tMUU'avoiii>, lucause iiicUij i^Miu 
 books are said to be written alrecndy by men vert/ good and 
 virtuous indeed, but not learned enough. 
 
 2. I have also added Cicero's Treatise on Friendship, and 
 that on Old Age, to whic h I have subjoined a few annotations, 
 short indeed, but if I mistake not, not inapphcable. 
 
 ♦3. That commonwealth will always flourish whicli often 
 produces noble and virtuous men, who will not by inactive and 
 ignoble lives, disgrace the fair fame of their ancestors, but who, 
 in the pursuit of glory, are animated with the noblest zeal, by 
 representing to themselves the virtues of their forefathers, dead 
 indeed to the eyes of men, but always living in the memory of 
 the good. 
 
 4. This is not at all approved by your friends, veri/ good 
 and honest men indeed, but not at all conversant in public a* 
 lairs. 
 
 The pronoun primitive is elegantly j)laced af- 
 ter the infinitive, even when nsed as the aceusa- 
 tive that should {>o before it ; and after adjec- 
 tives and participles, to which it serves as a sub- 
 stantive ; as, 
 
 You think that you are slighted^ because I 
 write not again : 
 
 Contcmni te putas^ quad nan rescribam. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. They suffer themselves to be burned with heat upon the 
 mountains. 
 
 2. Struck with astonishment at the ill treatment of other*;, 
 'hpy suffer themselves to be bowed down and quite oppressed. 
 
14)1 
 
 3. €^to writes that armies have oi'ten goiiC wdn iuiiciiiy te 
 places whence tliey never hoped to return. 
 
 When a verb governs several nouns, one noun 
 is elegantly placed before, and the other, e^pe- 
 dally if it consists of many syllables, is placed 
 after the verb ; as, 
 
 Virtue brings praise and dignity : 
 
 Virtus laudem offert ac dignitatem. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. They can neither exercise justice, nor Jricndship. 
 
 2. Though riches procure many comforts of life, yet, if a 
 man is too eager in the pursuit of his interests, he cannot bui 
 bring upon himself cares and anociciies, 
 
 3. He was so conversant in the art of war, that I)y his 
 skill and stratagems, he completely deceived tlie general and 
 his army. 
 
 The pronoun ipse is more elegant in the nom- 
 inative, though the primitive pronoun, to uliicU 
 it is joined, be the case of the verb ; that is. 
 when the primitive pronoun may in its apjilicr* 
 tion, be referred to the nominative case: r! 
 
 He injured himself: Sihi ipse nociiit. 
 
 EX\3IPLE3. 
 
 1 . In this, I reproacli myself, (I myself reproach myself.) 
 
 2. The wise man, who neither profits himself nor others by 
 lijs wisdom, is wise to no purpose. 
 
 3. He has acquired to himself very great glory. 
 
 10 
 
102 
 
 4. They have been able of the^naelces to execute nolliing 
 with vigor and resolution without Sylla. 
 
 Prepositions, as the word implies, should come 
 before their case ; but they are sometimes very 
 elegantly separated from it by a genitive case ; 
 as, 
 
 The river Hypanis flows into Pontus on the 
 side of Europe : 
 
 Hypanis fluvias ah Europe^ parte in Pontum 
 infiuit. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. The fust object of moral beauty, which consists in the 
 knowledge of truth, greatly concerns human nature ; for we are 
 all impelled and insensibly led to the desire of knowledge and 
 learning, 
 
 2. But most men are generally brought to forget justice, 
 when they have fallen into the desire of power ^ Jionors and 
 glory. 
 
 3. Domitian would sometimes aim his arrows with so much 
 skill and certainty at the hand of a hoy, loho stood at a dis' 
 tanre, and who held it stretched, out as a ?narJc, that they pass- 
 ed through the intervals of the fingers, without doing any injury 
 to the child. 
 
 Other words liaviiig an immediate relation to 
 the adjective and substantive, especially a geni- 
 tive case ; and the prepositions erga, in^ adver- 
 siiSj ^c. are elegantly introduced between them, 
 the adjective beitig generally placed first: as, 
 
 The lasting remembrance of your benefits to- 
 wards your country w ill remain : Sempiterna tu- 
 
103 
 
 oriim erga pairiam henejiciorum memoi ta tigc- 
 bit. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Nature, in the beginning, gave this instinct to evcri/ kind 
 of animalsj to defend themseKes, their lives and bodies, and 
 to decline those things which might seem prejudicial to them ; 
 but to seek and |)rocure every thins, which is necessary to 
 their subsistence, as food, shelter, and other things of the same 
 kind. 
 
 2. For what need is there of long declamations in the Sen- 
 atCy when good men are so soon agreed ? What need is there 
 o( frequent assemblies of the people^ when not the ignorant and 
 the many, but only one man, and he too endued with consum- 
 mate wisdom, deliberates on the affairs of the commonwealth? 
 
 3. Happy is the man indeed, whose safety afifords not^ea^- 
 erjoy to himself than to all mankind. 
 
 4. They are and will be lasting witnesses of your favors to- 
 wards me, and of my affection. 
 
 The genitive is elegantly put before the noun 
 that governs it, with one or more words between 
 them ; except when the genitive is governed by 
 a neuter adjective, in which case it must be 
 placed after it ; as. 
 
 Let us try the honor of those friends whom you 
 love so much : 
 
 Amicorum qnos adeb diligisfidem spedemus. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. You will mention the perfidy , the ariificeSy and the 
 treachery of several persons toicards vs. 
 
 2. This reputation of wisdom, ichich Fannius made men* 
 tion of just now J does not please me so much. 
 
 3. Friendship and the union of the heart have much more 
 sioeetne^s. 
 
10^ 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns are also elegamlv 
 separated from their substantives. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. A glorious action and worthy Hercitles himself, ly whom 
 I have ^worn. 
 
 2. I possess a soul unawecl by dangers, and I think that hon- 
 or to ichich you aspire, gloriously purchased with life itself. 
 
 Two verbs, of which one is governed by the 
 other, ai'e elegantly separated. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. What can be more disgraceful, than for a wise man to 
 /(kshion the conduct of his life according to the language of the 
 ignorant ? Now, v/hat is understood by wise and honorable ? 
 Certainly nothing but what may justly he commended on its 
 oxen account. For if it is only that, which regards the gratifi- 
 cation of the senses, what honor is that which may he derived 
 even from the shambles ? 
 
 2. But since, in affording assistance to men, a regard is 
 toont to he paid to their merits or their fortune, it may be said, 
 and indeed it is the common language of mankind, that, in con- 
 ferring their kindnesses, they observe the disposition and man*- 
 ners, and not the fortune, of men. 
 
 Prepositions are genv?rally i)laced after the 
 pronoun relative, as qiiam circa, qiicmpents, quos 
 inter, hiinc jaxta, ^^c, and it must be needless 
 to observe, that terns is alwc'iys placed after its 
 case, and cum after the ablatives vie, te, se, nobis, 
 vobis, and after quo, qm, qiiibus. 
 
 To avoid ambiguity, we often prefix inclc, to 
 the proposition a or ab, when it is meant to de- 
 
105 
 
 CICJ 
 
 note the beginning of any period of time. Tii 
 we say, inde ab adolescentid factum, which other- 
 wise might be understood to be ejected by 
 voiith. 
 
 In mentioning the saying of any one, the verbs 
 inquam and aio are always placed after one or 
 two words of the saying recited ; and sometimes 
 at the very end : as, 
 
 When some one meanly born told Ltclius tliat 
 he was unworthy of his ancestors, he said, but. 
 you indeed are worthy of yours : 
 
 LceUus, quandb ei quidam malo genere naius 
 dicerct, indignum esse suis majorihns : ct hcirvJ^ 
 inquit, Ui iuis dignus. 
 
 EXA3IPLES. 
 
 1. What then does Chi-jsippiis niecin ? Strength of mind, 
 says he J is the science of suffering well. 
 
 2. Ennius pleases me, someone will say ^ because he never 
 deviates from the common accepUUion of words, and Facuvius 
 pleases me, another man will say. 
 
 3. When some one asked Diogines at wliRt hour a man 
 ougiit to dine ; if he is rich, he said^ when he will : if he is 
 poor, when he can. 
 
 4. Accins said, there are many unjust and faithless men in 
 a kingdom, and icw good men. 
 
 As the style acquires pecidiar elegance from 
 the order and arrangement of words, so it must 
 be observed that variety itself gives mjcat beauty 
 to sentences. Nihil enim tarn vitiomm est, vt ait 
 Ciceio, quam &i dicendi genus scnircr ,:^t idem. 
 
 10^^ 
 
i'iius: As medicine is the art of healthy pilolcijcci 
 i>i^ navigation^ so prudence is the art of living : 
 
 Ut medicina valetudinis, navigationis guberna- 
 tio^ sic vitrndi ars est prudcntla. 
 
 One clause ends with the genitive, and th( 
 next begins with it, to give greater variety to thi 
 sentence. This varied orcler should in general 
 l)e observed in the enumeration of several par- 
 ticulars, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Friendship is a real jj7ea«wre in prosperity: a rcsourct 
 ill adversity : quietness in private Hfe, (In mediis.j 
 
 2. These are the pleasing effects of philosopliy : it pour/^ 
 halm into our minds, it removes all imaginary anxieties, it de- 
 /.'Versus from inordinate desires, and dispels every alarm. 
 
 S. I have read in the natural liistory of Fliny, that there are 
 certain families of men in Africa, which iiave the power of fas- 
 cinating hy the voice; and if any should too immoderately 
 praise their stately trees, their 5/w////7«'/ir/rre&7,v, their beautiful 
 children, their^//e horses, and their herds of the most excellent 
 breed, all these would die immediately. 
 
 TTlIE arrangement of words depends also u|X)n 
 our ideas : the order and succession of wliich 
 being closely observed, w ill give greater perspi- 
 cuity and elegance to the style : the neglect of 
 this method in modern languages, and especially 
 ill llie Ki^sh, is apt to lead the scholar into er- 
 i or. WB^irises first, or is supposed upon ma- 
 uue corisiOTTation, to arise first, in the natural 
 
107 
 
 order of our thoughts, should as much as possi- 
 ble be placed first in the sentence ; except har- 
 mony, or a climax, which, in order to raise the 
 attention, throws back the most cnyphatical 
 words, should require the contrary. The natu- 
 ral order of the ideas may be partly understood 
 from this, that we say, men and women ^ (/rt^and 
 nighty rising and sittings rather than the reverse 
 of these. To illustrate this more fully : Cicero, 
 in his oration against Verres, has this passage : 
 Annius, a Roman Knight, says, that a Roman cit- 
 izen teas beheaded ; he does not say, AnninSj 
 Eqnes Romanus, dicit civem Romanum sccuri 
 j)ercussum esse ; but, as a\ hat stamped the deed 
 with peculiar indiguit}^, was the idea that it was 
 a Roman citizen, who was so inhumanly treat- 
 ed, the Orator begins by these emphatical words : 
 Civem Romannm, securi esse percussum, ^c. — 
 Thus the inattention of the English to tliese nice 
 distinctions would prevent the scholar, if he ad- 
 hered too closely to it, from giving the passage 
 all the force and elegance, of which it is capa- 
 ble. The same citizen, at the j)lace of execu- 
 tion, at Messana, exclaims, Civis Romanus sum, 
 not siim Civis Romanus. 
 
 In the Latin language, then, the arrangement 
 most commonly observed, is, to place first in the 
 sentence, that word which ex})resses the })rinci- 
 pal object of the discourse, together with its cir- 
 cumstances ; and afterwards, the person, or the 
 thing that acts upon it. This order, besides the 
 natural succession of the ideas, gratifies more 
 the rapidity of the imagination, which naturally 
 
103 
 
 runs first to tliat wliicli is its chief object ; and 
 having once named it, carries it in view through 
 liic rest of the sentence. Thus in these lines of 
 Horace : 
 
 Jifstum et tenacem prGpositi viritm, 
 Non civium ardor prava jubcntiunij 
 Non vidtiis instaiitis tyrannic 
 Mente quatit solidd. 
 Here the words are arranged with a much 
 greater regard to the figure which tlic several 
 objects make in the fancy, than the construction 
 of the English sentence would admit ; whicli 
 would require the " Justum et tenacem propositi 
 virum,'^ though undoubtedly the capital object in 
 the sentence to be thrown into the last place. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. We make most use of the direciion of ilie soul, and of 
 the service of the hody» 
 
 2. It is impossible for me to pass over in silence, sucli re- 
 jfrTcahlc mildness, such singular and tinheard-af clemency , 
 
 and such unusual moderation, in tiie exercise of supreme power. 
 
 3. For, O my clearest brother, tliou liast lost with thy life, 
 not a ki?igdo77iy but banishment, poverty, and nil those affile- 
 lions which noto overwhelm me, 
 
 4. He occupies with his armies your iwry kingdom : he 
 keeps me closely besieged tvhoin you iiave appointed governor 
 <»f that province ; and my dangers prove how little he valued 
 the words of your ambassadors. 
 
 The person, to which the nominative refers, 
 
 as the object of its agency, that is^ as the case of 
 
 the verb, is in the nature of the thoughts, before 
 
 the verb itself, and therefore should be so in the 
 
 tructure of the sentence. 
 
109 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. IMy brother promised me, that he would send vie some 
 books. 
 
 *2. But he iustructed by various means to the perpetration 
 of the vilest practices, the youth ichom^ as we have seen be- 
 Jore, he had so artfully inveigled into all his purposes ; from 
 these he could at pleasure command loretchcs, who would not 
 i^cruple either to give false evidence, or to forge a will ; in 
 whose esteem, honour, fortune or dangers, were cheap and in- 
 significant. 
 
 3. 1 know that the whole weight of this difficult and dan- 
 gerous task will be imposed on you ; for the whole people 
 have fixed their eyes on you, they regard you as their protector 
 and guardian. 
 
 The same may be said of a thing, or word, 
 which comes in the place of the person ; as 
 
 1. Your father has forgiven yowr crimes, 
 
 *2. You basely flattered their supine indifference by which 
 the state-was nearly brought to the brink of ruin ; and turned 
 into ridicule our firmness of mind, which resolutely stemmed 
 the opposing dangers. 
 
 The reason for which a thing is done, behig 
 in the order of the ideas thouglit of before the 
 ^erb, should be placed before it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . I beseech you to succour my misery, in consideration of 
 our former friendship, 
 
 2. But you had presented him with a golden crown, on ac- 
 count of his great virtue, 
 
 3. Again and again, most earnestly do I entreat you on the 
 score of our strict intimacy ^ and your own distinguished be^ 
 uevokn<e. 
 
ilO 
 
 4. or wiiicli friends you have a great number, otcing to 
 ur very great and exemplary virtues. 
 
 jur 
 
 Let it not, however, be understood that these 
 words, to which we assign this jirecedence, arc 
 always to be in the very beginning of a sentence ; 
 for generally either the nominative or the case of 
 the verb, or some other words, are prefixed, and 
 then these words, if there be more than one 
 clause in the sentence, from the first periodical 
 circuit, or transposition ; as we shall show more 
 fully, when we come to give rules for the 
 structure of a period. 
 
 Thus; Caesar said that he would receive them 
 
 into his friendship, for the sake of the jEdui : we 
 
 shall say ; Ccesar^ jEduoriim causd^ sese^ eos in 
 
 fidem recepturum dixit ; with greater elegance 
 
 thanJEduorum causa, Ccesar....^ 
 
 In mentioning several things, from which one 
 is excepted or particularized, the particles denot- 
 ing tlmt exception with their cases, as yrceteVj 
 nisif will be placed before the others. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I jrrcatly admire your benevolence and liberality, besides 
 your other virtues. 
 
 2. For if we should exiubit to your view the whole tissue of 
 this man's vices and iniquities, except this foul transartiojiy 
 which delicacy obliL'^vs me to pass over in silence, we shall not 
 find his life distinguished by one single trait, that can retrieve 
 his name from eternal disg^racc. 
 
Ill 
 
 3. I beg of you, that you would send rue some books, ij 
 not all. 
 
 The ablative, in expressions like these, is more 
 elegantly placed before the comparative. 
 
 EXA3IPLES. 
 
 1 . Quicker than hope. 
 
 2. Longer than what was just. 
 
 3. More sad than usual. 
 
 4. He is a man miick more ilhistnoits in peace, than in war. 
 
 5. So much easier is it to accuse, than to defend ; to inflict, 
 than to cure, a wound. 
 
 Adverbs should be placed before the verb, as 
 the manner or degree, in which the nominative 
 corresponds with its verb arises fii-st in the mind. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . lie came to me of his own accord, 
 
 2. Cicero has written excellently well on that subject. 
 ". They succeeded very ill in that business. 
 
 The vocative is usually thrown back ; at least 
 after several words of the sentence, except some 
 sudden emotion of the mind is to be expressed ; 
 but, in order to avoid ambiguity, it should come 
 immediately after some word, to which it prop- 
 erly belongs ; as, 
 Your uncle, O Brutus, has removed this doubt : 
 
112 
 
 Qiiam dubUationem avunculus iuus^ Brute j 
 
 ustulit. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 
 1 . It has long been a matter of gi-eat doubt witli me, Brutus, 
 wliether it were more difficult, or a matter of grcal(?r import- 
 ance, to refuse you at once, when you repeatedly asked me the 
 same thing, or to grant you your request at once. — (Here the 
 vocative coming with the verb, to doubt, which must be the 
 last in the sentence, will be equally thrown back.) 
 
 2. Ft cannot but be a matter of astonishment to youj my 
 Lords, that, while there are so many men of the first dignity 
 and eminence sitting here, I should claim the preference in ris- 
 ing to address you. 
 
 The verb sum has a pecuHar elegance in the 
 begmning of a sentence, or after negative words, 
 as nultus, nihil, nemo, and after comparatives 
 and superlatives ; words of many syllables ; af- 
 ter adjectives and verbals in dus. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. For the mind is divided into two parts; one of which is 
 a partaker of reason, the other is destitute of it. When ihei. - 
 fore it is enjoined us, that we should command ourselves ; the 
 injunction is, that reason should serve as a check upou temer- 
 ity. For there is something in the minds of men, by nature, 
 low, abject and humble; in a manner ennervated, languid and 
 infirm. If there was nothing else in man, nothing could be 
 
 lore deformed than man. But reason, the mistress and cm- 
 press of all, is at hand, which receiving its whole support 
 from itself, and continually making progressive advances, be- 
 comes at last a perfect beauty. Now the great care of man 
 must be, that this reason may connnajid that part of the mind, 
 which ought to obey. 
 
 2. For there is no misfortune, which does not seem to 
 threaten us all, from the general disorder, which prevaijs 
 through the whole world. 
 
3. F'or, if toe must comply with the desires oi 
 tiiey must no longer be called friendships, but real conspi- 
 racies. 
 
 4. It is D. criminal and impious custom, to dispute again- 
 tlie gods, whether from design or caprice. 
 
 When two words come closely together, oiie 
 of which is a monosyllable, and the other a word 
 of many syllables, the monosyllable is always 
 placed before the polysillable : as, vir darisshmis ; 
 ars pulcherriina ; me amat^ 5^c. 
 
 Sentences are very elegantly closed by com- 
 paratives and superlatives, as indeed by any 
 word, and chiefly verbs, of many syllables : as, 
 
 Pares cum paribus, veteri proverbio, facilUme 
 COiigregantur, 
 
 The reason that long words should, as much 
 as possible, close a complete sentence, is, that as 
 the voice of the speaker is apt to become remiss 
 and languid, and might drop one syllable in tho 
 pronunciation, still the word itself, or the mean- 
 ing of the word, and often of the sentence itself, 
 resting upon a sonorous penultima, may not es- 
 cape the ear of the hearer. Libenter claudiiur 
 ditroch/Eo, or a double trochee, -u;-u/ as com- 
 probavit. Though this applies chiefly to speak- 
 ing, yet it has been generally ti'ansferred into 
 the elegance of writing Latin. Another reason 
 why the verb should as much as possible close 
 the sentence, is, that, as the force of the idea 
 lies in it, it may, in the pause that is necessarily 
 
 11 
 
114 
 
 made bet^^ecn each sentence, become more for- 
 cibly impressed upon the mind. But in the ar- 
 rangement of words, care must be taken to 
 avoid the too frequent recurrence of the same 
 termination or cadence, as it has been observed 
 ')efore, which much offend the ear: as, nullo 
 . imorc nee dolore. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. This God we shall truly call happy, yours very lahoriom, 
 or whether the world itself is God, who can enjoy less tran- 
 nility than without the intermission of one moment of time to 
 turn with a wonderful rapidity round the celestial axis ? Now 
 nothing is happy but what enjoys perfect repose. Or whether 
 there be some God in the world itself, which rules, governs, 
 and preserves in their due order the course of the stars, the 
 change of the seasons , the vicissitudes and the succession of 
 things, which, as it contemplates the seas and the land, pro- 
 tects the interests and lives of men : Surely such a God must 
 be employed in a very troublesome and arduous task. 
 
 *2. For as men oppressed with a severe fit of illness, and 
 laboring under the raging heat of a fever, are often at first 
 seemingly relieved by a draught of cold water, but are after- 
 wards afflicted with redoubled fury and vehemence ; in like 
 manner, this distemper, which has seized the Commonwealth, 
 eased a little by the punishment of this traitor, will from his 
 luviving associates soon assume nexo force. 
 
 3. The nourishment and care of the body muM wasx: iu* 
 s end the preservation of its health and strength, and not 
 
 Sentences are also elegantly terminated by 
 om7iisj nulluSy nemoj when the idea of univer- 
 ality is conveyed with a more particular stress : 
 as. 
 
115 
 
 There is either no vh-lue, or every pain must 
 be despised, 
 
 Aut nulla virtus est, aut contemnendus dolor 
 omnis. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 t. What great desire can move you to pass a law, which is 
 att«3nded with the greatest disgrace, and has not one merit ? 
 
 2. If sleep did not bring rest to our bodies, and as it were a 
 medicine for our labours, we must think that it was unnaturaJ, 
 since it takes away our senses, and all action. 
 
 3. We perceive that in this age, literature is patronized by 
 no rich men. 
 
 4. If you should arrive thither, like Ulysses, you will not 
 know one of your relations. 
 
 Sentences also receive peculiar elegance and 
 force,when terminated by an accumulation of two 
 or three emphatic words, more generally verbs, 
 rising in a regular climax one above the other, 
 sometimes with, but more frequently without, 
 any conjunctions. But this mode of concluding 
 sentences must be very sparingly used, and only 
 when the subject requires a greater degree of 
 animation and energy to be thrown into the lan- 
 guage ; as, For what did I ordain, what did I 
 undertake, or what did I execute, but by the 
 advice^ authority^ and decision of this assembly ? 
 Quid enim constitui^ quid gessi^ quid egi^ nisi ex 
 hujus ordinis consilio, auctoritate, sententid ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. For in proportion to any man's ignorance of antiquit}', 
 and Grecian literature, does he with the utmost petulance and 
 
116 
 
 couiumwi^ aouscy cdscard and deride those ancient illustiioui 
 .heroes. 
 
 2. For is there a word m these letters, that is not full of po- 
 liteness, good manners, and benevolence ? 
 
 *3. When an end had tiius been put to the war, and rewards 
 lid punishments had been bestowed according to the deserts 
 of each man, he returned to Rome : but it is generally under- 
 stood that only the aged went to meet him at his return ; for 
 
 en then, as during the remainder of his whole life, the Roman 
 youth expressed tlie greatest detestation and abhorrence of 
 him. 
 
 *4. Will posterity be so deaf as not to hear our shouts of 
 applause, called forth by our admiration of your virtues and 
 good fortune, at a time when two of the greatest and most pow- 
 erful kings were engaged in a long and sanguinary war ; when 
 every one of the neighboring princes was either induced by in- 
 clination, drawn by motives of duty, or even compelled by ne- 
 cessit}", to espouse the cause of this or that party, when our 
 eyes 2oere dimmed by the dazzling brightness of arms, our ears 
 stunned by the din of war, and our imaginations affrighted by 
 continual alarms ? 
 
ii: 
 
 OF THE ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES, OR DIFFERENT MEMBERS 
 OF A SENTENCE. 
 
 A-S what we have said concerning the natural 
 order of words is equally applicable to the ar- 
 rangement of clauses, it w ill be only necessary 
 shortly to mention, that, as far as they follow the 
 natural order of our ideas, so far In general they 
 will be conducive to elegance and perspicuity. 
 But as in the arrangement of the several clauses 
 of a compound sentence, recourse must be had 
 to a frequent transposition, care must be taken 
 not to throw the sentence into disorder and ob- 
 scurity. The chief thing therefore to be avoid 
 ed is the hyperbalon or synchysis, that is, a con- 
 fused intermixture of words belonging to one 
 clause, with the words that lielong to another, 
 which might materially alter or obscure the 
 sense. As we would not sav, for 
 
 Great teas my joy tvhen I received the book from 
 you : 
 
 Magnum ego librum cum ahs te accepissem fidt 
 Tiieum gaudium ; 
 
 Because the reader would not know whether 
 magnum referred to librum or gaudium. As it 
 is however of great consequence to composition, 
 how, and what members of a sentence should 
 precede the others, tlie two following examples 
 may serve more fully to illustrate this. It is ne- 
 cessary that those 'clauses which explain and 
 
 11 ^ 
 
118 
 
 define a thing should be placed first, or, at least 
 should immediately alter the nominative case, or 
 some other introductory word, (vid. page 110.) 
 ibrm the first clause of the sentence, thus, 
 
 / ivomkr that Brutus should have been amo)ig 
 ike assassins of Ccesar, as he had received so //m- 
 ny favors from him : 
 
 VVe shall say, 
 
 Miror Brutum, qui a Ccesare tot heneficiis affec- 
 tum erat^ inter cjusinterfcctoresfuisse: 
 
 For were we to say, Miror Brtitum^ inter Cce- 
 aiis interfectores fuisse^ qui ab co tot beneficii 
 ffffectus eratj the qui^ besides the inelegance of the 
 *>entence, might be referred equally to Caesar as 
 to Brutus. — And again, 
 
 Man is mortal^ as he is furnished with a bodtj : 
 but immortal inasmuch as he thinks : 
 
 We will not say, Homo est mortalisj quoad cor- 
 fore est instructus ; sed immortalis^ quoad cogitat : 
 but wc shall render it by this transposition of 
 the words that explain the idea : 
 
 Ilomo^ quoad coiyore est ? /> ^frvrtus^ rnortalis ; 
 quoad cogitat, immortalis est. 
 
 These rules, however, as we mentioned above, 
 will admit of some exceptions; as, where those 
 divisions that should come first are longer than 
 ?hose that follow ; we should not say, Cur ilia 
 es tarn brevi tempore ac sine negoiio fieri potuerit, 
 tescio : but, Nescio, cur, ^c. for in this case the 
 harmony of the sentence requires that the louger 
 clauses should come last : but the judgment of 
 tlu» Tirr»nri(nf ^rlu»!nruin on^ily direct him with 
 
119 
 
 out the necessity of having recourse to rules to 
 mark each exception. 
 
 Clauses denoting the place where, and the 
 time when, any thing is done, though they may 
 be last in English, should come in the beginning 
 of the sentence ; as, 
 
 I shall give you the book^ as soon as I shall have 
 received it : 
 
 Libnmi, cum primum accepero, tibi dabo. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. lie had not, ichcre to turn himself. 
 
 2. You should consider that you will be in the power of 
 your enemy, in whatever place you may he 
 
 3. Thus the person of the King escaped, while our troops 
 were employed in pillaging these villages. 
 
 4. He was guarded first by his own modesty, and then by 
 the vigilance and instruction of his father, as long as his age 
 
 xposed him to such suspicions. 
 
 *5. Therefore Brutus silently waited for an opportunity. 
 For he himself exhibited an incredible patience, as long as he 
 saw you tamely bearing the yoke of slavery 5 but when he saw 
 you intent upon the recovery of your best rights, he then pre- 
 pared to second your noble efibrts. 
 
 Clauses expressing a cause or reason, begin- 
 ning by (jiiia, quoniam, cum, quod, and sometimes 
 cuf^ must also come first: as, 
 
 I shall always love you, because you have con- 
 ferred numberless favors upon me: 
 
 Te, quia me innumeris benejiciis affeceris^ prop- 
 tercel semper amabo. 
 
120 
 
 1 . / could not write to you, because I knew not where yon 
 were. 
 
 2. But ?y there could be no reason at all, ichy you should he 
 overwhelmed with so great sorrow, it appears a wonder to all, 
 that you betrayed those signs of a weak and degenerate mind. 
 
 *3. How much more wisely did our ancestors act, who in- 
 vented an extraordinary pmiishment against parricides, tneV 
 knowing that there was nothing so sacred, ichich the presump- 
 tion or wickedness of men wnuld\ not violate ; in order that 
 they, whom nature herself had not been able to retain within 
 the bounds of their duty, might be deterred from the perpetra- 
 tion of so foul a crime, by the severity of the punishment ? 
 They ordered that they should be sewed alive into a sack, and 
 thus be thrown into the river. 
 
 4. For no one imagined that any man existed, who could 
 immediately enjoy the sweets of undisturbed rest, after having 
 by the enormity of his guilt, violated every divine and human 
 law : because they, who have been guilty of so foul a crime, 
 not only cannot enjoy calm repose, but not even breathe with- 
 out horror and trembling. 
 
 Clauses denoting any thing conditional, the 
 guides of which are si^ nisi, siquidem, ^c. as, 
 
 I beg you to forgive ine, if 1 shall say any 
 thing with too great freedom : 
 
 Ego, si quid liberius dtxero, ignoscatis velim. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I beg of you to send me the booJc, if you have it. 
 
 2, The atrocity of the deed would scarcely appear craiible 
 to mankind, if the parricide -r^rr not almost exposed (o the 
 manifest view of all. 
 
 ♦3. Wotdd not that man demand the payment of a debt, if 
 
121 
 
 it ioas justly due, who could not only extort payment of a sum, 
 which not being justly due, was properly withheld, but even 
 the blood and vitals of a man nearly related to him. 
 
 Clauses denoting a concession, beginning by 
 etsi^ etiamsi, quamqiiam, licet, ut, ^'C. ss. 
 
 And though they are many, yet they stand in 
 need of a teacher and experience : 
 
 Qui, quanquam plurimi sunt, doctorem usum- 
 que desiderant. 
 
 ^ EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . I would not do that, though it icere in my power. — (It 
 is better to make use of a transposition, with the addition of 
 tamen, and say, ego, quanquam poteram, tamen, 8fc.) 
 
 2. You will determine that there is no occasion for a long 
 speech, though time enough for speaking might have been 
 granted us, (with the addition of tamen in its proper place.) 
 
 *3. That General is therefore by no means fit to command 
 in an Asiatic and a regal war, even suppose you should have 
 one, who in a pitched battle may appear capable of defeating 
 the forces of these two powerful kings *, unless he is also one 
 that can restrain his hands, eyes, and thoughts, from the riches 
 of our allies, from their wives and children, from the ornaments 
 of their cities and temples, and from the gold and treasures of 
 their palaces. 
 
 4. And perhaps in undertaking this cause, impelled by the 
 rashness of youth, I may have acted imprudently. But since I 
 have undertaken. lU I will give all the succour and support in 
 my power, though terrors compass me on every side, and dan- 
 gers threaten me from every quarter. 
 
 Interrogative clau.^es, which mark at the same 
 time the extent and object of the thing, known 
 
l>y the particles (juisj quid, an, tttrum^ cur, quo- 
 
 vt'frJo^ quemadnwdihuy ^r. as insioad of sav inp 
 
 \' ..; , A,?/.\ v;V • Quis sit, nescio, is more elegant. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. It is very evident, ichat is right, but it does not so fully 
 appear Wi)at is expedient. 
 
 2. Vou see what power he had ; now hear what actions he 
 perlbrmed. 
 
 3. Concerning which, O judges, I neither can discover how 
 I can speak, nor how I can be silent. 
 
 Clauses expressing likeness or comparison, 
 beginning by velut, quasi, ut, tanquam, ^c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . J was silent, as if I had not heard. {Ego tanquam .... 
 is better than silui, tanquam,) 
 
 2. When this sacrilegious wretch, the enemy and despoiler 
 of every thing sacred and religious, had seen this divine image, 
 he was seized with sucli a burning desire and madness, as if he 
 himself had received a stroke from that very torch, that he 
 ordered the magistrates to pull it to pieces and deliver it to 
 him. 
 
 Relative clauses beginning by qui, qualis, 
 quantus, quot, quoties, quuni, quantopere, ut, ubi, 
 should in general be placed before^ their corres- 
 ponding clauses, beginning by is, talis, tanius, 
 tot^ toties, tarn, tantoperi, if a, ibi, expressed or 
 understood ; suliject, however, to those, excep- 
 tion^, to which u e adverted before. 
 
 Qui followed by is : 
 
123 
 
 JEXAMPLES. 
 
 3. God loves those who pursue virtue. {Qui virtuti stU" 
 dent, €08, <5x. and not Deus amat cos qui,) 
 
 *2. But let us embrace and observe that, iMch has a most 
 extensile effect, whose influence is felt not merely in our owa 
 safety and preservation, but also in the acquisition of wealth 
 and power; to banish terror, and retain love and benevolence ; 
 thus shall the utmost of our ambition be gratified, both in our 
 private concerns, and in our political aims and pursuits. For 
 they, who wish to inspire terror, must necessarily fear those, 
 by whom they are feared. 
 
 3. In those, who have a superior greatness of soul, the de- 
 sire of money is directed to the acquisition of power. 
 
 4. I will not say this for the sake of aggi*avati ng the circum- 
 stances, but I will truly explain to you those sensations which I 
 myself received. 
 
 So also the compounds of qui and quis, as qui- 
 
 I'linqiie, quidqiiid, ^c. 
 
 That will remain all your own, whatever support you afford 
 the Commonwealth in these most dangerous times. 
 
 Qualis followed by talis : as, 
 
 He is just such a man, as his father was : 
 
 Qualis pater fuit, talis hie est. 
 
 1. It is easy to perceive, if you wish to retrace the annals of 
 past ages, that the state and the people have always been such 
 as the great men of the state were : and that ichatever changes 
 have taken place in the morals of the great, the same will also 
 follow in the people. 
 
 *2. With great truth did Socrates affirm, that this was the 
 nearest, and as it were the compendious way to glory ; if any 
 one would earnestly endeavor to be such as he wiahed to ap- 
 pear. For if there are any, who suppose that they can acquire 
 truth and solid glory by hypocrisy, by vain and empty ostenta- 
 tion; by dissiiuilatiou not only of the tongue, but of the counte- 
 
124 
 
 irance, they are egregiously mistaken. True glory pushes iu 
 roots deep into the ground, and even shoots forth new stems. 
 Hypocrisy and fiction, like short-lived flowers, quickly fall 
 away ; nor can any dissimulation or disguise be lasting. 
 
 3. I beg of you that you would now prove yourself such a 
 matiy as you have shown yourself before. 
 
 Quantus followed by tantus : 
 
 So much esteem shall I suppose that you have for me, as 
 you bestow care and attention in the preservation of your 
 health. 
 
 Quot followed by tot : 
 
 1. You have almost read as many books, as I have seen. 
 
 *2. We shall call him an eloquent orator, whose speeches 
 in the senate and at the bar, will strike with conviction, affect 
 with delight, and command persuasion. But there are as many 
 kinds of speaking, a.s- there are duties in the orator. The sub- 
 tle and acute in convincing the judgment, the soft and the tem- 
 perate in excitiag delight, but the vehement and the passionate 
 in bending the heart to persuasion ; in this last lies the whole 
 force of the orator. 
 
 3. There are as many stars in tlie heavens which escape the 
 human sight, as there are which are beheld in the clearest night. 
 
 Quoties followed by ioties. 
 
 1. We cannot hut admire the divine wisdom as often as zve 
 contemplate the plants, and other productions of the earth. 
 
 ♦2. When we reflect on the other illustrious actions of your 
 life, though you will find reason to attribute much to bravery, 
 yet more must be attributed to your good fortune. But so often 
 shall be revived in your mind the pleasing remembrance of 
 your extensive beneficence, so often shall you think of your 
 amazing generosity, so often of your unparalleled wisdom, 
 virtues, which I will venture to say not only constitute tl)e high- 
 cstj but the only iiappiness of our nature^ as often a^ you think 
 
Uo 
 
 of us, ichom you have reserved to enjoy with yoiirsoll the 
 happiness of our country. 
 
 3. He always came off conqueror, as often as he engaged 
 with the eneniv. 
 
 Quam followed by tam^ and quamdiu by tain- 
 
 dill : 
 
 But if he Iiad been a^ dark and secret in the execution, as 
 he was daring in the contrivance, he might on some occasions 
 have even deceived us ; but there is this most fortunate cir- 
 cumstance attending him, that his unparalleled audacity is 
 usually joined with the most singular stupidity. 
 
 Quantopere followed by tantopert : 
 
 Jf men studied as much to adorn the mind and cultivate the 
 understanding, as they labor to adorn their body, nothing would 
 be more common than wisdom and virtue. 
 
 Ut^ quemadmodum^ sicut, followed by ita, sic : 
 
 1. With the same fortitude ought we to bear not onl}^ this 
 calamity, but even the total overthrow of our fortune, as we 
 have borne our former prosperity witij calmness and modera- 
 tion. 
 
 2. For he rendered his views and designs most evident to 
 ajl, in his hope and expectation of corrupting justice, as he 
 was barefaced and oj^en in seizing all the money he could. 
 
 But sometimes, as in the following instance, 
 and in forms of adjuration, itcl will be more ele- 
 gantly followed by ut : as, 
 
 *1. So may the prospects and the hopes of my remaining 
 days be brightened by your good will and the approbation of 
 
 1 4w< 
 
126 
 
 '• '*\as I have ji ' ' , 
 
 . i • \i* been \ii[\u ; 1 _ - 
 
 })le, with the lirm impression upon my mind, ol the religions 
 obligation, with ivhich I bound myself to discharge them. 
 
 2. So may you return safe into your country, after having 
 jaid the city in ashes, as you succour the distress of an afflicted 
 lather, and listen to his humble petition. 
 
 Ubi followed by ibi: 
 
 The complexion of the times is such, that every one thinks 
 i»is own condition the most miserable^ and wishes least to be 
 "here he /*. 
 
127 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 OF CONJUNCTIONS, AND THE MODE OF CONNECT 
 ING WORDS AND CLAUSES. 
 
 Conjunctions give a coherence and force 
 to the sentence, and arc necessary to elucidate 
 the subject, which without them would be unin- 
 telligible. Their proper disposition is therefore 
 of the greatest consequence. Such indeed is 
 their utility, that the best writers often multiply 
 them by the figure polysyndeton : and the few 
 cases when the connexion will not suffer by their 
 absence, are chiefly in lofty subjects that demand 
 great vehemence of expression, and mark some 
 sudden affection or agitation of the mind ; 
 when the gesture or action of the speaker may 
 be supposed to supply their place ; as in that 
 well-known exclamation of Cicero, Excessit, 
 evasit, erupit! 
 
 In the connexion of single words Avhich have 
 some difference in their meaning, though they 
 agree closely with each other, with the same 
 nominative, or the same verb ; where the Eng- 
 lish would be content witli one and^ the Latins 
 use two or even more. This double et, has the 
 force of the double turn, non modd ^ed etiam ; as, 
 
lie favours, notires and loves me beyond ilif 
 rest : 
 
 Me pra ceteiis et colitj et observat et diligit. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I wish yoM to demand and exi>ect every tli'mg from mc. 
 
 2. The day after, in the morning, the Germans persisting 
 u their treachery and dissimulation, came in great uumbei^ 
 
 lO the camp. 
 
 3. But if reason teaches the learned ; necessity ^ the barba- 
 rian ; common custom, all nations in general ; and even Nature 
 itself instructs the brutes to defend their bodies, limbs, and 
 lives, when attacked, by all possible methods, yo*i cannot 
 pronounce this action criminal, without determining at the 
 same time, that whoever falls into the hands of a highwayman 
 must'of necessity perish either by the sword or your decisions. 
 
 Tliis repetition of the et, is made for the sako 
 of perspicuity, because the mind of the hearer 
 naturally expects somethinj^ more to follow, 
 when it has been prepared for it by one of the 
 conjunctions ; as, 
 
 Ltber tibi jam reddiius est, aut brevi reddttur ; 
 It is not known whether the sentence is to end 
 at rcdditus est, or not, as it stands ; but when you 
 add, liber tibi aut jam reddiius estj aut brevi red- 
 detvr, that doubt vanishes from the beginning ; 
 but it must be observed, that if the words to Im^ 
 coiuiected murk no difftMCMue with each other, 
 there must bs but one conjunction : i . 
 
 Not a sint^le act of bravery could pass unob- 
 served : for all theadjoinim^ hills and eminences, 
 which afforded a near prospect of the sea, were 
 covered widi our men* 
 
129 
 
 The connexion, especially in grave and serious 
 subjects, is often made by the repetition of tlie 
 preceding word, instead of a conjunction : as, 
 
 I think that nothing is more sweet, more de- 
 lightful, or more worthy the liberty of man, than 
 friendship : 
 
 Ainicitid nihil dulcius, nihil siiavis, nihil homi- 
 nis Uhertate dignius^ esse puto. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. At the very first onset, Numitor, giving it out tliat the 
 enemy had invaded the city and attacked the royal palace, 
 recalled the Alban youth to guard and defend the citadel with 
 their arms ; but when he saw the two young men returning to 
 him with joy in their countenance, and ready to congratulate 
 him on their success in having put the tyrant to death, he im- 
 mediately called a council, and laid before them the wicked 
 ai)^ barbarous conduct of his brother towards himself, disco- 
 vered the origin of his grandsons, hoiv tlie\- had been born, 
 educated J and discovered^ pointed out tli< assassination of the 
 tyrant, and himself the author and contriver of it. 
 
 2. Nor is the sound of the trumpet the same^wh^n the army 
 is marching to an enpagement, or when it sounds a retreat. 
 
 3. They have chosen me as their refuge against oppression, 
 an the avenger of their wrongs, tke patron of their rights, and 
 the sole manager of the present impeachinent. 
 
 4. If any king, if any foreign sCate or nation, had been 
 guilty of the like inlumianity against a Roman citizen, would 
 you not make them feel the full weight of public vengeance ? 
 Would you not pursue thera with the terror of your arms ? 
 Could we sailer this injury and ignominy of the Roman name 
 to remain unpunished and m^revenged ? 
 
 5. God has provided for the wants, and the eonveuiences^ 
 and the preservation of mao. 
 
 When the words denote similitude or cOmparl- 
 
 12* 
 
son, instead of et^ we may connect them by tit^ 
 followed by ita ; as, 
 
 You have performed the greatest and the most 
 useful actions : 
 
 ReSj tit maximas^ ita utilissimasy gessisti 
 
 KXAMPLES. 
 
 f . The people of Tarsus, who are the very worst of allies; 
 and the people of Laodicea, who surpass them in folly and 
 perverseness, sent of their own accord, for Dolabella; from 
 both which cities he levied an<J formed x\\e. ima^e of an army, 
 having by their numbers the appearance of a Grecian army. 
 
 *2. We have heard of the Gods being under the inlluence 
 of the same desires, diseases, and passions; nor were lliey, as 
 fable tells us, without their wars and battles : nor did the 
 Gods, as m tlie battles of Homer, some on one side, and some 
 on the other, lend each his assistance to two contending ar- 
 mies, but they carried oo their own wars with the Titans and 
 the Giants » 
 
 3. Your country ^vill for ever love and revere your name, 
 for you hav€ performed the greatest and nwst useful exploits. 
 
 When it is necessary to introduce a circum- 
 stance of greater weight than what precedes it, 
 it is elegantly connected by quid ? quod ; as, 
 
 A wise man lives contented, and indeed the 
 \viser a man is, the more resigned he is in his 
 death* 
 
 Sapiens contentus vivit : quid ? quod sapientis- 
 imus quisque animo cequissimo moritun 
 
 JLXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I have ever been ready to be of service to you in what- 
 ever things I could, with my assistance and my advice : 7iai/y I 
 have not even denied you my owd garments and money. 
 
131 
 
 2. I found the young man whom you extolled witli such ex- 
 travagant praises, not at aH advanced in his learning ; he did 
 not even know how to decline nouns or to conjugate verbs 
 with any correctness. 
 
 The connexion between two nouns or subjects 
 conveying nearly the same idea, is elegantly 
 made by the repetition of turn ; as, odit turn vir- 
 tutem, turn liberales artes; but if there is a dif- 
 ference between them, the first which is the in- 
 ferior idea has generally cum prefixed to it, and 
 the more forcible is connected by turn ; as, 
 
 We ought to love those who have deserved 
 well of us, aiid chiefly our preceptors. 
 
 Ciim omnes de nobis bene meriios^ turn maxime 
 prceceptores nostros^ amare dcbemus. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I know your mother, a pious and honest woman. 
 
 2. He was a young man of the best disposition, and of 
 great erudition. 
 
 3. Good health, and frugahty which chiefly procures it, is 
 hoth necessary in every kind of pursuit, and chiefly in this 
 important study. 
 
 4. I have hoth at other times recommended to you to prac- 
 tise virtue, and to observe an unwearied diligence in your 
 studies, hut I have particularly done it in my last letters to you. 
 
 Words referring to the same subject, but whose 
 meaning is so far opposite that one of them may 
 be taken away or denied, are connected by the 
 repetition of ant, ^'^ or sue^ where the English 
 would be satisfied with one ; as, 
 
132 
 
 To-morrow I shall write or come r 
 Cras aut scribam aut venianu 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . I have asked my father that he icould send me tliose 
 books, or money to buy them. 
 
 2. Had I the perfidy which they possess, at least I should 
 not have had the folly to betray either an open enmity, while 
 I cherished a concealed and obscure Iiatred, or an inclination 
 to hurt where I had not the power to do an injury. 
 
 *3. Dramatic writers, when the fabulous hero of their play, 
 after having been educated under some poor shepherd, ignorant 
 of his true parent, is discovered to he of royal Uneagey or the 
 offspring perhaps of some celestial divinity, always think it 
 necessary to exhibit the noble youth, as still retaining: a gmte- 
 ful affection for the honest rustic to whom he bad so long suj)- 
 posed himself indebted for his birth. 
 
 Observe that when several words are to be 
 joined by a conjmiction copulative, the second is 
 not inelegantly joined by the enclitic que and 
 the third by et or ac; as, 
 
 I desire friendship, honors, and general knowl- 
 edge : 
 
 Amicitiam honoresque^ et rerum scieniiam expeto, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Your elegant y learned, and polite letters were delivered 
 to me. 
 
 2. He did not suffer those whom he dtd not think capabk 
 of becoming orators, to losi? their lime with him, aufl he dis- 
 missed them, and used to persuade them to betake themselves 
 to that pursuit for which he thought them best fitted. 
 
 Wliat we have said concerning these conjunc 
 dons is nearly applicable to the negative. 
 
133 
 
 The Latins seldom use jion followed by nee or 
 neque^ but repeat either of the two latter. 
 
 examplp:s. 
 
 J . After this battle, Ciesar resolved not to give audience la 
 their Ambassadors, nor admit them to terms of peace, seeing 
 they had treacherously applied for a truce, and afterwards 
 wantonly broken it. 
 
 2. That part of your excuse in which you say, tliat your 
 letters are always couched in the same words, from your pov- 
 erty of expression, I do not understand, and do not approve. 
 
 The connexion is also often made by the repe- 
 tition of the preceding negative : as, 
 No one loves, or respects you : 
 Nemo te amat^ nemo te colit, 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 But in the glory which you have lately acquired, you have 
 no associate, how great soever it is, and surely nothing can be 
 greater; it is all your own: No Commander, Captain, troop 
 or battalion robs you here : nay, even Fortune, the Goddess 
 who presides over human afifairs, claims no share of this hon- 
 or ; to you she resigns it. 
 
 Sometimes the connexion is effected by ne 
 qiiidem^ followed by nedum^ when what follows 
 is of greater force than what goes before ; and 
 sometimes by non modb noiij and no7i modo, fol- 
 lowed by sed, ne quidein, when what follows is 
 of less force than what precedes : but these arc 
 ^vell-know74 forms. 
 
134 
 
 IX AMPLE S. 
 
 . lie has learned neither to write, nor read. 
 
 2. For indeed we cannot bear that man to stand forward 
 ifs an accuser, o?' a censuror, who himself is found guihy of 
 that crime which he reproves in another. 
 
 It is scarcely necessary to observe, that tlic 
 Latins generally use nee and 7ieque for et non ; 
 for et nunquam always nee unqtiam ; for et nemoj 
 they use nee ullus^ nee quisquam ; for et 7iihilj nee 
 quidquam ; and for et nusquam^ nee usquam. 
 
 In connecting divisions of sentences the same 
 rule nearly applies as in connecting single words, 
 by the repetition of e/, if they refer to the same 
 subject ; or if t)ne is negative, by neque^ nee, for 
 et non follou^ed by et ; if both are negative, by a 
 double nee and neque ; or w^here (here is an op- 
 position by the repetition of avt^ vel; where the 
 English w^ould be often satisfied with one of the 
 above conjunctions. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ♦1. Thus the quality of their food, their perpetual exercise, 
 nn/i free unconfined manner of life, <hecausf» being from ihrir 
 r'nildhood fettered by no rules of duty or education, they a^'- 
 knowl«'(J;^e no law hut will and pleasure) contribute to maiie 
 Iicm strong, «7ir/ to render them of a gigantic size. — (Here 
 ili4' repetition may be observed in the connexion of the single- 
 words, as in the two clauses.) 
 
 2. You therefore were not present at these transactions, and 
 i has always been my chief care not to be present myself. 
 
 3. FiA I am deprived of a great number of vny most inti- 
 
mate friends, of whom the hand of death has cruelly robbed 
 me, or whom the hard necesshy of flight has dispersed into 
 various parts. 
 
 4. Certainly, if the mind had not a forethought of a iiere- 
 after, it would neither harrass itself with so many toils, nor be 
 tormented with so many cares and watchings, nor contend so 
 often for life itself. 
 
 In connecting two clauses of a sentence, if the 
 latter is the consequence or the effect of the for- 
 mer, they may be more closely joined by iit^ in- 
 stead of quarej igitur^ hinc, &c. and by ita ui 
 instead of the simple et : as, 
 
 You have never loved your brother : hence it 
 is no wonder that he does not love you : 
 
 Tu nu7i(fuam fratrem amasti^ ut non mirum sit^ 
 te ab eo non redamatum esse. 
 
 EX^VMPLES. 
 
 1. The citizens we lost, fell in battle, not by the insolence 
 of victory ; whence there can be no doubt but that if it weie 
 possible, Caesar would recall many from the shades. 
 
 2. Philip indeed, the King of Macedonia, was greatly sur- 
 passed by Alexander in the glory and magnit\ide of his ex- 
 ploits, but he was greatly superior to his son in gentleness oi 
 disposition and in humanity. The one was always great, the 
 other was often debased by the blackest crimes : the precept 
 therefore of those men is most wise who teach us, that thv 
 more exalted we are, the greater humility we should show. 
 
 3. When I had fasted for two wiiole days, and had not 
 even tasted a drop of water, overcome as I was with lane:uor 
 and famine, I certainly found that 1 needed your good offices 
 more than I thought you could possibly require mine. 
 
 Ita^ followed by ut^ may also be used for qvi- 
 dem, followed by sed : as, 
 
130 
 
 I love }ou tndeedj but I cannot indulge your 
 > ices : 
 
 Amo te itaj ut tamen tiiis vitiis indulgere ne- 
 queam. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. For what is there more omnion than for those who ai*e 
 rilive to enjoy the free privilege of breathing:, and those who 
 are dead to have a little earth to cover their bones, for those 
 who sail over the waters to have the full scope of the seas, and 
 lor the siiipwrecked mariner to find a shore to be cast uj)on. 
 They live videed^ while they do live, hut they cannot draw 
 their breath from heaven : they die indeed, but the earth does 
 not cover their bones : they are indeed tossed upon the waves, 
 but no ablution takes place ; lastly they are cast away indeed, 
 but their dead bodies cannot even find rest upon the rocks. 
 
 2. There is also another report concerning the captives, 
 that the ten first came ; and when it had been a subject of 
 much doubt in the senate whether they should be admitted 
 into the city or not, they were indeed admitted, but an audi- 
 ence was not granted them. 
 
 3. Preserve indeed a grave deportment, but do not fnll into 
 moroseness and melancholy. (This may be with tlie addition 
 of tamen,) 
 
 Where both clauses express a doubt, the con- 
 nexion is generally made by utrum^ or the en- 
 clitic nCy with the first, and^/z before tlic second. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Alexander was a long time very doubtful, whetlicr he siiould 
 persevere, or retreat. 
 
 The connexion of two clauses is also more 
 elegantly made by tv, followed by qui ; by talis^ 
 followed by qindis; by tantus, followed by quan- 
 
137'- 
 
 iiis ; tot, followed by quoty than by is, talis, tan- 
 tusj tot, ^c. followed by ut. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Your father proved himself such a man, that if you could 
 show yourself the same, you would pass for a very great man. 
 — Here talem qualem will be much better than talem ut,) 
 
 2. For what shows less, I do not say of an orator, but of 
 a reasonable being, than to throw that kind of objection to an 
 adversary, that, if he should deny it but upon his bare word, 
 the objector could proceed no further. 
 
 *3. If then the benefits that philosophy has conferred upon 
 mankind, and the delights we receive from the study of it are 
 so great, that we cannot conceive any more important or more 
 lasting to be derived from any other science ; wh}^ do we not 
 devote our whole time and thoughts to the acquisition of phi- 
 losophical knowledge ? 
 
 4. My love for you is so great thai I should be the happiest 
 of mortals, if your affection for me was equal to it. 
 
 The connexion of clauses may also be made 
 by tantum abest ut, followed by another iit : as, 
 
 I not only have not forgotten you, but 1 think 
 of you every day : 
 
 Tantum abest, tui ut oblitus sim, ut nullusprce- 
 tereat dies, quin mihi in menteni tui veniat. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. These amicable alliances are not only not founded on 
 the basis of reciprocal wants, hut we often see those men dis- 
 tinguished for their liberality and beneficence, whose power 
 and riches, but, above all, whose superior virtue, (a much 
 firmer support) have raised them above every necessity ol 
 having resource to the assistance of others. 
 
 13 
 
ISS 
 
 *'2, Therefore tliose who do not pive a metrical or harmo- 
 nious termination to their sentences seem to me to resemble 
 iie motion of those men whom the Greeks call ujrec><*t<rfvi, 
 and not only is the style Jiot enervated by that careful disposi- 
 tion of words, as many will presume to assert, who from ig- 
 norance of their masters, the dullness of their own genius, or 
 their dread of labor, have never been able to accomplish it, 
 bitt even without it, all the force and energy of their sentences 
 is lost. 
 
 3. My own privat<» interests indeed I cannot have prerrrrcd 
 in this,ybr / am sensible that I have drawn much hatred upon 
 myself, partly secret, partly open, w hich 1 might have avoided, 
 and by which you may profit. 
 
 4. You not only are not a perfect master of the Greek lan- 
 guage, but you have scarcely learned its first rudiments. 
 
 In connecting sentences which contain a more 
 complete and absolute sense, but which at the 
 same time have a reference to the subject men- 
 tioned before, ouij quee, quod, as we have al- 
 ready seen, is often used instead of hie, is, et, ve- 
 rb, igittir, and sometimes eniin, which are re- 
 jected ; but it must be observed, that this rela- 
 tive must apply to what is immediately prece- 
 ding. 
 
 As the use of the relative, and indeed this ap- 
 plication of it in connecting sentences, merits 
 the attention of those who study elegance, it 
 will not be superfluous to advert to it again in 
 this place. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . T have always received the most gentle, and at the «ame 
 time the most ' * ry advice from you ; and if J had follow- 
 ed your wise » s, 1 should now be the happiest of men. 
 (Here qui may agret; either with advice or with /.) 
 
139 
 
 2. 1 went to his house, hut when I could not find him, I re- 
 turned home. 
 
 3. But if I defended my own safety against his very cniel and 
 violent attack upon me, you ought to rest satisfied that I 
 did not complain to you even of your brother's injurious treat- 
 ment of me ; for tchen 1 found that he was meditating to di- 
 rect all the efforts of his tribunitial power towards my destruc- 
 tion, I then availed myself of the interest I had with your wife 
 and sister to prevail upon them to deter him from doing me 
 that injury. 
 
 In the beginning of a sentence which has a 
 reference to what goes before, the Latins more 
 frequently make use of neque than of non before 
 
 rerb^ cnim^ iamen. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 1. But nothing, said he, seems to me of superior excellence 
 than for a speaker to have that irresistible hold upon the as- 
 semblies of men, as by the charms of his eloquence to bend 
 their minds to his own purposes, to lead them lo whatever di- 
 rection he chooses, or dissuade them from whatever he pleases. 
 Mde Chap. I.) 
 
 *2. For it teas not merely to confer a mark of his favor, 
 that Alexander the Great preferred the pencil of Apelles, or 
 the chissel of Leusippus, to those of others, but that he kne^^ 
 full well that their art would throw a lustre upon his own name, 
 as well as upon themselves. 
 
 *3. Yet the blind fury of Catiline not only received no 
 check or diminution, but he was now daily forming and medi- 
 tating new machinations ; he now occupied himself in estab- 
 lishing new depots of arms in the most commodious places of 
 Italy ; he now took up all the money he could upon his own 
 credit, or that of his friends, and had it conveyed to Fiesulsc 
 into the hands of a certain Manlius, who became afterwards 
 one of the principal conductors of the war. 
 
140 
 
 4. But the • -nt of ease was ?" tod us to devote 
 
 our time to th. i al arts, thougli w -tlv wished and 
 
 desired it. 
 
 Thus also the ancients more frequently use 
 neque vera quisquam^ for nemo verb : neque vera 
 quidquam^ for nihil vera: and iieqiie cnini quis- 
 qticiMy neqxie tamen quisquam, for nemo enim, 
 nemo tamen. 
 
 Nam cumj etenim cum, at the beginning of a 
 sentence are more frequently used than cumenim. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 For irhen he had left me no other alternative than to swear : 
 I then in a solemn and elevated voice uttered that true and 
 most gratifying oath ; which the people with an unanimous 
 acclamation swore that I had most truly uttered. 
 
 After quid aliud, nihil aliud, it is more elegant 
 to use nisi tlian qnam : as, 
 
 I ask nothing else in my own right, than timt 
 you write to me : 
 
 Nihil aliud a te jure meo postulo, nisi ad me ut 
 scribas. 
 
 EXAMPL>>. 
 
 1 . / ' ' ot to answer the letters of a friend, than 
 loneg! p. 
 
 2. Nothinir else is obtained by so obstinate and bloody a 
 war but defeat uud disgrace. 
 
 Nisi should also be used instead of prceter^ 
 prdeierquam, after a negation. 
 
141 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 What the Pythian oracle dechired, that no other cause', ex- 
 cept avarice, should destroy Sparta, it seems to have predicted 
 not only to the Lacedemonians, but to all othe^; opulent na- 
 tions. 
 
 Quod siy and quod nisi are often put for si, and 
 for si 7ion, at the beginning of a sentence, when 
 the subject of both sentences lias an immediate 
 connexion : as, * 
 
 If yon have to do with this man, you ^\ ill soon 
 perceive that I complained justly of him : 
 
 Quod si tibi res cum isto sit, turn sentias, me 
 jure de illo questum. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He declared that he would no longer lend his assistance 
 to the senate, in their proceedings (grassanti) against the 
 people ; that he would interfere if they persevered in their 
 former tyranny ; but if they thought that he could be as cruel 
 as the senators, that he would go away with his soldiers, and 
 no longer be present at their civil broils. 
 
 2. Thus in these perilous times, he not only preserved him- 
 self, but he was the chief protection of his dearest friend. If 
 a pilot is entitled to the highest praise, who saves a vessel 
 from a storm, and a dangerous sea ; should he not be esteem- 
 ed of an extraordinary prudence, who has readied a secure 
 haven from so many and such overwhelming civil tenipt^sts ? 
 
 *3. How inconsistent would it bej upon seeing a statue or 
 a painting, to be convinced that it was the production of art, 
 and on the distant view of the navi^tion of a vessel, to enter- 
 tain no doubt but that it was guided b}' the combined powers of 
 skill and wisdom, or on the contemplation of a sun-dial, or 
 clock, to know that they point out the hours by means of art, 
 and not by mere chance ; but at the same time to think the 
 world, which both displays the perfections of these snis. aud 
 
 * 13 
 
142 
 
 contains in itself the artists themselves, to be a mass destitute 
 of plan, wisdom, or contrivance ? If any one should carry into 
 Scythia or Britain that sphere which our friend Posidonius 
 lately made, which describes the same revolutions in the sun, 
 the moon, and the five planets, which are performed each day 
 and night in the heavens, is there a man even amongst those 
 barbarous people who would have a single doubt but tliat the 
 sphere was perfected by a wonderful effort of art ? 
 
 Instead of quod atiinet ad id qtiod, and which 
 the English itself renders by as to tvhat, it is 
 more elegaiU simply to use quod. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 As to what some men have thought that the soul itself will 
 one day perish, they are most egregiously mistaken. 
 
 And on the contrary, the best writers do not 
 use quod (ul with the accusative, for as to, in re- 
 gard to, but always quod attinet, quod spectat ad: 
 as, As to you ; quod ad cos attinet. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 As to you, I never saw a man more perniciously prodigal. 
 
 In Stating an objection, instead of saying, at 
 ohjici possitj objiciat quis, i^c. it will be sufficient 
 simply to make use of at, and the answer may 
 be made with, or even without at. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. In this I have often been struck with admiration at the 
 dignity, the justice, and the wisdom manifested by Caesar. — 
 
143 
 
 He always uses the most honorable names towards Pompe}', 
 But some one mil say, that he showed the most persecuting^ 
 and vindictive spirit towards his person. But these were thr 
 deeds of arms, and the insolence of victory, and not of Csesar. 
 
 2. Yet you will say, that it was I who advised him to it ; 
 as if he could not have done a service to his country, without 
 an adviser. But again you will object that I rejoiced at it. 
 What, amidst such universal joy, was there any reason why I 
 should be the only rejected person in Rome ? 
 
 In the connexion of several arguments, the 
 Latins do not enumerate them by pmnd, secun- 
 (Id, tertib, ^c. but by pimum, deinde, turn, de- 
 nique, postremo ; and instead of those words of 
 enumeration, as tum^prcetereci, insuper, ^c. other 
 forms of connexion may be used, as, accedit 
 quod ; ut taceam, omittam, ^c. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 We must first consider, that oiur kindness should hurt no- 
 body ; secondly, that it should not be above our faculties ; 
 .thirdly, that it may be exercised with dignity i and lastly, at- 
 tended with the greatest honesty. 
 
144 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 OF THE SIMPLE VARIATION OF WORDS. 
 
 As nothing contributes more to elegance of 
 style than a clmnge or variation of words, to 
 which the scholar should be early introduced, 
 we shall briefly show how it may be effected. 
 This variation is either simple, and consists in 
 the mere change of one word into another sy- 
 nonimous word or phrase, or it is rhetorical or 
 ornamental, as by the accession of another ex- 
 pression, more full, dignified, or smooth, the 
 simple idea receives greater ornament, and by 
 this metaphorical and circuitous manner, as- 
 sumes the form of a period. But %ve shall not 
 treat so fully of this last, till we come to speak 
 of perspicuity and copiousness. Thus, to give 
 an example of a simple variation by means of 
 a synonimous phrase : 
 
 Ingenium est omnium hominum a labore pro- 
 dive ad libid'nitm. — Ter. 
 
 May be > aried thus : 
 
 Ea est omnium mortaliiim idoles ut a labore 
 ad vohiptatnn rnant. 
 
 Tlius again, to show the ease with whirh a 
 §ent(*nce may be Jllmost infinitely varied : 
 
145 
 
 In hoc natitra efficere quid possit videtur ex- 
 perta. 
 
 Try the word natura in other cases : 
 
 In the genitive : 
 
 In hoc naturce quanta vis sit, satis perspectum 
 est. 
 
 In the dative : 
 
 Naturce quid efficere liceat, in hoc compertuni 
 est. 
 
 In the accusative : 
 
 Naturam, quid efficere possit, experiri voluis- 
 se arbitror. 
 
 In the ablative : 
 
 In hoc quid a natura effici possit, compertuni 
 est. 
 
 An adjective may be changed into a substan- 
 tive : as, 
 
 He reproaches his legs for being too slender : 
 Crnrum nimiam tenuitatem vituperat. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He was sufficiently eloquent, liberal j versed in civil law, 
 as well as the military art. — (Say hahebat cnim ) 
 
 2. How senseless must you think yourselves, who, while you 
 possess the real comforts and blessings in life, harrass your 
 minds with phantoms of imaginary evils, and instead of enjoy- 
 ing the substantial gifts of fortune, torture yourselves with the 
 apprehension of future calamities, which are never likely to 
 happen ? 
 
 3. If I had not opposed this rash man with all the energy of 
 virtue and fortitude, where is the man who woidd not have 
 thought that all the firmness I displayed during my Consulship, 
 had been more the effect of chance than of wisdom. 
 
146 
 
 4. In the complaint I then made, mournful and wretched as, 
 it was, though unavoidable by me, in that station to which I 
 had l)een raised, what was there in the least abusive ? Did 
 T not speak with moderation ? Yet how temperate must that 
 man be, who, complaining of him, could abstain from abuse ? 
 
 And in the same manner an adjective may be 
 elegantly put in the neuter gender, and its sub- 
 stantive in the genitive case : as, instead of hanc 
 laudem conseciitus es, say hoc laadis 
 
 2:XAMPLES. 
 
 1. The sun imparts the same light and heat to all these na- 
 tions. 
 
 2. You have this nobility y and I shall always pay you that 
 deference. 
 
 3. Our friendship has so much weight with me that there is 
 nothing which I would not willingly undertake for its sake. 
 
 4. I shall chiefly devote to writing whatever time the in- 
 trigues of my enemies, the causes of my friends, or the inter- 
 f?sts of the public shall allow me. 
 
 Two substantives are often put for one ; each 
 however having its proper force and meaning ; 
 for they are not redundant^ but are intended to 
 give greater perspicuity or harmony to the sen- 
 tence : as instead of offendere homineni, we shall 
 say offendere animxim hominis^ because it is his 
 mind which is offended ; and offendere hominem 
 might be mistaken for, to find a man. We shall 
 be more accurate in saying gladi mucrone ictus^ 
 £ than gladio. Thus Cicero uses vis Deorum, ra- 
 ^ tiojiducicej veritatis necessitas riaturce^ res ratio- 
 
147 
 
 mim. But though Dii^ fiducia^ Veritas^ natura^ 
 rationes^ might have been sufficient, still we must 
 suppose that the other substantives convey a pe- 
 culiar meaning to give more force to the others. 
 
 EXAiMPLES. 
 
 1 . How wise and fortunate are they, who by a happy al- 
 chymy of mind can turn even the most disas^reeable circum- 
 stances of life to pleasure and advantage. Thus even sores 
 and diseases may benefit a man^ though they are attended ev- 
 en with excruciating pains. 
 
 2. Say now that you were over-reached by him who refus- 
 ed such an immense sum of money not on account of his ijido- 
 lence, but on account of his magnificence* — (Here inertiam la* 
 boHs may be used, and followed by magnificent iam Uberalita" 
 lis, for the sake of that concinnitas, or equality of the clauses, 
 which we shall mention afterwards.) 
 
 3. The whole senate (the state or condition of) the judi- 
 ciary proceedings, the whole commonwealth itself has under-* 
 gone a revolution. 
 
 *4. Nor can any thing so ruinous or destnictive befal the 
 destinies of mankind, as for tnith, integrity, honor, and reli- 
 gion, to be banished or rejected by this honorable body. 
 
 5. The other maintains, that death was not designed by the 
 immortal Gods as a punishment, but is either imposed upon 
 us by nature, or intended as a cessation of our toils and mise- 
 ries, so that the wise never suffer it unwillingly ; that bonds 
 and imprisonment, especially if perpetual, are contrived for 
 the punishment of detestable crimes. 
 
 The pronoun personal may be rendered by 
 the pronoun substantive. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Though Caesar had never been mi/ friend, but had always 
 shown a disinclination to me, though he had slighted my friend- 
 
148 
 
 ship, and acted the part of an implicable enemy Iu\».im.> im», 
 yet after the erreat things he has done, and still continues to do, 
 1 could not help loving him. 
 
 It may be observed that the dativ^e acquisitive 
 is often elegantly used instead of the genitive. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 When they heard that he had been condemned unheard, they 
 threw themselves at the judge's feet, and prayed that he might 
 be saved from the gallows. 
 
 The English adjective may be sometimes ren- 
 dered by a substantive, and the word with 
 which it agrees be put in the genitive case : as, 
 
 You will easily judge hoxc few orators there 
 are and have been : 
 
 Facillimt quanta oratorum sit, semperqxie fuerit 
 paucitas, phdicabis : 
 
 Instead oi\Qti(impauci .... 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Ancient friendship, the dignity of the man, and my con- 
 stant practice througli life, jointly called upon me to defend 
 him. 
 
 2. A good voice, though it is very desirable, is not in our 
 power to acquire, but to exercise and iinj»rov*» it, is certaiidy 
 in the power of every man. 
 
 3. No one could resist the brave Hercules. 
 
 This variation generally takes place when 
 
149 
 
 the chief stress lies upon the adjectives, as im- 
 plying a cause, reason, or something like it ; we 
 would not say, coximiis bonitatem panis . • . . or 
 locutus Slim cum doctrind viri. 
 
 A substantive may be changed into a verb by 
 a periphrasis : as, 
 
 Nor could I foresee that accident : 
 
 Neque quod accidit, prcevidere poteram* 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Nor did I prognosticate those events^ when I said tliey 
 would happen ; but I was only urged by my fears, lest they 
 should happen 5 when I considered the possibility of them, 
 and at the same time foresaw thtJir pernicious tendency, if 
 they should happen. 
 
 *2. For when by reason of the adjournment of the Comitia, 
 I found myself thrice cliosen first Praetor by all the centuries, 
 it was easy for me from thence to collect both what your senti- 
 ments of me were, and what qualifications you required in oth- 
 ers. 
 
 *3. W^hen we consider the benefits we have received from 
 our parents, who in our helpless infancy watched over us with 
 the tenderest afiection, and whose cares and anxieties attended 
 us in our entrance into the world, should they not command 
 €very return of filial duty and affectionate regard. 
 
 4. But I make this concession to you, :hat 3'ou may pass 
 over those things which, from your silence, you allow not to 
 exist. 
 
 But above all a SUPERLATIVE will admit 
 of many different modes of variation. 
 
 A superlative is elegantly changed into a 
 
 14 
 
150 
 
 coni])arativc, with a negative, especially with 
 the pronoun relative, qui^ quce^ quod ; as, 
 A most courteous and learned man : 
 Vir quo non alius humcmior, quo nan doctior 
 alter. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He was most eminent^ and indeed unparalleled in his 
 virtues and vices. — (Say, nihil fuii.) 
 
 2. Plato, who teas the most ingenious ami learned of men, 
 laid it down as a maxim, that those republics would enjoy a 
 lasting happiness, whose government was in the hands of the 
 wise and the learned. 
 
 3. The mind of that man, whom we call the most fortunate ^ 
 is sometimes corroded by secret cares and troubles, which are 
 concealed from the observation of other men ; thus the can- 
 ker-worm, though invisible to the eye, often destroys the bud 
 of the rose, which is the fairest of flowers. 
 
 Observe that quo is more elegantly used with 
 a compeuative than ut^ to express the purpose. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. He paid his debts, that he might lead a happier life. 
 
 2. We broke open the seal, that we might detect the con- 
 spirators the more easily. 
 
 Or it may be rendered comparatively, with 
 an affirmative, either by an interrogative or a 
 repetition of the words : as, 
 
 A most courteous man : 
 
 Vir humanuSy si quisquam omninb humanus. 
 
 Or : Quis^ or, quid hoc viro humamor^ or /m- 
 manius ? 
 
151 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Believe me, your brother is a most studious maw. 
 
 2. Croesus was the richest man in the world ; and yet nei- 
 ther his numerous forces, nor his riches, could avail any thing, 
 against the attack of a small but disciplined army, inured to 
 poverty and hardships. 
 
 A superlative receives an additional force, if 
 its comparative is introduced with it, as having 
 more power than the superlative ; in this man- 
 ner, 
 
 Plato a inost learned man : 
 
 Plato quovis doctissiino doctior. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. In this, indeed, I am more miserable than you^ because 
 my calamity is accompanied with yours, and common to both. 
 
 2. Farewell then, my friend, and be persuaded that you are 
 most dear to my heart, but much dearer if you can receive any 
 pleasure from these precepts and admonitions. 
 
 3. Be persuaded that those ju-e the fairest talents, whicli 
 are employed for the good of others. 
 
 Cicero and the t>est writers often increase 
 the force of the superlative by the addition of 
 such expressions as these, unus omnium^ tmiiSy 
 sine controversidj apprimt^ insigniter^ egregie : as, 
 
 You seem to me a juost choice and excellent 
 speaker : 
 
 Unus omnium in dicendo milii videris Icctlssi- 
 mtis, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I dare pronounce him to be the 7nost eminent in the stale 
 for genius and iudnstry. 
 
152 
 
 J. I cannot even promise it to that most learned and religious 
 nan. and who enjoys your greatest favor and friendship. 
 
 3. Horace derived his delightful urbanity from tlie society 
 o( Macenas, that niost polite of all men. and from the court 
 of Augustus, that best school of vW true elegance. 
 
 The variation of the superlative may be ele- 
 gantly made by these verbs, contenderej certare, 
 superare^ or by cedere ; as, 
 
 Cicero was the most eloquent of orators : 
 Nemo oratorum cum Cicerone contendere audet 
 eloqttentid. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Your brother is the greatest lover of literatiure that ever 
 \ras. 
 
 2. Those who love and cultivate the liberal arts, are always 
 the most humane and courteous of men. 
 
 3. Alexander the Great was the most ambitious of heroes, 
 vvho is even said to have wept, because he had no other world 
 ro conquer. 
 
 riic superlative may also be elegantly varied 
 by these forms, tarn followed by qucim^ qui^ or 
 tam^ qmni qui maximi ; by adeb^ ita ut ; tantus^ 
 quanius ; ceque or perinde, atque : as, 
 
 This man possesses the greatest humanity : 
 
 Huraanitas in hoc tiro tarn magnay quam qucc 
 inaxima : or. 
 
 Hand est quisquam omnium iequ^e hiimanus, at- 
 que hie vir, ^c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Nero VfdLS the most cruel tyrant that ever lived. 
 
15:^ 
 
 2. He fought with unparalleled bravery, and overcame the 
 « iieuiy. 
 
 3. The letters, which he sent to the senate, were the most 
 elegant that can be conceived. 
 
 4. The study of physic is ve?y, or the most, useful. 
 
 In these different forms something must be 
 added, which the judgment of the scholar will 
 easily suggest : as, Tantus^ quantiis, nunquam 
 antecl : aded^ ut nihil supra ; ut nulla fieri possit 
 accession nihil addi possit ; ut nulli sint conferen- 
 diy ^c. 
 
 Instead of qwo, eo, or quanio before a com- 
 parative, a sentence may be elegantly varied by 
 using ut quisque in the first part, and ita in the 
 latter, with superlatives : as. 
 
 The more a man excels in greatness of soul, 
 the more he wishes to be the first of men : 
 
 Ut quisque animi magnitudine maxime excellitj 
 ita maxime vult omnium princeps esse. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Thus for the future, the more opulent any man may be, 
 the greater enemy he will appear to the Romans. 
 
 2. The more abandoned any man has been, the safer wiil 
 he be. 
 
 3. The more eloquent any one is, the more he dreads \\\< 
 difficuhies of speaking, the various tunis and chances of his 
 oration, and the expectation of men. 
 
 4. The more diligently a boy attends to his stutlies, the more 
 learned he will be : the better a husbandman manures liis land. 
 Sindwith the greater Vdbor and care he ploughs his fields, tht 
 more plentiful crops they will yield. 
 
 Quot may be changed into quantum, and tot intc 
 
 14* 
 
154 
 
 iantnm^ when they are meant to express not 
 merely numbers, but magnitude. 
 
 EXAMFLE. 
 
 How many books you have ! If we were to estimate your 
 knowledge by the size of your librarvj you must be thouglit the 
 !uo!>t learned man in the universe. 
 
 Quot may also be changed into cjuolus quis- 
 (juej with a kind of exclamation indirectly ex- 
 pressive of paucity of numbers : as^ 
 
 Ho2V many will believe this ? 
 
 Quotiis quisque hoc credet ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Well may you commend their patriotism ; ior how tttmty 
 ure there, who will voluntarily lay down their lives fv^r their 
 country ? 
 
 *2. How mamj are there, who can escape reports in a city 
 
 - ' v^'"^' '"'dieted to scandal ? 
 
 Observe that the particle enim is elegantly in- 
 vrtf'iX between quotus and quisque. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 t'or how Jew are there, who understand the art of numbers 
 
 nd ii;f;isiir(» ? 
 
 i'or octodcaiti and novcmdccini it is more cic- 
 Lfant to use duodevigiiUi, and undcviginti, and 
 also, duodevicesimusj undevlccsimus^ duodetri' 
 Lsinia^ ^-c. and to express a large uncertain 
 
number, the Latins generally v^^r^^^BsMi^^ 
 tum^ mille and sexccnties^ millies^ ceiUies. 
 
 An adjective and a participle are sometimes 
 used for a substantive : as* 
 
 I saw him at his departure : 
 
 Vidi eum projiciscentem, 
 
 EX\3IPLFS. 
 
 1 . Xenophon represents the elder Cyrus at his death, as 
 expressing his belief of the soul's immortality. 
 
 2. Cato learnt the Greek language in his old age, 
 
 3. This he affirmed in his life'time ; and the wisdom, 
 which distilled from his lips was so pleasing to my soul, that I 
 shall retain and cherish his wholesome precepts as long as I 
 live. 
 
 A substantive joined with the preposition jt^/oji- 
 ter^ ob, ^c. will be elegantly put in the case, 
 which was to have been governed by the verb, 
 the preposition left out, and the other substan- 
 tive, which was to have been the case of the 
 verb, will be put in the genitive ; as, instead of 
 saying invidere alicui oh divitias, we shall say in- 
 videre divitiis alicujus. 
 
 EXAMPLES'. 
 
 1. If you had succeeded in this business, f should have con- 
 gratulated you on your good fortune. 
 
 2. If I speak with too much freedom, I may he forgiven on 
 account of my youth. 
 
 3. And therefore this is the answer which I return to yoiu* 
 letter, in which you would fain throw out some threats and in- 
 vectives against me : I freely ybr^/r^ you for the concern you 
 express, and even commend you for it, for I have been taught 
 by my own fjjelings the full force of fraternal afTection. 
 
And in the same manner a substantive joined 
 witli these prepositions 06, propter^ per^ ^c. may 
 by a kind of prosopopoeia become the nomina- 
 tive case to the verb,' the prepositions being left 
 out : as for, You are become famous on account 
 of your learning: say, your learning has render- 
 ed you famous. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . t shall attach myself to his most particular friends, and 
 thus I shall insinuate myself into an intimacy with him, from 
 which I have hitherto been excluded on account of my great 
 diffidence, 
 
 2. I am now deprived of those comforts, to which / hadac- 
 (customed myself by nature^ by inclination^ and by habit. 
 
 The pronoun qui^ cjuce, quod^ is often elegantly 
 used for a preposition ; as, 
 
 For the love that you bear me : 
 Qui tuns estergame amor. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. There is no sorrow which the hand of time will not les- 
 sen and alleviate. But it would be beneath you to lay your 
 whole hope and expectation on time, and not to exert yourself 
 and make nse of your own wisdom to apply the remedy to the 
 wound you have received ; and if departed spirits are endowed 
 with any sense of perception, from your daughter's love to 
 you, and her affection for all her friends and relatives, she 
 must be highly displeased to see you so disconsolate. 
 
 2. From his great learning, it was expected that he would 
 have written much better. 
 
 A verb, but chiefly an infinitive, is frequently 
 
157 
 
 used for a substantive, and is often necessarily 
 so, where the Latin noun either does not exist, 
 or would be very inelegant : as, 
 
 Your desertion of the unhappy was most shame- 
 ful : 
 
 Miseros deseruisse tibi turpissimum erat. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. Instead of prying curiously into the lives of others, and 
 censuring their conduct, we should judge ourselves with the 
 greatest severity, and that will induce us to pardon venial of- 
 fences, and to consider that error is the lot of human nature. 
 (Begin by " we should judge ourselves," with potius, accord- 
 ing to rule, p. 18.) 
 
 2. Though fortune should frown upon a man, yet his great 
 esteem of virtue and the preservation of equanimity in the most 
 arduous circumstances, will always render him cheerful, and 
 even happy. 
 
 3. Thus you see wJiat small value those men have for their 
 body who regard their honor. 
 
 4. An accurate knowledge of the arts softens our manners. 
 
 It is often necessary to make use of a verb in- 
 stead of adjectives, as in these instances : Vix 
 credi potest^ It is incredible. Vix fieri potest^ It 
 is impossible, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Though the Deity is invisible to man, yet when we con- 
 sider the wonderful rapidity, with which the earth moves round 
 its axis, and how constantly it performs its annual revolutions, 
 when we see the fruits of the earth, the variety and the regu- 
 lar changes of the seasons, by which they are brought to matu- 
 rity, and every thing provided for the use and conveniency of 
 man, who will say that he does not perceive a divine being, 
 
158 
 
 which rules, protects, and governs all things with infinite power 
 and wisdom ? 
 
 2. It is indeed impossible that I should be deceived in this 
 business. 
 
 The word toius, to render it still more forci- 
 ble, may be varied by quclm longum est ; quan- 
 tus quanius est ; quam late patet ; as, 
 
 The ichole sea. 
 
 I passed the whole night without sleep. 
 
 This is all your own. 
 
 A verb is also, with great propriety, used for 
 an advt^rb. 
 
 EXAMJPLKS. 
 
 1. You write much oftener than usual, 
 
 2. I was seized with such a dizziness, when I stood upon 
 the brow of that edifice, that I almost or nearly fell — (parum 
 abfuerit.) 
 
 3. I beg you not to suppose that I write to you less frequent- 
 ly i\idii\ formerly from having forgotten you ; but it arises from 
 the very ill state of my health, from which, liowevcr,! am now 
 recovering, or it is owing to my absence from Rome, so that I 
 knew no one, who was going to you. 
 
 4. I cannot possibly read this book in the time dlowed. 
 
 No7i modo^ followed by sed etiam may be va- 
 ried by tantxim abest tity tit ; or sometimes now 
 dicam. 
 
 EXA3irL£J^. 
 
 1. Not only do 1 not look upon pliilosophy as able to dis- 
 
159 
 
 cover and point out the true method of living, and to be pro- 
 ductive of perfect happiness, but I also think that no set of 
 men stand so much in need of others to direct them how to 
 live, as these pretenders to philosophy. 
 
 2. No flow of genius, no force of eloquence, no power of 
 description are sufficient not only to embellish, hut even to re- 
 count your exploits. 
 
 The verb oportet may be varied by non pos- 
 sum non. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . They must indeed live in the greatest prodigality, who 
 while they are squandering their property, entertain the hopes 
 of possessing ours. 
 
 2. I was obliged to give you this advice.- 
 
 Verbs, and particularly participles, are often 
 used for preposition*, as privatus, instructiiSy 
 prceditus^ ornatus^ ^c. as, 
 
 A soldier will scarcely fight without armour : 
 
 Miles carens, or, non instructus armis vix pug- 
 nabit. 
 
 For sine. 
 Though a man should possess all the advantages of power 
 and fortune, though whole nations should obey his nod, and 
 thousands should offer him the incense of adulation, yet how 
 could he lead a happy and a pleasant life without friends ? 
 
 For cum. 
 
 1 . When his fair promises had lulled us into security, and 
 we were enjoying the slumbers of quiet repose, after the fa- 
 tigues of the day, he came suddenly upon us with a great troop 
 of soldiers, and surprised us in our tents. 
 
160 
 
 2. He has retired into the country, and now lives (luitt ana 
 content, having married a woman with a great deal of money. 
 
 For 06, propter. 
 
 Here these participles duduSj impulsus, motusy 
 permotusj impeditusj perterritus, coactus, ^c. are 
 elegantly introduced : as, 
 
 He betook himself to another quarter throughj 
 or on account of^ his poverty : 
 
 Egestate coactus alio se contulit. 
 
 *1. They, who from mere patriotic motives, drag forth any 
 man before the tribunal of public justice, neither through pri- 
 vate injury, nor private pique, nor through any hope of reward, 
 should seriously consider beforehand not merely what cares 
 and difficulties they must undergo for the present, but also the 
 troubles and anxieties they reserve to themselves for tlie re- 
 mainder of their lives. 
 
 2. Thus this great and illustrious man was put to the most 
 cruel death by a ruffian, stained with crimes of the blackest 
 die, and he, whom his enemies had spared on account of his 
 worth and dignity, met with his death from the hands of a pre- 
 tended friend : however, I proceeded directly to his tent, 
 where I found two of his freedmen and a few of his slaves : 
 they said the rest had fled through fear, when they saw their 
 master murdered just before his tent. 
 
 3. On account of these considerations, and the authority 
 and persuasions of Orgetorix, they resolved to prepare every 
 thing necessary for an expedition. 
 
 For post. 
 
 1 . j4ft€r supper he went to bed. (^Ccenatus.) 
 
 2. Truth after long oppression, will at length emerge, and 
 shine forth the brighter. 
 
 3. My gratitude will be due to you even after your death. 
 
 To this also belong ablatives absolute. 
 
 1. This happened after the death of your father. 
 
 2. After this battle, he resolved not to admit them to any 
 
terms of peace, since they had behaved with so much dupHcity 
 and treachery. 
 
 For in, ex. 
 
 1. In his way through the maritime states, he visited the 
 Veneti, and after having passed the river Ligeris, he came 
 among the Gauls, with whom he staid some time, and then re- 
 turned to the Roman province. 
 
 2. The old man was sitting in his gown^ when having ap- 
 proached him respectfully we saluted him. 
 
 3. From experience of the same misfortune, I have learned 
 to commisserate your fate, and will do my best endeavours to 
 relieve your distress. 
 
 A substantive is often used instead of a con- 
 junction or a preposition. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Some were of opinion that they were forthwith to be re» 
 ceived and assisted ; others that they were to be esteemed as 
 rebels, and unworthy of help. (Say, loco,) 
 
 2. Such an eagerness to repair their dishonor seized the 
 whole army, that nobody needed the command of either tri- 
 bune or centurion ; and every one, even as a punishment, im- 
 posed upon himself labors extraordinary. 
 
 3. Because there had been an alarm in the night before Cae- 
 sar's camp, they took it for an argument, that there could be 
 no stealing out without discovery. 
 
 An adverb is often used for a substantive : as, 
 To speak ivith subtility and evasion : 
 Subtiliter et versute dicere. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 I. With what prudence and dispatch did he transact this 
 business ! 
 
 15 
 
162 
 
 2. He read that book with so much earnestness that he 
 secmetl to devour its contents. 
 
 3. With truthj I can say, that il you consider the (Hfiicult 
 service he had to perform, the obstinate resistance of the ene- 
 my, and the disadvantages of an intricate country, he conduct- 
 ed the army with great consideration and circumspection. 
 
 And especially ito, followed by si or nt, is of- 
 ten used for on that conditio)^ with such an effect, 
 restriction. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . It is very expedient that there should be many accusers 
 m a state, that terror may restrain insolence and audacity ; with 
 this restriction, however, it is expedient, that we do not be- 
 come the sport and victims of wanton accusations. 
 
 *2. This difference of opinion in our discussions being car- 
 ried on till night, the sitting was adjourned, and I happened 
 that evening to sup with Pompey ; I was pleased with this 
 seasonable opportunity, more than any one I had ever enjoy- 
 ed, because since your departure, this had been to us the most 
 favorable and honorable day in the senate ; I therefore spoke 
 to him icith such an effect, that I seemed to turn the mind of 
 my man from every other consideration to promoting and 
 defending your dignity. 
 
 3. I know that you will use every means in your power to 
 be with us as soon as possible ; I desire it, however, on this 
 condition, that you do not make too much liaste. 
 
 Undt is very frequently used for a quo, a qud, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. The m^n, from whom you came, i.> .i \try honest man. 
 
 2. The circumstance, from which you set out, is so well 
 kno\vn to all, that it needs no further consideration. 
 
 Prepositions are often changed one for an- 
 other. 
 
1 63 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ob, for ante, is often used. 
 
 To place before one's eyes. 
 
 Prre for ante. 
 Driving a herd before him, he had passed the river in swim- 
 
 iiiing. 
 
 Pro for ante. 
 
 1. Had he not in the hearing of the people, sitting before 
 the temple of Castor, said that no one could conquer, but he 
 who had conquered ? 
 
 2. Caesar stationed the legions before the entrenchment. 
 
 Per for iii. 
 
 1 . The war from the Sabines was by far the greatest, for 
 they did nothing in heat or anger, nor did they make sliow of 
 war before they were seen in the field. 
 
 2. He said so in joke. 
 
 Per for propter. 
 I cannot do that on account of my ill-health. 
 
 E or ex for in. 
 
 The Celtae assailed the town Titurium with great violence 
 in their way. 
 
 Pro for in. 
 Whether a greater injury can be offered to a prince, you in 
 your prudence judge. 
 
 Apud for in. 
 
 He was a wise son in rlutarch who, being told by a friend 
 that his father would disinherit him, answered, he will do no- 
 thing but what he should do. 
 
 Observe that Cicero never uses the phrases / 
 laudem ; in honorem : the best writers will sa\ 
 honoris gratia ; laudis gratia. 
 
 A or ab for the English particle of. 
 
 1. Let us go under that shade, to avoid the heat q/'the sun. 
 
 2. Cares are conversant in palaces ; they fear not the ght- 
 tering o/'gold. 
 
1(^4 
 
 3. He was of the bed-chamber to three kings succe^i\<as. 
 
 4. She is not afraid of the snow. 
 
 Ad for circiter^ speaking of uncertain num- 
 bers : but chiefly as an adverb without any casr. 
 
 1. When he was about fifteen years old. 
 ?. ^6oM^ four thousand men were slain. 
 
 A or ab for post. 
 After these injunctions he dismissed the assembly. 
 
 Secundum ior post. 
 
 After wliich games only a few days elapsetf. 
 
 Pro for secundum. 
 
 He lives according to his dignity. 
 
 De for secundum. 
 
 According to my opinion. 
 
 Ex for secundum. 
 
 He has done every thing according to law. 
 
 ^rf for secundum. 
 Triflei*s and deceivers who speak every thing according to 
 Uieir inclination, but nothing accorrfm^ to truth. 
 
 ^Modern writers very commonly use juxta in- 
 
 lead oi secundum ; but very improperly : as, ac- 
 
 ording to Livy ; according to Sallust : Juxta 
 
 ':iallustium, ^^c. It should be, Secundum Sallus- 
 
 Iu7n, or teste Sallustio^ ^^c. 
 
 Pro for ob or propter. 
 Do this on account of the friendship that has long subsisted 
 between us. 
 
 Prie for ob. 
 1 cannot speak ybr, or on account of my tears. 
 
 Ad for ob. 
 
 The senate had voted new levies on account of the report 
 of the impending war. 
 
 A preposition may be used for a substantive. 
 
[Go 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 A for (l parte. 
 
 1 . He stood on my side. 
 
 2. The army stood firm on the side of the inlaniry. 
 
 Ad for in regard to ; hy reason of \ in companson 
 
 of' 
 
 1 . I will follow another course less severe indeed in regard 
 to the criminal, but more useful with regard to the publir 
 safety. 
 
 2. We know him to be a good man, and not illiterate, but 
 nothing in comparison of Persius. 
 
 Prce and|;rd for in comparison of; in respect of: 
 in proportion to. 
 
 1. Our littleness, in companson of the bigness of their bod- 
 ies, is matter of contempt with most of the Gauls. 
 
 2. The King, in consideration of his royal dignity, and in 
 respect of his services, was most unworthily treated. 
 
 3. Education is generally the worse, in proportion to liic 
 wealth and grandeur of the parents. 
 
 Conjunctions are often changed one fur an 
 other. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Cum for postquam. 
 It is not yet 110 years ago, since Lucius Pi.so got a law to 
 i)e enacted against the corruption of magistrates.— (This mighl 
 also be rendered by ex quo-) 
 
 Observe that instead of saying die anteqxuun 
 venit, on the day before he came ; or die post- 
 quam venit^ on the day after he came ; we elegant- 
 ly say, pridie quarn venit^ and posiridie ipuun 
 venit. 
 
 Usque eo for adeo. 
 
 Dionysius the tyrant, being banished S>Tacase, kept a school 
 at Corinth. So impossible weis it for him to live without em- 
 pire. 
 
 Usque adeo and usque for adeo. 
 ^ 15 
 
166 
 
 Some men are so possessed with ambition, tliat they are not 
 content to have lived magnificently, unless they also are bm'ied 
 so. 
 
 Ut for 7iamy ct, when preceded by tarn, ita, 
 tantus, ^'C. : this is done in order to draw sen- 
 tences closer together, when the one clause jis 
 the effect or the consequence of the other, as we 
 have seen before. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I am in the greatest perplexity and terror, and 1 know 
 neither what to do, nor which way to turn myself. 
 
 2 How could I be so inhuman, and refuse you your request. 
 
 3. On the arrival of this detachment, a great change was 
 produced in our favor, for many of the soldiers, who before 
 lay oppressed with wounds, now resuming courage, and sujv 
 porting themselves with their shields, renewed the engage* 
 jiient. 
 
 Instead of quidcm followed by sed or tamen^ 
 the Latins more frequentlj* use ctsi, quanquamj 
 HceU ^'C* as, 
 
 We cannot indeed do everj^ thing, but wc 
 jnust use every exertion : 
 
 Etsi omnia non cfficerc possimu^, fnmcn omnes 
 iitrcos inlcndere debcmus, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 * J . I indeed am least of all fitted to offer you any consolation, 
 jncelhave been so much affected by your distresses, as my- 
 tlfto stand in need of comfort: however^ as there is still 
 
 mic difference between my own sorrow and that bitterness ol 
 ., oe, with which your heart is wrung, I felt that it would show 
 a want of friendship, and of that regard, which I have always 
 expressed for you, to obiicrv*^ ;« ;i':'}''«' nf !iu|i(r<Tence in your 
 ,reat afflictions. 
 
 2. I myself, indtcd, who aiu desirous (>1 administering com- 
 fort to you, stand in-the greatest need of consolation, because 
 nothing of late has affected me more than your misfortune : 
 
167 
 
 liowever, I not only most earnestly exhort you, but outreatarHi 
 conjure you by the ties of our mutual friendship that you 
 would be collected, show yourself a man, and consider on w!iat 
 conditions life was given us, and in what times we were born. 
 
 There are other kinds of variation, which we 
 shall just slightly mention, but which are chief- 
 ly by figures of rhetoric. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 An affirmative speech into a negative. — Pru- 
 dentia est vara, non vulgaris. 
 
 An affirmative word into a double negative. 
 Noil indoctus for doctus ; nc7no non for omnis ; 
 non nihil for aliquid; non temnendus for prcecla- 
 rus. 
 
 But these negatives have sometimes more 
 force than the affirmatives, and are used by the 
 figure Litotes ; as Livy calls Polybius no con- 
 temptihle author. As we say, I have not brought 
 you the most welcome news : that is, very melan- 
 choly news. But the use of these will depend 
 upon the subject and the judgment of the schol- 
 ar ; for sometimes we are obliged to make use 
 of a negative, because either the affirmative does 
 not exist, is inelegant, or obsolete : as. 
 
 We must say, non facile^ because dijficulter 
 seldom exists ; non sine causdj because more el- 
 egant than cum causd. 
 
 The antecedent for the consequent : — as, vixit 
 for mortuus est ; fuit Ilium for ruit ; conferre sig- 
 na for pugnare. 
 
 The consequent for the antecedent. — Hie me 
 nunquam irridehit for non me decipiet ; spealdng 
 
168 
 
 of a great man, ornat nosirmn xrrbem Ibr habiutf 
 in urbe ; for mori^ caremus ejus consuetudine^ ^r. 
 
 Cause for the effect. — Mars for helium ; vis 
 Martis for belli ; fcrrum for gladius ; mens for 
 cogitationes ; anima for vha,, ^\ 
 
 Effect for the cause. — Cadere for interjici in 
 prcelioj ^c. 
 
 By the same Metonyuiia, the containing for 
 the contained. — Urbs Icetatitr for homines; do- 
 mus for familia ; liters for omnis doetrina^ k,c. 
 
 A synecdoche of the member, or of the wliole : 
 as, />a^er est sepultus^ or imtris corjms est sepuU 
 turn. 
 
 The g^nus for the species : as, niortalis for 
 homo: orator eloquentissimus for Cicero. 
 
 The species for the fi;enus. — This is chiefly us- 
 ed in proverbial expressions : as, Punica fides for 
 perfidia ; Romano more loqui for liberty aperte, ^c. 
 
 This variation, if not carried to too great a 
 length, is very elegant, and tends very nmch to 
 exercise the genius, and improve the judgment. 
 
 Thus, this simple idea, '' from ease men fall 
 into luxury," maybe varied by means of figures 
 of rhetoric : 
 
 By Asyndeton: — Omnes homines ab otio ad 
 luxuriam, libidinem, lasciviam prcecipiti cursu ru- 
 unt. 
 
 By Anaphora : — Nihil est hominibus otiosis ad 
 luxuriam, nihil ad lasciviam^ nihil ad libidinem ac 
 voluptatem proclivius. 
 
 By a Climax : — Ea hominum pent omnium est 
 indoles^ nt ab otio in luxuriam^ ab hnc in lascivi- 
 am^ atque ab ed denique in fccdissimas libidines 
 non gradu, sed prcecipiti cursiiferantur. 
 
169 
 
 The chief, and the most useful of these figures' 
 is Metaphor, which indeed often creeps imper- 
 ceptibly into the style, without the difficulty of 
 searching for it. By its means there is nothing 
 for which a suitable name or description may not 
 be discovered. Metaphor is shorter than a com- 
 parison, because, instead of comparing, it is 
 transformed into the thing itself Comparison 
 is, when a man has done any thing like a Lion ; 
 Metaphor, when it is said of the man, he is a Li- 
 on. So that Metaphor may be defined, the 
 omission of the particle of comparison, as tan- 
 quam^ velut, quasi This ti'ope or change of a 
 word or idea from its proper and simple mean- 
 ing into another corresponding to it, must be 
 such that it may be easily understood that the 
 subject is merely varied without losing its origi- 
 nal force. Thus, the literal idea: — Intempe- 
 rance causes death : Metaphorically, Intempe- 
 rantia est mater mortis ; instead of saying, quasi 
 mater. 
 
 Sapientia estfons bene dicendi. 
 
 In vere cetatis periit 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 COPIOUSNESS OF STYLE 
 
 W E do not mean here that copiousness of 
 style, which constituted the greatest part of Ci- 
 cero's eloquence, as applied to oratory : but 
 
170 
 
 limiting it wholly to our present piu^pose, we 
 shall here include in its meaning scarcely any 
 thing more than the mere substitution, or the 
 addition of one or more words and expressions 
 to the sentence, in order to render it more per- 
 spicuous and fuller, but not too verbose : For 
 instance, if it was necessary to give more strength 
 to the style idstead of simply saying minari^ we 
 might make use of this metaphor, spirare minas ; 
 instead of amare^we might say amore Jlagiare^ 
 ^c. In aid of it, however, arguments, compar- 
 isons, testimonies, and examples, may some- 
 times be introduced ; but this copiousness would 
 become ridiculous, if it did not tend to render 
 the ideas and the whole subject more forcible 
 and perspicuous. In this case, when properly 
 applied, it becomes a most necessaiy pait of el- 
 egance. 
 
 Where one word is added to another, which 
 might have been sufficient of itself, care must bo 
 taken that the latter differs in some degree from 
 the former, that it gives weight to it, and tends 
 to explain and confirm it, as it would be wrong 
 to join two words of the same meaning, or per- 
 Ibctly synonimous, as edere and vesci. 
 
 Cause and effect are often joined together, 
 where either miglit be sufficient ; as, 
 
 I saw him in a passion : 
 
 Iratum vidiy pallidumj rubicundtim. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. For may I never enjoy, in conjunction with you, tlie hcn- 
 efit of my country's safely, if tlie eagerness which 1 show ii. 
 
171 
 
 this case, proceeds from any severity of temper, (for no man 
 has less of it) but from pure humanity and demeiwy. — (Here 
 clemency is the effect of humanity, and therefore not synoni- 
 mous, though either of the two might have been snfficient.) 
 
 *2. If indeed, my lords, the commonwealth, which owes its 
 preservation to my labors, and the dangers I have encountered 
 in its behalf, had not the power by its own dignity to revive my 
 own Jirmness of mind and constancy ; yet nature has im- 
 planted that principle within us, that we cannot but hate most 
 cordially the man,who has always been the object of our fears, 
 with whom we have often struggled for the preservation of 
 our lives and fortunes, and whose dark intrigues we have with 
 difficulty avoided. — (Here constancy and firmness of mind are 
 properly joined together, as the one is the effect of the other.) 
 
 The antecedent and the consequent. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. See you not how those men, who, according to the tradi- 
 tion of poets, have inflicted a most awful punishment upon their 
 mothers, from the pious wish of avenging the deaths of their 
 fathers, even though they are said to have acted in obedience 
 to the express commands and oracles of the Gods, are never- 
 theless continually harrassed and agitated by the furies, nor 
 suffered to remain in one place, since it was impossible for 
 them to listen to the voice of nature in one case, without an act 
 of the greatest impiety in the other. — (Here, suffered to re- 
 main in one place, is added as the consequent of agitated, to 
 give greater force, though the sense and the idea might have 
 been complete without it.) 
 
 2. For nature, niethinks, has begotten and formed us for 
 greater purposes 5 I may be possibly mistaken, but this is my 
 firm conviction : nor can I think that Torquatus, who first was 
 distinguished by that honorable name, either tore off the collar 
 from the enemy with a view to the pleasure and gratification he 
 would receive from it, or engaged with the Latins at Veseris 
 in his third consulship, merely from motives of pleasure. 
 
 *3. But we chiefly arraign and think those persons entitled 
 to our just abhorrence, who being allured and corrupted by 
 the blandishments of present pleasures, and entirely blinded by 
 their passions, take no precautions whatever against the mis- 
 
172 
 
 fortunes and troubles which await them ; and equally blanica- 
 ble are they, who, from weakness of mhid, and in order to es- 
 cape some (ew pains and troubles, neglect and forsake the du- 
 ties of their station. 
 
 The parts are often joined with the whole, 
 the species with the genus, if they tend to give 
 weight to the idea : as, when Cicero, wishing 
 merely to say that he had bid adieu to public 
 business, says, Nam omnem nostram de repuhlicd 
 curmn, cogitationem de dicendd in senatu scnten- 
 tidy commentationem causarunij abjecimus. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. All foreign wars of kings, nations, and countries, are 
 now extinguished, so that we are now at liberty, without 
 wounding our national honor, to treat with those, whom we 
 sufter to enjoy repose. 
 
 2. The whole senate, the fathers and the equestrian order, 
 fixed their eyes and their whole attention upon thee, thy coun- 
 tenance, and thy whole demeanor. 
 
 *3. The oration of C. Gracchus, who possessed the finest 
 genius, and had the greatest powers of eloquence of any man, 
 is still extant, and is replete with charges of the most flagitious 
 nature against L. Piso, a man of that virtue and integrity, that 
 even in those times, when it was difficult to find an unprinci- 
 pled man, he had singly the appellation of ^ the Virtuous' be- 
 stowed upon him. 
 
 Two words joined together, the latter of which 
 is stronger than the former ; aSjpiUo et mihiper- 
 suadeo, velim credas tibique persuadeas : this con- 
 tributes greatly to give dignity to the sentence ; 
 ns, 
 
 This must greatly rouse and exasperate your 
 ininds : 
 
1?3 
 
 Quod maximt vestros animos exciiare atque 
 injlammare debet. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . And because you have always felt a greater thirst for 
 glory, and passion for fame than other nations, you must wipe 
 out that stain contracted in the last war, v/hich has fixed a bloty 
 an indelible blot on the reputation of the Roman people ; that 
 the man, who in one day, by the contents of a single letter, 
 marked out the Roman citizens to slaughter and to butchery^ 
 has yet received no punishment adequate to the atrocity of the 
 deed. 
 
 2. The praises of our fleets shall ever be recorded and cele< 
 brated for the wonders performed at Tenedos ; where the ene- 
 my^s ships were sunk, and their commanders slain ; sucfi arc 
 our trophies^ such are our monuments^ such are our tiiumjjhs. 
 
 It is scarcely credible how fond the ancients 
 were of joining words almost synonimous, and 
 whose difference is scarcely perceptible. This 
 copious accumulation of words is scarcely par- 
 donable, except in a diffuse subject, as in orato- 
 ry, where the speaker, being carried away by 
 his emotions, often heaps together more words 
 than are necessary. 
 
 When this takes place, it will contribute to 
 the force of the sentence, not to admit any con- 
 junctions between those words : as, 
 
 From our desires are hati^ed, dissensions, dif- 
 ferences, seditions, and fightings : 
 
 Ex cupiditaiibus odia^ dissidia, discordice, sedi- 
 tionesj bella nascuntur. 
 
 EXAlsrPLES. 
 
 1 . You attempt J you contrive y you set on foot nothing, of 
 which I have not timely information ; yet you cease not to 
 concert and enterprize! How often has that dagger been 
 
 16 
 
174 
 
 wrested out of thy hands ? How often, by some accident, Iku 
 it fallen y Iiwi it dropped before tlie moment of execution ? 
 
 i. This countenance, which is the tacit hmguacre of the 
 juind, drove men info this error : It was this countenance, 
 which deceived, which led into mistake, which betrayed those, 
 who did not know him. 
 
 3. To all who have /jre^eri'ce/, assisted, benefitted, a7id ex- 
 alted their country, there is a certain place set apart in th< 
 heavens. 
 
 It will sometimes give elegance and co|)ious- 
 iiess to the style, to make two substantives of 
 one : when the substantive is put in the genitive, 
 and another is added, which communicates an- 
 other idea to it, tending at the same time to 
 explain and illustrate the former, and indicates 
 the part, attribute, or the cause of it ; as for, tu 
 me reddidisti sapientcm, may be said, tuaprcecep- 
 ta, consilia reddidcrunt. 
 
 He deceived his keepers : 
 
 Custodum curam fefelUt. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I owe my present good fortune to mij jmm r : when I 
 was reduced to the greatest indigence, I relied upon him, and 
 he relieved me. (Here additional substantives illustrative of 
 the subject may be given, as liberality, affection, Sfc.) 
 
 2. If a young man wishes to be distinguished in life, to be 
 loved and respected, he ought to be early accustomed and ini- 
 tiated into the precepts and instructions of wisdom and virtue. 
 (animus,) 
 
 3. Such was Q. Caiuhi<, wiioui ncithor danger nor honors 
 could move from his riuht course, uninllucnced by motives of 
 hope or fear. (Here say the hour of danger, and breath of 
 honors.) 
 
 A participle is often added to an ablative, to 
 indicate the cause or motive why a tiling is done, 
 
175 
 
 though it is not expressed in English ; care being 
 at the saiHC time taken, that the true significa- 
 tion of the participle be apphcable to the sub- 
 ject ; such as, ductus^ adductus^ motus^ impulsuSj 
 instructiis, captus^ delinitiis, actus, vicius, fretiis, 
 confisus; or speaking negatively, impeditus^prO' 
 hibitus, deterrikis ; as, 
 
 He fled through fear of the enemy : 
 Metu iricltatus, or with greater force, iuetu ic- 
 tus ahlatuSjfugit. 
 
 (This use of the participle is the same as the 
 change of prepositions into participles, which 
 we have seen above.) 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. This nobleman, from an aspiring ambition , formed a 
 conspiracy of tlie principal men of the state, and persuaded the 
 people to quit the country in a body, representing that as they 
 surpassed all the nations around them in valor, it would be easy 
 for them to gain the entire sovereignty of Gaul. 
 
 2. Here when he had fallen into a deej) slumber, from the 
 excess of eating and drinking, a shepherd, who inhabited this 
 part of the country, of the name of Cacus, a man of a fierce 
 and gigantic stature, wishing to carry oft'this booty, on account 
 of the beauty of the oxen, but knowing at the same time, that 
 if he drove the herd into his cave', the very footsteps of the 
 beaits would direct their keeper to the place of tlieir conceal- 
 ment, ih'agged ^he most beautiful of them backwards by the 
 tail into his den. 
 
 It will often render the style more copious and 
 i legant to change the verb into a participle, and 
 to add another verb bearing a stronger signifi- 
 cation, especially where it expresses any event ; 
 as, tor miles gladio confossus est, say, gladio con- 
 fossvs cecidU :' as, Captvm ten ere for cepisse ; Ra- 
 
17a 
 
 na rupto jacuit corpore : But as this mode is 
 more peculiar to tiic poets, great caution is ne- 
 cessary in tiie use of it, that neither more nor 
 less be said than is necessary : thus, 
 
 Our stoics would entangle thee in the toils ol^' 
 their disputations and questions : 
 
 Nostn stoici dispxitatiomtm suarum atqne inter- 
 rogationum laqueis te irretittim tenerent : instead 
 of irretirent. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Could then those powers of genius, which acquired so 
 much power in the discovery of the liberal arts, ever be blunt- 
 ed? (Introduce another verb expressive of the consequences of 
 being blunted, and put it in the tense in which could be blunt- 
 ed would have been.) 
 
 2. I am fully aware that men of the first celebrity for learn- 
 ing and wisdom have said and written much concerning the 
 nature and power of the immortal Gods : (scripta reliquisse) 
 and though what they have left us is most divinely written, yet 
 it is of that nature that their knowledge must be derived from 
 the information of our ancestors, and not what they could have 
 taught them ; for who is there so lost to reason, wlio, when he 
 views the heavens, will not be convinced of the existence of a 
 Deity ? Or who w rll imagine that those things are the effect of 
 chance, which were made with so much wisdom and design, 
 as to defy the ingenuity of any man to comprehend their order 
 and connexion ? 
 
 3. For an innumerable multitude of slaves, which had been 
 l>reviously s(?nt from all the adjacent towns, having been col- 
 lected by this religious /Edile, on a sudden, upon a signal being 
 given, ica6 let loose upon tlie stage, from all the adjoining por- 
 ''*os and passages. — [Here irntjiit may be added.) 
 
 1. The rominon report is, that the king, while lie was turn- 
 ing over tlie Comnunlaries of Numa, discovered that certain 
 mysterious and solemn sacrifices had been offered to Jupiter; 
 and that he shut himself up to perform the same mysteries ; 
 but not ha\ ♦ rved the proper care and due ceremonies, 
 
 he w«is so i ' ii witnessing the apf>earanceof any heavenly 
 objects, that he loas ttruck with liirhtning by Jupiter, who wa^^ 
 
177 
 
 liisrhly provoked by this impious and superstitious rite. — (Her< 
 another verb expressive of the efiects of being struck with 
 lightning may be added, as, was cntirehj consumed, c^c.) 
 
 It is usual with Cicero, and other elegant wri- 
 ters, to change the finite verb into an infinite, 
 with the addition of another fit and appropriate 
 verb : as, pnto^ arbitroi\, constat^ cerium est, vide- 
 tur,fatendiimest,^*c. especially wdth the relativ( 
 qui, quce, quod: as, for nihil pulchrms est virtute, 
 may be said, nihil pulchrius virtute esse constat. 
 The same finite verb, as we have already men- 
 tioned, may be changed into a gerund ; or if 
 there is a substantive, into a participle futuin 
 passive, with or without esse, with the addition 
 of the same verbs, puto, existimo, arbitror, statiio. 
 video, ^ c. but let it be observed, that the proper 
 signification of these verbs must be applical)le 
 to the subject : as, 
 
 I have lost a father, w ho was a most learned 
 man : 
 
 Patrem amisi, quern dociissimum fuisse, faten- 
 dum est. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. Though you hcive used so much prudence in this busi- 
 ness, that I cannot presume to find fauU with it ; not tliat I 
 perfectly agree with you, but because i/ou evince so mucli true 
 wisdom, that I cannot prefer my judgment to your own ; yet I 
 have been induced, by an intimacy of such long standing, and 
 by that benevolence, which I have experienced from your youth, 
 to write to you what must be conducive to your welfare, and 
 was not derogatory to your dignity. — (Here the verbs intcUigo, 
 judico, arbitror^ and duco may be added.) 
 
 2. I have not that prejudice common to many, to deem it 
 a crime to allow some small share of praise to the Gracchi; 
 
 ^ 16 
 
i?S 
 
 by' Tsiirrs, wisdom, and laws, many usellit eslabiisli- 
 
 nn nJormuL 
 
 3. In our lii^putations upon this subject you generally diiTtr 
 from me, because, accordiiig to me, elocjuence is comprised in 
 the science and virtues of men of the first eminence in wisdom, 
 whilst you separate it from the elegancies of learning, and 
 place it in tlie mere acquirements of genius and application. — 
 {putOy with part, pass.) 
 
 4. / have dedicated my whole time to tlie concerns of my 
 friends. 
 
 5. Lucullus followed him \\Ith his army into this prince's 
 territories, where he found many nations ready to oppose him, 
 from the dread they entertaineti of the Roman forces, though 
 they were very far from either provoking or attacking them. 
 
 The repetition of the same word, when inchi- 
 ding the idea of a cause or argument, or oppo- 
 sition, will give greater force and copiousness 
 to the sentence : as, 
 
 I beg you to forgive your bi other : 
 
 Rogo te, nt frater fratri ignoscas. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. How could you deceive your companion and friend ? 
 
 2. I am a Roman citizen; my name is C. Mucins; my de- 
 sign was to kill an enemy, (Of the two words repeated, one 
 
 ill be the nominative, and the other the case of the verb.) 
 
 Repetition of a word of opposite relation : as, 
 Canst thou hate thy wife ? 
 An maritiis uxorcm odio habes f 
 
 rx AMPLE. 
 
 llurt ^.M.:.i ,j<*u r>i»i >^t\\T son? flow r'^"!'^ " "' ! ,,.. . ' 
 
 barbarity to abuw; y(tur father ? 
 
 Repetition c)l oiiinis^ multiis ; as, 
 He dissipates the fears of (til: 
 (hnnes omnium meius pell it 
 
no 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. The providence of God extends over tli^ w Ik'1' world, \ir 
 ^ro\'\des for the advantages of all. ^""^^ "" 
 
 2. No one can doubt, but that the property of all must be 
 in the power of those, who pass sentence, and of those, who 
 judge. 
 
 3. Cicero's eloquence was admired, at the same time that it 
 excited the envy of his adversaries ; he freely undertook the 
 causes of many Romans. 
 
 There is nothing more frequent among the 
 ancients, es|3ecially Cicero, than circumlocution 
 or periphrasis. It is of great use in the struc- 
 ture of a period, as it tends to vary, and to give 
 it greater perspicuity and force. It will indeed 
 require some thought and judgment to find out 
 those variations, which are best adapted to the 
 subject ; for as they are singularly pleasing, and 
 tend to illustrate and give greater animation to 
 the style when properly used, so too great a di- 
 latation, or too extended a circumlocution, where 
 the occasion does not require it, must appear 
 cold and puerile. 
 
 This circumlocution may be effected three 
 diflerent ways ; by means of a definition, that 
 Is, either a shorter or larger description or ex- 
 planation, by partition, and by comparison. 
 
 hy definition, or explanation, especially by 
 ^za*, quce^ quod, ^f . as, 
 
 We ought to love our relatives : 
 
 Amare eos debemiiSj qui nobis vinculo cognatio- 
 nis €onjnft€ti sunt. 
 
 ' EXAMPLES. 
 
 '*ii ;The fifth mode of exciting compassion is to represent to 
 th'^ eyes each particular of distress, so that the atiditor raav 
 
180 
 
 fancy that he views each object, and thus may be drawn in re- 
 ality, as if he were present, and not merely by the Torre of 
 language, to commisserate tlie distressed. 
 
 2. If you have any regard for me, continue in the enjoy- 
 ment of this tranquility, and be persuaded that except ofl'enccs 
 and wickedness, from which you have always been, and al- 
 ways will be, exempt, nothing horrible or formidable , can hap- 
 pen to man. 
 
 3. We have had the superiority over you in one circuni- 
 >iance, that we were acquainted with the deliverance of Mar- 
 cellus before you, and I may add too, that we were witne^>se^ 
 to the mode of the tchole transaction, — (jquemadmodum.) 
 
 By a more extended definition : as, 
 
 We do not bear ariin as»;ainst children, but a- 
 jz;ainst armed men : 
 
 Children here may be defined, that age wliicli 
 is usually spared, in taking of town^ 
 
 Aima habemiis non adccrsus earn aiaicm, mi 
 etiara in captis urbibus parcilur, sed adversus ar- 
 matos. 
 
 1. Oh the unparalleled instance of wisdom ! do they not 
 seem to have dispatched and removed that man from the faro 
 of nature, whom they suddenly deprived of the light of the 
 heavens, of the sun, of earth and water; that since Jic had 
 murdered his own father, he might be cut off from the enjoy- 
 ment of those things, from which all comforts are derived. — 
 (Hi« own father here will admit of a larger periphrasis, him to 
 whom he owed his life, — ) 
 
 2. No one could snpi)ose that a parricide could enjoy any 
 sleep. — (Here parricide may be very fully d<»fnied, as, the man 
 who had violated all divine and human laws, by, d'c.) 
 
 To this may be referred several English ex- 
 pressions, adverbs and adjectives, which must 
 necessarily be rendered by a short periphrasis : 
 as, his sj)eech was irresistible for its eloquence, 
 
 say, his speech was so eloquent that YourW 
 
 language is inexplicable, ^c. 
 
181 
 
 Circumlocution secondly may be effected b) 
 partition, or division of a whole into parts, of a 
 genus into species : as, 
 
 No where shall we have any just subject of a- 
 larm : . 
 
 Non in campoynonin foro^nonin curid^ non 
 denique intra domesticos parietes^ pertimescemus. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . He promised me that he Wv)uld afford me assistance at 
 nil times — (May be said whether in the morning or in the 
 evening.) 
 
 2. The Romans, eager to revenge the massacre at Gena- 
 bum, and exasperated by the obstinate defence of the place, 
 spared none of the inhabitants : insomuch that of all that mul- 
 titude, amounting to about forty thousand, scarce eight hun- 
 dred, who had quitted the town upon the first alarm, escaped 
 in safety to the camp. — (Say neither naen, &c.) 
 
 Thus Cicero divides eloquence into genius, 
 exercise in speaking, and knowledge of the lib- 
 eral arts ; as, 
 
 If I have any abilities, and I am sensible they are but small? 
 if, by speaking often, I have acquired any merit as a speaker ; 
 if T have derived any knowledge from the study of the liberal 
 arts, which have ever been my delight, Licinius may justly 
 claim the fruit of all. 
 
 Circumlocution is also very elegant where an 
 idea is conveyed of multitude, magnitude, and 
 excellence in general, when instead of the words 
 muhus^ valde^ ^c we make use of a compari- 
 son, as for, vdldc te amo, saj^ 7ion minOs te amo 
 quam filius patremy or ita ut vix unquam fuerint 
 qui simili amove cujusquam flagrarent ; for, doc- 
 tissimus^ say, e^^ tarn docius ut nihil non inteUi' 
 gat, ^c. 
 
•i8;i 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. For in the senate I liave always contended with hira with 
 \\\Q greatest jirinness mul perseverance, concerning the inter- 
 ests of the comraonweakh. — (Cicero says, so that he rni^ht be 
 convinced that he had to do with a man of firmness and perse- 
 verance.) 
 
 2. The study of literature has produced injinite advantages 
 to mankind. (Say greater than can be derived from any thing 
 else.) 
 
 3. Rome possessed many brave citizens. (As no other na- 
 tion could ever boast of, &c.) 
 
 4. God confers daily and great benefits upon us. 
 
 In the selection of these additional words and 
 expressions, which constitute copiousness ol' 
 ^tyle, great care must be taken that they be ap- 
 propriate and suited to the subject, not labored, 
 trifling, nor without a correspondent meaning : 
 otherwise a short and nervous diction would be 
 preferable to a multitude of languid and un- 
 meaning words. But as elegance of style, esj>e- 
 cially Ciceronian, consists, for the most part, in 
 this copiousness of diction, which, as we have 
 observed before, contributes so greatly to the 
 structure of finished periods ; I shall here give a 
 few more rules to show how, by means of this 
 copiousness, additional clauses, and even new 
 ideas may be introduced to illustrate and adorn 
 the style. 
 
 Speaking on a sulyect, which conveys the idea 
 of any thing great, excellent, or manifest, anew 
 idea may be introduced by either prefixiug the 
 cause, or subjoining the effect, with ita^ acled, vt, 
 tantus^ iantuMj ^c. Thus to give an instance 
 of cEich : The young man devotes whole days and 
 
183 
 
 nights to literature ; by introducing the cause 
 why he does it, an additional clause, and at the 
 same time greater force may be given to the 
 sentence ; adolesceiis tanto liter arum studio tene- 
 tur, ut dies noctesque det iis operam. Or on the 
 contrary, by introducing what on the first view 
 appears the effect : -as, What you relate is noto- 
 riously false ; Res^ quam narraSy tarn ahhorret ab 
 ortiniy veritatis specie^ ut nemo non Jidem tibi de- 
 neget. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Cause : 
 
 1. Travellers, who have visited distant countries, are very 
 fond of magnifying and extolling the curiosities they have seen, 
 above those of their own country ; nay, they are sometinnes 
 very fond of relating wonders, and then' talcs and wonders can 
 scarcely be bclietwd. — ( They are so remote from the truth 
 that. . . . might easily be inserted.) 
 
 *2. Who is there among us, whojjas not the liberty of walk- 
 ing over his own farm, and visiting his agricultural arrange- 
 ments, either for the sake of its improvement, or his own plea- 
 sure ? No one indeed can be ignorant of the nature of sowing 
 and of harvest, what the pruning of trees and vines is, what 
 time of the year and in what manner these several occupations 
 ought to take place. If any one therefore has his farm to in- 
 spect, some direction to give his steward, or orders to his bailiff, 
 concerning agriculture, must he study and thoroughly under- 
 stand the books of Mago the Carthaginian ? Cannot we be 
 satisfied with our own common sense and understanding } (No 
 one can be without eyes, &c.) , 
 
 3. Which of us lately was not affected with the death of 
 that excellent man ? For though he died in an advanced age, 
 yet such was the excellence and inimitable beauty of his art, 
 that we thought him worthy of living for ever. (Give the 
 cause, and say, which of us was so void of taste, and of so un- 
 feeling a temper, <X:c,) 
 
 4. Can we who are < ^ in the affairs of the state, and 
 ia so many toils and da ^ - . imagine that, after a life of unin- 
 
rS4 
 
 lernipted care and trouble, nothinr/ sliall remain ol u> una 
 ♦leath ? (Add, be so narrow-mind td as to imagine, &c.) 
 
 Eflbct : 
 
 J. Jle was a most cruel tyrant. (So cruel that he spared 
 no ) 
 
 2. Nothing now-a-days is sacred, and therefore the most 
 exemplary punishments should be inflicted upon those, who 
 are so lost to every principle of virtue and religion, as to rob 
 and spoil the holy recesses of temples. (Is so sacred 
 which ) 
 
 3. Pindar excels other poets in the boldness of his thoughts 
 and the sublimity of his poetry, but his odes are veri/ difficult 
 to he understood. (So difl^cult that whoever wishes to under- 
 stand them must ) 
 
 *4. For many have wasted whole estates by inconsiderate 
 prodigality ; but what can be a mark of greater folly, than in a 
 mode of life, which depends upon your own will, to create an 
 inability of continuing it ? Robbery and injustice are often the 
 consequence of these profuse expenses ; for when bountiful 
 lareresses are at last followed by want, these men are at length 
 obliged to lay hands on the property of others. Thus wlieii 
 they are desirous of practicing this beneficence for the sake of 
 fining the good will of others, they do not so much attach 
 those men to themselves, who have been the objects of tlii 
 pi.digality, as they excite the resentment of those, who ha. 
 been the victims of their depredations. Therefore our purse 
 "hfsuld neither be too closely shut, nor too open, (So shut 
 . I liberality niay not open it, nor so open that it may be at the 
 *i j»osalofall.) 
 
 In the enumeration of several things or per- 
 sons, w hich all refer to the same verb, it will give 
 trreat elegance to add a corresjmnding verb to 
 ' uch partirular mentioned, and consequently to 
 L^ixe an additional clause to the sentence. It 
 will be proper, if possible, to preserve the con- 
 cinnitas or ecjualiry of parts, and that such verbs 
 be chosen that govern the same cases ; as, for 
 
amant te cives et peregnni^ say ammit te cives^ di- 
 ligiint peregrini. Thus ; I did this, not being ac- 
 tuated by self-interest, but by the desire of serv.- 
 ing you : Non amore met ductus^ sed cupiditate^ 
 ntilitatis tuce incensus hoc feci In this example, 
 beside the addition of incensus, it is easy to ob- 
 serve the exact equality of the parts, the abla- 
 tive corresponding to the ablative, and the par- 
 ticiple to the participle. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Verres depopulated his province, Sicily, for three years. 
 He is said to have pillaged cities, houses^ and temples. 
 
 2. I am fond of these studies, I own. Let those be asham- 
 ed, who have buried themselves in learning, so as to be of no 
 use to society, nor able to produce any thing to public view : 
 but why should I be ashamed, who for so many years have 
 never been prevented by indolence^ by pleasure^ nor sleep^ 
 from doing good to others. (Here a different appropriate verb 
 may be used with each particular.) 
 
 3. Rocks and deserts re-echo sounds : savage beasts are often 
 soothed by music, and listen to its charms ; and shall we, with 
 all the advantages of the best education, be unaffected with the 
 voice of poetry ? The Colophonians, the Chians, the Salamin- 
 iatis, the Smyrnians^ give out that Homer is their countryman. 
 (Here a peculiar verb expressive of the claim of each may be 
 applied to these different people.) 
 
 *4. Great is the force of humanity, of kindred^ of bloody 
 and of nature herself against suspicions of this kind. It is a 
 most certain prodigy, a monstrous and unnatural thing, that 
 any one should be found clothed in a human shape, who could 
 so far surpass the most savage animals in their ferocity of na- 
 ture, as basely and inhumanly to cut off the light from those to 
 whom he owes the sweet enjoyment of the precious light of 
 Heaven : when even the most ferocious beasts that have receiv- 
 ed a kindred birth, and have been bred up together, are taught 
 by nature herself to feel and acknowledge the full force of these 
 common ties. (\'erbs may be found to apply to each particu- 
 4ar, as^ valeo reclamito.) 
 
 17 
 
186 
 
 . Cicero lias a fine example of this, when he 
 says ironically, that all regret the death o( Clo- 
 dius, where each separate expression rises grad- 
 ually in a climax. 
 
 •5. But it is weak in one to presume to connpnre Drusns, 
 Africanus, Pompe}-, or myself, with Clodius. Their livei could 
 be dispensed with, but as to the death of Clodius, no one can 
 bear it with any degree of patience. The Senate mourns, the 
 Equestrian Order is Jilled with distress, the whole ritfj is in 
 the deepest affliction, the corporate towns are all in mourninsr^ 
 the colonics are overwhelmed mth sorrow ; in a word, even 
 the fields themselves lament the loss of so generous, so useful, 
 and so humane a citizen. . 
 
 Instead of one expression which was sufficient 
 to convey the necessary idea, two will be joined 
 together, one in a negative, the other in an affir- 
 mative form, sometimes by non, sed — non modo^ 
 sed etiam — tantum abest ut, lit : this is done to 
 give greater force to the subject ; as, for semper 
 memor erotuorum b'enejicwrum : say nvnqnam tua 
 heneficia obUviscar, semper animo meo infixa erii 
 illorum memoria ; or to join both by tantum abest 
 ut^ ut-; as tantum abest at beneficia tua oblivisci 
 possiniy ut potius eorum memoria meo animo infixa 
 perpetuo mansura sit. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 
 I. An ' * ' * " ' liis man n ' il- 
 ly of a^'i« J . ! he has 1 «d 
 himself the enemy ol all good men, is there a single person who 
 V " * ^ ' '*-*': his advocate ? There is now f ''■ rr no more 
 ry, the case itself ref/uircs .s' 
 
 1. There are few men that do not acknowiedgf and admire 
 the charms of virtue, though we see every one hurried by pas- 
 sion into vices and pleasures. A'o man despises virtue, but all 
 
187 
 
 *S. I cannot boast a long iiiie of ancestors, whose nooit, 
 blood may have flowed pure and uncontaminated, through the 
 veins of their remote descendants. I cannot boast of their he- 
 roic deeds and glorious exploits, the memory of which might 
 have reflected lustre on my humble name ; I must therefore 
 rest the justice of my cause, on your own judgment, and its 
 true merits ; but though I do not advance the merits of my an 
 cestors in favor of my cause, / am not ashamed of them as if 
 they had been different from me, but I boast of and remem- 
 ber with pleasure y their virtue and probity. 
 
 4. Your soul has never been satisfied with the narrow limits 
 
 of life, which nature has prescribed us, but nor can this 
 
 be called your life, which consists in the union of the soul and 
 
 body ; that alone, that I say is your life, which (It will 
 
 be easy to supply this with the insertion of some afl'irmativc ap- 
 propriate expressions, the first about immortality^ the other 
 about the memory of suceeeding ages, to complete the sen- 
 tence.) 
 
 Instead of one expression, two or more are 
 often joined together to define and explain the 
 same idea ; but each should be more forcible, 
 and tend to confirm and illustrate the former : 
 as, Cicero wishing to say that, every man's own 
 fraud and iniquities are his chief tormentoi's, 
 thus forcibly illustrates the idea : Sua (jucmque 
 fraus, €t smis tenor maxinie vexat ; suwn quern- 
 que scelus agitata amentidque nfficit ; suce malee 
 cogitationes conscienticequc aiiimi terrcnt. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Never shall his measures disconcert, never his arts baf- 
 fle me ; nor will he even attempt to weaken and undermine me 
 by his abilities. I know all his method of attack, alt the ar- 
 tifice of his pleading. 
 
 2. In this flight, and under the influence of these terrors, he 
 took refuge with Tigranes, King of Armenia, who received him 
 kindly, roused him from his diffidence^ cheered him in his rfiV 
 tress, and restored him to some degree of hope. 
 
188 
 
 3. You see, my Lords, how he is continually flying up nuu 
 down the streets and public places with his hair nicely trim- 
 med and loaded w ith perfumes, followed by a crowd of lackies 
 and attendants ; you see, my lords, I say, how he dcjipiscs all 
 others, ttith what contempt he looks dotim upon them, and how 
 mean and worthless he regards them, in comj)arison with him- 
 self; how he looks upon himself as the only great man, the on- 
 ly happy and pow^erful man. 
 
 Though there is no great diflfcrencc between 
 these several expressions, yet the main idea is 
 thus strengthened and ilhistrated. 
 
 Sometimes an expression is prefixed to anoth- 
 er, to denote the mode or manner of it, though 
 it is implied in the sense, and therefore might 
 have been omitted ; such expressions as these : 
 Non Jieri potest J accidit^ factum est ^ jit ^faciendum 
 putavi, evenit, contigitj insitum, datunij estj ^c. 
 Most of these imply chance, event, &c. as, for 
 /'rater ab omnibus laudatus est, say, conti^it fra- 
 tri ut ab omnibus laudaretur. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ♦l. In the late irruptions of the Teutones and Cimbri, when 
 iH the other provincQik of Gaul were over-run, they alone had 
 .cntured to stand upon their defence, nor suffered the barbari- 
 ins to set foot on their territories; whence presuming on so 
 vvell known an instance of their bravery, they laid claim to 
 
 rreat authority, and challenged high military renown. 
 
 qua ex re factum est ut,) 
 
 2. These things being very uncprtain, 7 sent my Lictorsto 
 vou.—-( Facienirftim putavi ut . 
 
 ' 3. 'I thought I ought to answer your icikts as soon as pos 
 sible. 
 
 4. Therefore it will not be easy to fuul a man who will re- 
 fuse to impart to others what he knows himself: so that we 
 ff el a i)ropensity not menly to learn, but even to teach : and 
 as bulU will naturally contend for the calves against lions, with 
 
1S9 
 
 the greatest violence, and the utmost exertion of their strength, 
 so those, who Iifive tJie means, as well as the power, feel a nat- 
 ural inclination to do their utmost towards the preservation of 
 
 the human kind. 
 
 Other expressions of the same kind are also 
 often used,' as agere^ hoc ago^ id egi, ^c. when 
 the verb implies some design : as, 
 
 I always consulted the welfare of others, maybe 
 rendered by semper id egi ut aliorum saluti con- 
 siikrenu 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . But if you argue that any one has murdered his fatlier, 
 and cannot even say why or how he did it, and can only bark 
 without fixing the least suspicion, you shall not indeed have 
 3^our legs broken ; but if I have any knowledge of these men, 
 they will take such care to have your foreheads branded with 
 that letter,* for which you have so great a detestation, that for 
 its sake you abominate all the rest ; so that for the future, you 
 will tliink your ill fortune alone deserves your accusations. 
 
 *2. But to return to the point, I wish you to look upon me 
 not merely as your liiend, but as most sincerely and affection- 
 ately attached to you : and indeed it shall bo my b siness to 
 prove, by all the olTices in my power, that this opinion of me 
 may be founded in truth. But if i/ou should appear to owe 
 me this return, less on my own account than 1 labored to do on 
 yours, I freely exhonerate you from that trouble. 
 
 To an expression, on which the force of the 
 subject chieliy rests, another, though not very 
 necessary to it, is often added, containing a kind 
 of self-evident explanation or illustration of the 
 former : as, 
 
 Let young men, above all, avoid idleness : — 
 
 " The letter A*, as the ancients used to write the word cahnnvin 
 
 17* 
 
190 
 
 Here the scir-evidciit illustration, that it is the 
 parent of every flagitiousness, may be added : 
 
 Otium pntcesertim^ quod omnc Jlagitlonun ge- 
 a us alit^ cvitcnt juvenes. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. How ignorant of the real interests of the people are those 
 rulers, wl*), neglecting the blessings of peace, bi/ which alone 
 nations flourish^ will, upon the slightest causes, plunge their 
 country into all the horrors of war. 
 
 2. When we hear or read of a compassionate, a generous, a 
 humane, a just, a moderate, a prudent act, performed while in 
 anger, that foe to deliberation, and in the triumph of victory, 
 when men are gene rail tj proud and insolent ; with such an ar- 
 dent affection are we inflamed, that we are frequently in love 
 with persons whom we never saw. 
 
 To these rules of copiousness of style may be 
 ubjoined Pleonasm ; not that rhetorical figure 
 which is used to express a sti'ong emotion of the 
 mind,, as his oculls vidi, but a granmiatical pleo- 
 jiasm, wliich is sometimes a mere redundancy 
 of words, and sometimes is necessary to connect 
 or give greater force to sentences. 
 
 Jta, sicj hoc id^ illud^ are often redundant, fol- 
 lowed by an accusative with the infinitive; as, 
 
 It is my real opinion, that the good arc hap. 
 py, and the ^^'icked miserable : 
 
 ltd prorsiis cxistimo^ bonos esse beatos, impro- 
 bos miseros. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. But having pcrsvadcd hiinnvlf that the letters, which I 
 have written cojiccrning him, with so much accuracy, will have 
 
191 
 
 the greatest weight with you, he insisted upon my writing agaiu 
 to you. 
 
 2. Therefore I jcish yon to be convinced that I sliall always 
 most fondly cherish the remembrance of your virtues, and that 
 I sliall take the same care of all your affairs as if they were my 
 own. 
 
 3. But yet I wish you to think that you cannot do me a 
 greater favor, than to convince me that it is to your good offi- 
 ces that I shall owe the happy termination of this business ; I 
 therefore entreat you to complete it as soon as you possibly 
 can. 
 
 Id: 
 
 Ccesar having notice of these proceedings, and that it was 
 the design of the Helvetians to attempt a passage through the 
 province, hastened his departure from Rome. 
 
 lllud: 
 
 There are many things, which I dare not write ; hut I am 
 most truly concerned^ that I have not received a single iin« 
 from you on this subject. 
 
 Nisi ^^ is very often used for nm, wlien it ma}l 
 be explained by except that ; but never at the 
 ))eginning of a sentence. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 I have at last gained that, for which I have hitherto been 
 waiting, to make you all sensible that a conspiracy is openly 
 formed against the state, unless there he any one, who imag- 
 ines that such as resemble Catiline may yet refuse to enter into 
 his designs. There is now therefore no more room for clem- 
 ency ; the case itself requires severity. 
 
 In some cases the repetition of some particles 
 Is very elegant : 
 
 However this is, take care of your health : 
 Sed lit ut est, indulge valetudini — chiefly in- 
 stead of cunque. 
 
EXAMPLES. 
 Ut Ut. 
 
 1. But however those things are, y<'t Twill do what T prom- 
 ised. 
 
 2. But however other circumstances were, you should cer- 
 tnlnU cnnsnlt the welfare of her, who is at your house. 
 
 Ubi ubi. 
 
 1. Now toheresoever the soul is lodged, it is certainly in 
 you. 
 
 2. Wheresoever he is, yet I will search him out ; and bring 
 him with me. 
 
 Quantus qxutntns. 
 
 Great as he is, he is all labor, he is all industry* 
 
 Qucmti qiianti. 
 But at whatever price it is bought, that is well bought which 
 is necessary. 
 
 Interea temporis, and sccpenumcrb arc often us- 
 ed lor interea and scepe ; but ubi locorum, quo lo- 
 coriim, minime gentium^ are not merely redun- 
 dant, but tend to give greater weight to the sen- 
 tence. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Many times have I been cruelly deceived by the perfidy oi 
 wiy pretended friends, when I reposed the highest confidence 
 on their fidelity ; and the insidious desiirns or open attacks of 
 jninC eui'mies have undermined my happiness, and battered 
 down all my fortunes : In the mean while so shattered are all 
 my hopes, so forlorn and miserable is my condition become, 
 that 1 no longer know ichcre I shall betake myself. 
 
 Mihi^ tibi, nobis^ vobisy though evidently redun- 
 dant, are very fre(iuently used by the ancient- 
 but generally in a familiar discourse, and when 
 
193 
 
 the subject has a certain reference to the person 
 which is used as the dative ; as, 
 
 Who art thou ? 
 
 Quis 7ni/ii es ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mihi. 
 
 And does any one now name lenity and mercy ? We have 
 indeed for a long time lost the true names of things. 
 
 Tibi. 
 
 1. But on a sudden, a few days after, when I had not the 
 least expectation of him, came Caninius to me, who tokl me 
 that he was immediatelygoing to you. 
 
 2. I have been to blame. JFell, tchat says Sanio ? He is 
 pacified at last. 
 
 Vera is often added to imo, though imo would 
 have been sufficient of itself. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Why should T mention the cahimnies that were afterwards 
 heaped upon him ? And though they were such as would 
 have filled any breast with terror, that had the least conscious- 
 ness of guiU, yet how he bore them! Immortal Gods! bore 
 them did I say ? Nay^ how he despised and set them at 
 
 nought ! 
 
 This pleonasm of a conjunction gives some- 
 times great elegance to a sentence : as, 
 
 But this justice of yours, flourishes every day 
 more and more : 
 
 At vera hcec tua jusiitia jiorcscit in dies tnagis. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. And sitall I aha call her motlicr, if she calls me by the 
 
 name of daughter ? 
 
194 
 
 2. But DariuSy being religious, and of a mild dispositioDj 
 says that lie cannot commit so foul an act. 
 o. But why do you hesitate ? 
 
 lUe quidemj followed by sed, tanien verdy is 
 \ ery frequently and elegantly used by Cicero, in 
 such a manner, that the pronoun ille is evident- 
 ly redundant : as, 
 
 The book that you sent me. is well written 
 indeed, but dear : 
 
 Liber quern mihi misisti, esi ille ouidem optiim 
 scripttiSj sed pretio haud exiguo venit. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. I was necessarily grieved at this ; but how much inor^ 
 when I saw these men attach themselves so closely, so caress, 
 cherish, and even in my presence, embrace my enemy : mine 
 did I say ? Nay, the enemy of all laws, of justice, of his coun- 
 try, and of all order, not indeed that they could raise my chol- 
 er and indignation, which are utterly extinct, but certainly with 
 the hope ofdoingit. 
 
 2. Your military praises shall be celebrated, not only a- 
 mongst us, but in every language, in the annals of every na- 
 tion, and the latest posterity shall proclaim them ; the famr 
 of these exploits, however, while we read them, seems, I know 
 not how, to be drowned amidst the shouts of armies, and tho 
 din of war. 
 
 *3. Indeed this peevishness, and those imperfections 
 which I have mentioned, have sometliin*: like an • 
 justly indeed^ hut wiiich may be admitted, from tli , 
 
 which old men are top apt to entertain, of their l>eing general- 
 ly marked by the younger part of the world as objects of their 
 scorn and derision. 
 
 Quod sij quod ubiy quod uiinam, as we have 
 seen before, are often put not inelegantly at the 
 
lf)5 
 
 beginning of a sentence, where quod tiiough 
 seemingly redundant, must refer to the subject 
 of the preceding sentence. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 *1. He had but too much reason to suspect that the con- 
 tinuance of the Roman army could be with no other design, 
 than that of oppressing him. If he did not therefore depart 
 and witlidraw his troops out of those parts, he would no long- 
 er look upon him as a friend, but an enemy. Should he even 
 slay him in battle, he v/as well assured that he would do a plea- 
 sure to many of the nobles and great men at Rome. But if 
 he would retire and leave him inthe undisturbed possession of 
 his country, he would amply reward him. 
 
 2. I do not write to you as often as I could, because though 
 misfortune has embittered every moment of my life, yet I feel 
 myself more particularly overwhelmed with an insupportable 
 weight of sorrow, whenever I am obliged to write to you, or 
 when I receive letters from you. And oh ! that we had not 
 been actuated by t!iat ardent love of life 5 for we should then 
 have escaped, if not all, at least the greatest part of the evils 
 of life. If indeed we are reserved by fortune to experience 
 some amehoration of our destiny, om* errors cannot be said 
 to have been irretrievable. But if these distresses are fixed 
 and unalterable, no other wish remains but to see you once 
 more, the only comfort and soother of my life, and to breath 
 my last in your arms. 
 
 Fac easjfac facias^ scribas, ^c. are often used 
 in a familiar discourse or epistle; though fac 
 seems redundant, it is meant to give greater 
 force to the sense : as, 
 
 Bdievc me your obliged friend. 
 
 Sic fete existirnes, me tibi devinctum. 
 
 EXxVMPLES. 
 
 I. Sends, confidential person to him, with whom he may 
 freely confer on the subject which we mentioned. 
 
196 
 
 2. First oi' all, therefore, be resolute and linn. 
 
 Non is sum (/ui^ ^-c. with the verb in the sub- 
 jimctive, has more force than the simple verb : 
 in this and similar expressions : 
 
 Nor do I deny : 
 
 Non is sum qui ntgem. 
 
 EXABIPLES. 
 
 1 . Kor are you ignorant who you are ; nor do you less es- 
 teem those persons, your flatterers, who commend you, than 
 suppose them to be envious, who do not admire you. 
 
 2. Nor do I. deny that you have conducted your cause with 
 that masterly eloquence which every one knows you possess. 
 
 Quid est quod is used with greater elegance 
 and force than cur, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Why should you accuse others ? IVhy should you lay 
 your own fault to the charge of another ? 
 
 2. Of these two things the wise man makes his choice, 
 either that in rejecting some pleasures he obtains others far 
 more substantial ; or in suffering some calamities, he wards off 
 others much more afllictive. This being my firm persuasion, 
 why sliould I dread to bring my friends to the same way ot 
 thinking? 
 
 But it would be useless to study copiousness, 
 if no regard was paid at the same time to the 
 dignity of style. 
 
 Dignity or strength of style, which is used to 
 excite the more forcibly the attention of the 
 reader, is that virtue by which, in treating of 
 grave subjects, we use that dignified api)ropri- 
 ate language which w ill best correspond to the 
 
197 
 
 iiteas. Though this dignity of style consists in 
 the ideas only ; for high sounding words only 
 tend the more to expose mean and trilling 
 thoughts ; yet the right arrangement and selec- 
 tion of words will more or less contribute, not 
 only to elucidate the idea, but to give it a great- 
 er force and persuasion, since they are the echo 
 of the thoughts that arise in the mind. Thus 
 Cicero, in describing the indignity of taking 
 away a ring from a Roman citizen, says, civi 
 Romano annulus de digito detract us est : which 
 is more dignified tlian if he had said ademtiis^ or 
 ablatiis^ as expressing more forcibly the act of 
 violence, and the addition of de digito encreases 
 the dignity of the picture. 
 
 Thus one simple idea in itself will not affect 
 the mind of the reader so much as when it is 
 joined with others, and illustrated by several 
 collateral thoughts. The poverty of any one, 
 for instance, has nothing affecting in itself, till I 
 improve the idea by representing that he is a 
 man ; that he was not tnade poor by his own 
 fault ; that he is worthy of a better fate, and 
 that he may perhaps perish through hunger. — 
 The death of a father does not excite any emo- 
 tions, till I describe the forlornness of my pre- 
 sent situation, that I have lost my only friend, 
 my best defender ; and that my future destiny 
 is uncertain. 
 
 To introduce a sentiment, or a short saying, 
 which conveys some general trutli, and tends, 
 lit the same time, to illusuate the subject, con- 
 
 18 
 
1^8 
 
 tributes very much to dignity of style. Thus, 
 in praising the wisdom of Socrates, and his tem- 
 perance, ue might introduce this short senti- 
 ment : Now temperance is contented with a little. 
 Cicero often makes use of these instead of an 
 argument, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Though I had always that love for you, of which you 
 
 ourself had formed a just estimate, yet this late action of 
 
 yours has kindled in me that ardor of airoction, which nothing 
 
 can exceed : for believe ;we, there is nothing more engaging, 
 
 nothing more beautiful, nothing more amiable than virtue. 
 
 *2. Learn from me now, that an opportunity of informing 
 yourself first falls in your way, how many qualifications are re- 
 quired in the man who undertakes a puhlic accusation ! and if 
 you can with justice lay claim to any of them, I shall frankly 
 give up the point in debate; first, an unblemished innoceiut 
 and intei^rity : for nothing can be more absurd, than for a man 
 to call in question the life of another, who is unable to give 
 an account of his oicn. 
 
 It contributes also to dignity of style, to in- 
 troduce a fact or a thought, which is certain and 
 manifest, with certiim cst^ (juis nan videtj non in- 
 telligit ? Quern fugit ? Quis est qui nesciat ? and 
 these expressions, Sole clarius est, nemo negat, 
 quis est qui dubitat ? Constat inter omnes, ^-c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Who knows not that Hannibal was at last conquered by 
 Scipio ? 
 
 2. Who knows not that the qualities of the mind are much 
 more noble ll' ' -<• of the Iwdy ? 
 
 3. It is rr> ^ c. that nothing can be more prejudicial to 
 the mind and body, than indolence. 
 
 It sometimes adds vcrv much to the force of 
 
199 
 
 style to represent a thing which is future as pre- 
 sent, because it places it as it were before our 
 eyes : as, 
 
 And thus a very great tax will be laid upon 
 the land : 
 
 Sicque cigro, pergrande vectigal imponiiur. 
 
 EXAiMPLES. 
 
 1. If you continue this way of life, you will he miserable. 
 
 2. Will ye hesitate, Romans, to employ so favorable an op- 
 portunity, presented and put into your hands by the immortal 
 Gods, for the preservation and enlargement of your empire ? 
 Why do we not, when the Gods so clearly discover their plea- 
 sure, entrust likewise this royal war to the care of the man 
 who has already terminated so many others with the highest 
 advantage to the state ? 
 
 The use of interrogations and exclamations 
 tends also to give greater strength and vehe- 
 mence to the subject, when the thing of which 
 we speak is very certain, though it miaht have 
 l)een rendered by a simple assertion ; as, 
 
 Nothing is sweeter than literary ease : 
 
 Quid est dulcius otio literato ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. What can be sweeter in tlielife of man than friendship? 
 What shall yon find pleasanter than the study of literature ? 
 O happy they, in whom a happy disposition from nature is ac- 
 companied by the kindness and bounty of nature. 
 
 2. But ichere is the man that possesses or intleed can be 
 required to possess greater abilities in war ? 
 
 3. Who is so dull of comprehension as not to see ? Who 
 is so ignorant as not to perceive ? 
 
 4. Oh ! the excellence and beauty of virtue ! 
 
 5. Oh ! wretched man, if thou perceivest ! more wretched 
 if thou dost not perceive, that this is committed to History; 
 that this stands upon record x that no future age will ever for- 
 pet this fact. 
 
^inj 
 
 Where the idea conveys somotliing great, Ci- 
 cero freqiuiitly corrects himself in order to in- 
 troduce something still greater ; as, 
 
 Such an infatuation, or to speak more prop- 
 rly, such a madness possessed thee .... 
 
 Tantus igitur te stupor oppressit^ vely ut venus 
 dicam^ furor. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. You Iiave brought to Judgment not a thief ^ but a crmi" 
 won (J " ; not an aduherer^ but the idolater of chastity ; 
 not a \:ionH person J huiihe inveterate enemy of all sa- 
 cred and religious rites ; not a ruffian^ but a most savage 
 ^ utcherer^oi citizens and allies. 
 
 2. AVhat Charybdis so voracious ! Charyhdis did I say ? 
 If there ever was such a monster^ she was only a single one ' 
 The Oceanitsclf by Heavens, seems scarce capable of swal- 
 lowing up so much wealth, so widely scattered, and situated in 
 
 •> many distant places, in so short a space of time. 
 
 It dignifies the subject sometimes to make 
 some concessions, in such a manner that nothing 
 can follow from them against our argument; as. 
 
 Let us suppose that it is so, yet 
 
 Fingamus, ita esse, non tamen .... 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Let US grant that it is so, yet li does not follow from 
 this, that virtue does not aflbrd some consolation in misery. 
 
 2. Let them have been avaricious, let theui have been pas- 
 sionate and pertinacious, yet they must be allowed to have 
 been innocent of this crime ; of this mad and parricidal deed^ 
 and of many other charges brought against them. 
 
 It gives also dignity to a subject purposely to 
 pass over some arguments ; which is done ei- 
 ther by merely referring to them in a general 
 way, or by pretending that we shall pass them 
 
201 
 
 over, as unnecessary, though we lay much stress 
 upon them : as, 
 
 Therefore I shall pass over that first act of his 
 life, the most scandalous and the most flagitious : 
 
 Itaque primtim ilium actum istius vitce turpissi- 
 mum etfiagitiosissimum prcetermittam. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Suffer me, in this place, to suppress the mention of your 
 calamity : I designedly pass over many things, leaving it to 
 your own conjectures to inform you liow important the war is 
 like to prove. 
 
 2. I shall not therefore expatiate here on his great actions 
 at home and abroad, by sea and by land, with the unusual suc- 
 cess that has attended them ; a success so great, that not only 
 did his countrymen always concur with, his allies perform, and 
 his enemies submit to whatever he desired ; but even the winds 
 and waves seem to have been obsequious to his will. 
 
 3. Why should I publish his decrees, his rapaciousness, the 
 estates he bestowed, and these, which he violently seized ? 
 
 Words that convey some impressive or lofty 
 idea may sometimes be repeated ; as, 
 
 When a lav^ is proposed in behalf of our al- 
 lies, not to hear their complaints ! 
 
 Cum lex sociorum causa rogata sit, sociorum 
 causas non audire ! 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. \( tears avail nothing, why dost thou indulge them? say 
 tears, 
 
 2. If we profess the name of Christ, ought we not to imitate 
 his life ? 
 
 3. If the freedom of voting is given to the Roman people, in 
 bestowing the Consulship on whom they plejise, and even the 
 plebian is not deprived of the hope of arriving at the highest 
 honors, provided he is worthy of those honors, this common- 
 wealth cannot long exist. 
 
 * 18 
 
1'02 
 
 To tiiis may be rcrorred Ant'inptathesis, or an 
 iiivrrtod rcprtilion of the same words. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 . Those who wisli to appear learned to the ignorant, ap- 
 rant lo the IrarnefL 
 
 ^. A v.u do not seem to have conquered^ in order that you 
 might obtain a triumph^ but to have obtained a triuntjjh, be- 
 cause j/ou conquered. 
 
 :3. The rich province, which he had entered a beggar, he 
 left poor and deaolate^ himself being loaded toith riches ami 
 ffjjoils. 
 
 But what will chiefly contribute to give dig- 
 nity to the style, will be, not merely the use oi 
 phrases, but the change of languid into niort 
 forcible and dignified words, and sometimes, 
 w here the nature of the subject will admit of it, 
 the adoption of a word which has the force of 
 an hyperbole. 
 
 Thus, where haste i« implied, volare may be 
 used for ircj and advolare for venire. 
 
 To expose any one to danger, will be more 
 forcibly rendered by prodere. 
 
 To remove the terrors of the mind : depellere 
 terrores^ is more forcible than removere. 
 
 A man full of crimes : sceleribus coopertusy h 
 better than plcmis. 
 
 Obvcdlaius is stronger thani munitus, i-c. 
 
 As to the right disposition of words, in order 
 lo give greater force to the style, no certain rules 
 '*an be given, as it must depend oji the feeling? 
 
20S 
 
 and the ideas of the writer ; and sometimes the 
 word, on which tlie chief strength lies, must 
 precede, and sometimes must be thrown back ; 
 as, the Roman citizen, whom we have men- 
 tioned before, does not exclaim. Sum civis Ro- 
 manus^ but Civis Roinanus sum. — Gratce mihi 
 luce, literce faere. If there is an idea to which 
 we wish the attention of the hearer or reader to 
 be immediately directed, that ought to precede: 
 if on the contrary it is necessary to surprize ex- 
 pectation, tlien the most forcible Avord will be 
 thrown back to the last part of the sentence ; as 
 indeed it is most agreeable to nature to promise 
 little at the beginning, and to finish with tiie 
 greater force ; as, / 
 
 The cruel punishments, which he has inflict- 
 ed on Roman citizens, drive him headlong to 
 his fate ; some of whom he has unmercifully be- 
 headed, some he has murdered in their prisons, 
 and others, at the very moment that they pub- 
 licly appealed to their rights of liberty and citi- 
 zenship, he ignominiously suspended on the cross. 
 
CPAPTER VI. 
 
 OF THE STRUCTURE OF A PERIOD. 
 
 Constat enim ille ambitus et plena comprehensjo e quatuor 
 fere partibus, quae membra dicimus, ut et aures impleat, et 
 ne brevior sit, quam satis sit, neque longior. 
 
 As in the course of these exercises several al- 
 lusions have been made to the structure of a pe- 
 riod, in the rules for the arrangement and distri- 
 bution of the clauses of a sentence, and notice has 
 been taken of that Concinnitas, or Harmony, 
 which is so conducive to elegant composition, it 
 t^ ill now be necessary to introduce the scholar to 
 the knowledge of a finished period. Modern 
 languages indeed do not admit of that circuitous 
 circumscription (if we may be allowed the word) 
 which the Greek and Latin writers were at lib- 
 erty to use, and which constitutes in a great de- 
 gree the peculiar beauty and elegance of their 
 style. Though, at the same time, it must be ad- 
 mitted, that if every sentence \vas so studiously 
 labored, that each would form a perfect period, 
 the style would become little different from Me- 
 tre : for though Aristotle praises it as being \Ssioi 
 euwidrq X'Xi euupy:uovEi^o^, pleasing and ea- 
 sy to be learned and remembered, yet it should 
 also be mixed and diffused, and as Cicero says, 
 though it should be conformed to the rules of 
 
203r 
 
 liarmony, yet it will then please most, when art 
 is most disguised and least visible. 
 
 I shall therefore give as correct a definition a!$ 
 I can of a period, that by observing the care the 
 ancients bestowed upon it, the scholar may see 
 the necessity of giving as much attention as pos- 
 sible to the rules, which they have left us, in or- 
 <ier to acquire a good Latin style. It will be of 
 great consequence to understand the nature of 
 it, in order that he may be enabled to connect 
 and vary the different parts of a period, and may 
 at pleasure bestow upon his style the perspicuity, 
 copiousness, and dignity, of which his subject 
 will admit. For according to Quintilian's idea, 
 you may have a very ingenious plan, and good 
 materials for raising the edifice, yet if the skill 
 of the architect is not displayed in the use and 
 disposition of them, the building will only ex- 
 hibit a confused and irregular mass. 
 
 Cicero says, Qtiinam igititr dicendi est modus 
 melior^ quam tit Latine^ ut plane^ ut ornate^ ut ad 
 id, quodcmique agetur, apte congruenterqxie dica- 
 mus. These rules which he gives for the direc- 
 tion of the orator, may with equal propriety be 
 applied to the Latin writer. Tlie first requisite 
 for elegant composition is good Latinity, or a 
 choice of such words* and expressions as were in 
 genergil use among the best Latin writers. The 
 next tiling necessary to be considered, is such an 
 arrangement and position of words as may ren- 
 der the sense intelligible, and produce perspi- 
 cuity, the true parent of elegance, without which. 
 ihe most studied selection of phrases will only 
 
206 
 
 create a confused chaos of unintelligible words* 
 But in order to effect this, the arrangement must 
 assume the form of a period, with its proper 
 members and proportions: not, however, that 
 the sentence is to be extended or overcharged 
 with unnecessary matter, merely for the sake of 
 completing the exact parts and dimensions of a 
 just period. What is observed by the apte and 
 congruenter is such an agreement of the words 
 and ideas to the subject, that a proper connexion 
 and correspondence may be maintained between 
 the parts and the body, so as to form a perfect 
 whole. Since a period is effected by a dissec- 
 tion of a primary sentence or proposition, by 
 means of clauses that tend to explain, to define, 
 to denote the cause, time or place of the subject, 
 it is necessary that they should be inserted apte^ 
 that is after that w ord, to which they properly 
 belong : as we should say, ego librum^ quia pul- 
 cker est^ non vendam ; and not ego^ quia pulcher 
 est^ non vendam librum: which proves also 
 what we have already observed, that those clau- 
 ses, beginning by quia, licet, quiim, quamvis, ubiy 
 qui, ^^c. when introduced for the sake of a peri- 
 od, are not to begin the sentence, otherwise they 
 could not be said to form a circuit, or period, 
 but they must come after the nominative or some 
 other word. And when some practice and exer- 
 cise have been bestowed upon the composition 
 of a period, with the observance of its most prom- 
 inent and distinguishing rules, it will spontane- 
 ously acquire a coherrence of the parts, and will 
 as it were, perform its stated revolutions, with 
 perfect regularity, at the same time without that 
 
207 
 
 strict and labored minuteness, which would only 
 render the style stiff and puerile. 
 
 Aristotle defines a period thus : Xfj/o & TtepioSoi^ 
 ?J^iv "exovaav a^x^ '^^ t^'k^vrtr^v avTrymff avrr^ 
 xoLL (.leycdog evcvvonrov. It is a sentence, which 
 runs on circuitously through several parts 
 or members, till it arrives at its perfect conclu- 
 sion. The beginning and the end, or the nom- 
 inative and the verb, are divided by the inser- 
 tion of other clauses, tending to explain and de- 
 fine the subject, but at the same time so con- 
 nected by the grammatical structure, that tliiB 
 reader sees plainly that he is not yet arrived at 
 the conclusion till he has found those things in- 
 troduced and expressed, which the first words 
 gave him reason to expect. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 The Roman youth, havinc: at length recovered from their 
 eonsternatioii, when the light re-appeared cahii and serene af- 
 ter so violent a hurricane, yet observing the royal seat empty, 
 though they gave some credit to the assertion of the Patricians, 
 who had stood near it, that he had been caught^jp, and carried 
 aloft by the storm, maintained for a time a sorroirful silence^ 
 Struck as it were with a dread of their forlorn situation. 
 
 The first feature or character of a period then 
 is a circuit, since without these secondary or in- 
 tervening parts, it would remain a simple pri- 
 mary idea or proposition. For instance : When 
 Sallust says, Concordia parvce res crescnnt ; Dis- 
 cordid maximce dilabuniur^ that is not a period, 
 because each member is separately understood. 
 But if we WQiv to say, Quemadmodum concordid 
 parvce res crescunty ila discordWi etiam maximce di- 
 
208 
 
 lahuntur^ it would then nearly form a period, 
 since die sense would not be discovered before 
 the completion q( the sentence. Still however 
 this example, strictly speaking does not give a 
 precise illustration of a period, as diere is no 
 intervening member; but it server merely to 
 show the suspension of the sense till the sentence 
 is complete. In order to constitute a complete 
 period, or circuit, the sentence must as it were 
 be intersected by the insertion of one or more 
 intervening clauses or members ; as in this ex- 
 ample ; 
 
 But T. Veturius and Sp. Postumius, in their 
 second consulship, because, after their ill suc- 
 cess at Caudium, our legions having passed un- 
 der the yoke, they had agreed to make peace 
 with the Samnites, were surrendered up to them. 
 At verb T. Veturius et Sp. Postumius, cum ite- 
 rum consules esscnt, quia, cum male pus^natum 
 apud Caudium essct, legionibus nostrissub jugum 
 missis, pacemcum Samnitibus fecerant, deditisunt 
 his. In this sentence the primary idea is, T. 
 Veturius et Sp. Postumius dediti smit his, w hich 
 is divided by the clause or circuit expressing the 
 cause, quia pacem cum Samnitibusfecerant ; and 
 this again is intersected by two other clauses in- 
 dicating the time, cum malt pugnatum apud Cau- 
 dium esset, and legio7iibus nosiris sub jugum mis- 
 sis. 
 
 The least attention will easily discover the 
 beauty of such a period, and how essentially n( 
 cessary the insertion of these circuitous or inter- 
 mediate clauses is to elegance of style. 
 
209 
 
 1 shall here subjoin a few examples, to show 
 how from a simple, a compound sentence may 
 be formed, consisting of two, three or four mem- 
 bers, each member corresponding and contribu- 
 ting to the whole. 
 
 Let the simple proposition be, 
 
 That Alexander by living temperately, would 
 have acquired the veneration of posterity. 
 
 If you wish to extend this sentence by mak- 
 ing it to consist of two members, say, 
 
 Alexander, if he had lived temperately. 
 Would have acquired the veneration of posterity. 
 Three members : 
 
 If Alexander, as much as he excelled other 
 commanders in warlike bravery. 
 
 Had also surpassed them in the virtue of tem- 
 perance. 
 
 He w ould have acquired the highest venera- 
 lion of posterity. 
 
 Four members : 
 
 If as much as Alexander excelled other com- 
 manders in warlike bravery, 
 
 He had surpassed them also in the virtue of 
 temperance. 
 
 He would not less have commanded the ven- 
 eration of posterity. 
 
 Than he did the love, the admiration, and 
 the absolute subjection of his own people. 
 Four members : 
 
 If unfortunately impudence had the same in- 
 fluence in the senate and at the bar, 
 
 As open and daring violence prevails in the 
 fields and solitary places ; 
 
210 
 
 My client would not less be obliged to sub- 
 niit to the cflrontery of his adversary in defend- 
 ing his cause, 
 
 Than in the commission of that injury he 
 found himself inferior to him in bold and dar- 
 
 ing courage. 
 
 T\v o members : 
 
 I felt the most earnest desire to be at Rome, 
 for many reasons : 
 
 Chiefly that when candidate for the Consu- 
 late, and during my administration, I might give 
 you proofs of that good will, which I owe you. 
 Three members : 
 
 For myself, at least, the considerations I now 
 lay before you have had so happy an effect on 
 my own mind, 
 
 As not only to reconcile me to all the incon- 
 veniences of old age, 
 
 But to render it even an agreeable state to me. 
 
 The distribution of a period into its parts will 
 become very easy to the scholar, where the sub- 
 ject itself supplies him with the particles^ieces- 
 sary to form the connexion, as those that denote 
 Ji cause, condition, relation, opposition and com- 
 parison, or that tend to explain or define it : as, 
 Qsium^ quia^ si, (juodsi, fjuamvisj ut, qui^ and its 
 compounds, aut^ velj ubi, ^c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. ^ 
 
 The simple proposition is, 
 I have sent you the promised book. 
 By adding the cause, the period becomes bi- 
 mcmbris. 
 
 Because you have postponed your coming, — I 
 end you the book I promised. 
 
211 
 
 Comj)arison : 
 
 For as storms and liiiri icanes recommend and 
 enhance the calm and temperature of the seas 
 and of the skies, 
 
 So we may be allowed to suppose, that your 
 former tumults and troubles arose merely to give 
 a greater zest and favor to your present tran- 
 quility. 
 
 Condition : 
 
 If WQ had not on our private account many 
 and just motives for the friendship subsisting be- 
 tween us, 
 
 I would retrace the first origin of our intima- 
 cy from the happy intercourse existing between 
 our parents. 
 
 This last might easily be extended to three 
 members : 
 
 If we had not on our private account many 
 and just motives for the friendship subsisting be- 
 tween us. 
 
 Which a mutvial exchange of good oflicesfrom 
 our earliest years has so happily confirmed ; 
 
 I would retrace the first origin of our intima- 
 cy from the friendly intercourse existing bct\veen 
 our parents. 
 
 Concession : 
 
 Though I could not but receive the highest 
 satisfaction from the glory of my dear friend Do- 
 labella, 
 
 And it filled me with the most lively joy and 
 pleasure on his account. 
 
 Yet I cannot but confess that I feel my heart 
 most sensiblv afifected. 
 
212 
 
 That in the opinion of the people I am asso- 
 ciated with you in the participation of your 
 praises. 
 
 Interrogation : 
 And now, among the different sentiments of 
 the philosophers concerning the consequence of 
 our final dissolution, 
 May I not venture to declare what are my own : 
 
 The relative qiii^ quce^ quod^ Avith its com- 
 pounds, followed by is, talis, iantiis, ^. 
 
 It is not fit that any credit should be given to 
 those men, 
 
 Who appear to speak with too much vehe- 
 mence for their own emolument. 
 
 But it must be most attentively considered 
 by those, who have the care of education. 
 
 What is the particular bent and disposition of 
 those, whom they instruct. — (Three members 
 may easily be effected here by beginning widi 
 the relative who.) 
 
 Who then can censure, or injustice be angr} 
 with me. 
 
 If those hours, which others employ in busi- 
 jiess, in pleasures, in celebrating public solemni- 
 ties, in refreshing the body and unbending the 
 mind ; 
 
 If the time, which is spent by some in mid- 
 night banquctings, in diversions and in gaminp 
 
 I myself employ in reviewing and reti'acin;^ 
 diosc studies ? 
 
 Ut, qncmadmodum, sicut, ^c. followed by sir 
 qiianqitam, followed by tamcn, ^c. 
 
21S //f 
 
 /\^ 
 
 Beware, citizens, beware 16^1, as it was glori- 
 ous for them to transmit so extensive an empire 
 to posterity, 
 
 Your inability to preserve and defend it prove 
 not infamous for you. 
 
 Though this past behavior of thine was be- 
 yond all patience, 
 
 Yet have I borne with it as I could. 
 
 The structure of a period will be easily under- 
 stood from these examples ; but as some difficul- 
 ty will arise, where the simple idea does not im- 
 mediately supply materials for the formation oi 
 the period ; and as nothing contributes more to 
 the true elegance of style, I shall give a few gen- 
 eral rules, which, as far as it can be done, will 
 enable the scholar to find out the necessary clau- 
 ses or members proper to be inserted. In con- 
 sidering a simple proposition, which you wish to 
 extend, and distribute into the parts of a period, 
 it will be easy to discover whether it includes the 
 idea of cause, condition, concession, time, place, 
 &c. and may with propriety admit the insertion 
 of the particles mentioned above, proper to ex- 
 press that idea. Suppose the subject is, the De- 
 struction of Corinth. The first idea that arises 
 is the simple fact that L. Muramius overthrew 
 Corinth. A scholar, therefore, in order to give 
 it the first requisite mentioned by Cicero, the 
 Lalim, would say, L. Mummius Connihum fun- 
 (lit lis delevit. But if he wished to give it the 
 form of a more finished period, the question 
 might be started. Why he did it : what reasons 
 
 19* 
 
2X4 
 
 could influence the Roman commander to dc 
 stro}^ that ciiy, at that time (he celebrated seat 
 of arts. Tfiis (lucstion bcin^ resolved, will im- 
 mediately give the sentence the form and suuc- 
 ture of a period. 
 
 L. x'lummius, becavse he himself was very 
 igUimiLt of the liberal arts, 
 Ovr-rtiirew Corinth with unparalleled barbarity. 
 And by dwelling a little more on the circnm- 
 stauce of the overthrow, the consideration that 
 this famous city .was the seat of the arts, ma} 
 ?j:ive another member, and indeed more orna- 
 ment to the period. 
 
 L. Mummius, being himself very ignorant 
 and illiterate, 
 
 roved, with the most unparalleled bar- 
 the famous city, Corinth, 
 V ,.ich was, as it were, the eye, and the parent 
 of Greece. 
 
 Tiius an additional clause explanatory of the 
 subject, or denoting concession, &:c. may very 
 easily be found out : as, 
 
 Industry without genius is of very little use; 
 It will soon occur to the mind, that industry is 
 very commendable, and that will form a period- 
 Industry, though in itself very cominendable, 
 Is of little use without the help of genius. Or, 
 iiulustry, 2/ it is, or ichich is, without genius, &c. 
 
 There arc other methods of giving to a simple 
 '-' **''vx* the form of a period, which are more 
 - I . and which use will soon render famiHar 
 i«nd easy ; as by changing one word into anotft 
 
2lij 
 
 er. liius an adjective or a participle might he 
 changed into qici^ ^c. A fortunate unhoped-for 
 hour will. arrive; say, i(;/uc/t shall not be hoped 
 for. Propter^ ob, may be changed into quiaj 
 cum^ ^c. All men respect your brother for his 
 great learning, say, because he is endowed with 
 learning. This might indeed be effected by us- 
 ing a periphrasis, or any kind of circumlocution: 
 In the structure, however, of a period, let it be 
 repeated, that great care must be taken that the 
 aptt and congruenter mentioned by Cicero, be 
 diligently observed, that the adoption of addi- 
 tional clauses be appropriate and illustrative of 
 the subject, and that they do not extend beyond 
 four members : Pulcherrima enim est ilia Perio- 
 dus^ qucB membris quatuor absohiticr, ut q\i(B ani- 
 onum suspendat^ et aures impleat ; for though ma- 
 ny ancient writers have transgressed this rule, 
 that transgression only renders the sentences too 
 fatigueing or obscure. Long sentences of that 
 kind have been denominated Ttvevuara^ which 
 might, and rcxcTr^tg, those that could not, be prp- 
 nounced in one breath. 
 
 0F PROSE-MEASURE OR HARMONY. 
 
 TO what has been said concerning the strue- 
 uire of the period, it will not be unnecessary to 
 add a few observations concerning the harmo- 
 ny of prose, or that measured equality of num- 
 bers and exact proportion of parts, which forms 
 ^ great a part of a finished period, or rather 
 which seems naturally to arise from its forma- 
 
lion. This (xerpov^ or ratio pedum, ^ which Quin- 
 tilian pronounces to be even more diflicult in 
 prose than in verse, and to which Cicero attiib- 
 utes an incredible force, is more easily felt than 
 explained, and rests more upon the judgment of 
 the cars, than upon any rules of art. Why, for 
 instance, in the structure of a period, when tlie 
 sense is completed, does there sometimes seem 
 something wanting ? As in, Neminem vestrum 
 ignorarcj arbitror, judices, hunc per hosce dies ser-- 
 monem vulgi^ atque hanc opinionem populi Roma- 
 nifuisse. Why hosce instead of hos ? Why did 
 not the sentence end at sermonem vulgi fuisse^ 
 when the sense admitted it ? Merely because 
 the period is better rounded and finished, and 
 pleases the car better. And indeed Cicero, and 
 many of the ancient writers, bestowed so much 
 attention on the composition of their sentences, 
 that they observed that Concinnitas, not merely 
 hi the principal members of the period, but even 
 in the other subdivisions of those members, 
 which they call incisUj commata, and those arti- 
 ficial stops, which a nice observer will easily dis- 
 tinguish, and which depend upon the respira- 
 tion: As in the reading of this line, Animadver- 
 ti^judices — omnem accusatoris orationem — in du- 
 os — divisam esse partes. Here it is easy to ob- 
 serve that Concinnitas in each word tha't forms 
 the '' ' Some of these clausula' miji;ht ap- 
 pea. .* ij :amc, if suffered to end too abruptly, 
 though the sense might permit it ; but when 
 they are taken up and supported by other words 
 that follow , the course of the sentence become*? 
 
217 
 
 dear and smooth, as, Non vult, P. R. ohsoletii> 
 Cfimimbus accusari J^errem : It is easy to ob- 
 serve a harshness in this conclusion, but this is 
 corrected by the continuation, nova postulate in- 
 midita desiderata which completes the sentence. 
 
 This harmony of numbers may be defined, a 
 certain measure or part of any thing, as of a sen- 
 tence, made equal to the other parts, each to 
 each : As in poetical numbers, tlie feet are equal 
 to each other ; the two short syllables, for in- 
 stance, of a dactyl being equal in time to the 
 long syllable of the spondee, the dactyl and the 
 spondee are equal to each other. This measur- 
 ed equality, or proportion of parts, being con- 
 nected together, and answering to one another, 
 contributes indeed greatly to perspicuity and 
 smoothness of style. But to be too sohcitous on 
 this subject, would be a foolish and supersti- 
 tious adherence to rules, wliich might often sac- 
 rifice the sense to the wish of pleasing the ear. 
 For it must be observed in the construction of 
 these harmonic numbers, that the sense and the 
 subject must afford materials for it, and then it 
 may be easily effected by variation and copious- 
 ness. Nor is it necesary to mention w hat feet 
 and what measure are most adapted to create 
 harmony, but merely that it is their proper dis- 
 position, which produces it, and briefly to state 
 that long syllables have more weight and au- 
 thority, and render sentences more dignified, 
 but may also tend to make them too heavy : 
 that short syllables have more rapidity, and thus 
 by being properly mixed with the long, make 
 
2U 
 
 the sentences run smoothly. But it uouUl be 
 wrong to study too much precision in these 
 things, for though the sentence may ha\ e its 
 members, it is not to have a regular quantity : 
 nor is it necessary to observe that minuteness, 
 which some recommend, of noun answering to 
 noun, and even syllable to syllable ; but that 
 there should be some equality preserved between 
 each member of the period ; with this excep- 
 tion, that if there is a difference, the sentence 
 should rise by a kind of climax, and that the 
 last member should be longer than the prece- 
 ding. For this reason, Quintilian recommends 
 that more attention should be paid to the end- 
 ing o^ the sentence, that it may leave a good 
 impression upon the reader or hearer, as that is 
 the place where he is, as it were, to breathe and 
 refresh himself before he enters upon the next 
 sentence : And therefore Cicero prefers, for the 
 ending, a ditrochee [-vj-u] as c&mprohavit^ or a 
 j)aeon tertius [uu-u] esse mdmtur : this last he 
 also assigns to the beginning of a sentence ; and 
 chiefly the dochimus, which consists of the bac- 
 
 chic and iambic ]}> ^'-"]j ^^ ^^ ^^^^ iambic 
 
 and crctic [u u— ] Servare qiuim plunmos; 
 
 as it would be wrong to say, Pater, postquam 
 liter as ad te missas legerat, et se rescript urum esse 
 promiserat^obiit. There is here an evident inequal- 
 ity between the last member of the sentence and 
 the two preceding, which may be easily correct- 
 ed by lengthening the last, obiit, and saying, 
 pradr.r ovminm obiit opinionem. 
 
 Wi)<u lias been said concerning numbers may 
 
219 
 
 be further illustrated. When 1 say, Nemo p^- 
 testy sine hibore^ ad doctrinani accedere. Here 
 the two nouns, tabore and doctmiam, answer to 
 each other. But if I say Nemo potest ^ sine laboris 
 assiduitate ad doctrinam accedere ^ the tw o members 
 will be unequal ; and therefore I would add, ne- 
 mo potest, sine laboris assiduitate, ad doctrincB 
 suavitatem accedere. Here is a complete harmo- 
 ny of numbers. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. What Caius studied to do through love, that Titius tried 
 to prevent through hatred, (Render the first member unequal 
 by the addition of another word ; induced by his love, for in- 
 stance, and you will see the necessity of having also a partici- 
 ple to answer it in the last member, and to say, Titius impelled 
 by his hatred,) 
 
 2. For who will grant you that mankind, dispersed at first 
 in the uoods and mountains, sheltered themselves within the 
 walls of towns, more by the advice of the prudent, than the 
 oratory of the eloquent? — Here the opposition will be, in the 
 members of the sentence, between the advice of the prudentf 
 and the oratory of the eloquent, which answer to each other. 
 But make it each a member of three words, instead of two, 
 and you must add a participle to each, applicable to the idea 
 of each member, and to agree with mankind. 
 
 3. For this, my lords, is not a w ritten but an innate law — 
 we have not been taught it by the learned, we have not re- 
 ceived it from our ancestors, we have not taken it from books ; 
 but it is derived from, it is forced upon us by nature, and stam- 
 ped in indelible characters upon our very frame. It was not 
 conveyed to us by instruction, but wrought into our constitu- 
 tion; it is the dictate, not of education, but instinct, that if our 
 lives should be at anytime in danger from concealed or more open 
 assaults of robbers or private enemies, every honourable meth- 
 od should be taken for our security. Here the opposition will 
 be seen to be equally supported between written and innate ; 
 and the three next members will be equally answered by the 
 three that relate to nature : and the same opposition in the three 
 diflereut members continued to the end. 
 
220 
 
 4. It certainly was tlie custom o( the Pythagoreans, botli 
 when they awoke, to rouse their minds by the sound of the 
 lyre, that they might be more ready to act : and when they 
 composed themselves to rest, to lull their minds by tlie same 
 sound, that they might hush such perturbed ideas as might har- 
 rass them. 
 
 5. Bui in Herodotus, as in my opinion, every thing flows 
 smoothly, so the dialect itself has such a sweetness, that it 
 seems even to possess concealed numbers. 
 
 In short, where a division or an expression in 
 English is shorter than the other, the harmony, 
 as has been said above, may be effected by varia- 
 tion, or copiousness, by adding a word, as a noun 
 or a verb, or by a phrase instead of a word ; As 
 for. What your crueky has done, I will not do. 
 Here the disproportion is very discernible, but it 
 may be rendered, my humanity will not do. The 
 observance of this is not strictly necessary in tii- 
 fling and common subjects, as epistles, but in 
 graver subjects, which command more attention, 
 as in orations, &c. it is very requisite. 
 
 More examples might be produced to illustrate 
 this subject ; but these will suffice. These rules 
 I have given, not to be followed too servilely by 
 the scholar, for that could not fail to render his 
 style forced and full of affectation ; but merely 
 to show the ease, with which he might, with a 
 little care and study, acquire this harmony. I 
 shall only add, that it should not appear to bc^ 
 sought and studied, but to flow spontaneously, 
 from the structure of the periods, and from the 
 sentences themselves, if we thoroughly undei 
 stuud them, and feel their force. 
 
221 
 
 CPAPTER VII. 
 
 r PKRSPICUITY AND THE STRUCTURT: OFTHEMKS. 
 
 Nobis prima sit virtus perspicuitas, propria verba, rectus ordo, 
 non in longum dilata conclusio, nihil neque desit, neque su- 
 perfluat. Ita sermo et doctis probabilis, et planus imperi- 
 tis erit. Haec est eloquendi observatio. — Quint. 
 
 vcuiNTiLiAN has here comprised, in very few 
 words, the most essential requisites of perspicuity. 
 Nothing renders the style more perspicuous than 
 the selection of pertinent and appropriate words : 
 and though we have already taken notice of 
 this, yet it will not be unnecessary in this part to 
 repeat that not only must our ideas be clearly 
 arranged, but the words must correspond with 
 the greatest propriety to each idea. 
 
 When the scholar is able to determine the true 
 Latinity of words, a selection of which, a dili- 
 gent reading of the authors of the Augustan age 
 will greatly facilitate ; (and it must not be for- 
 gotten, that all English idioms, foreign express- 
 ions, grecisms, words of doubtful authority, and 
 ambiguous meaning, are to be carefully avoid- 
 ed) his first care will be to attend to the ct^njunc- 
 tion and suitableness of each ; that the verb for 
 instance be appropriate and answerable to the 
 substantive : thus, a tvaywas taken aivayfrom me, 
 or given me. We should not say, vice mi hi sunt erep- 
 tce^ but occlusce^ obseptce : nor datce, but pattfaQ- 
 
 20 
 
222 
 
 /«, apertcB^ ^-c. We cannot say, accipere gradum 
 honoris, but ad honoris gradiun ascendere or per- 
 venire. We should not say, naufragium pad, but 
 tacere ; nor damnum pati^ hutfacere, accipere ; not 
 pcenas accipere^ but dare, lucre, persolvere. 
 
 Thus also many Roman phrases, though deriv- 
 ed from their own customs, must be preserved ; 
 as we say, dictatorem dicere, because the Consul 
 alone created him ; we say legem f err e, because 
 it was caiTied to the people for their approba- 
 tion, and then legem jubere or sciscere, because 
 the people alone had the power to order it to be 
 ratified. 
 
 In the use of adverbs also, care must be taken 
 that they be suitable to the verbs, to which they 
 are joined : as we should say enixt rogare, not 
 ohnixe ; facile pati, not libenter, for no one receiA es 
 pleasure in suffering. The same rule may be 
 applied to substantives and adjectives. Acljec- 
 tives must, in their meaning, strictly correspond 
 to the idea conveyed by the substantive : w e 
 hould not say sapiens consilium, but honum or 
 jidtle, for wisdom belongs strictly to men and 
 not to the counsel; and, accurately speaking, 
 we should not say prudens consilium, but pru- 
 dentis viri consilium; nor can we s^ay bona ant 
 mala conscientia ; it is only what we are con- 
 -. lous of, that can be good or bad ; therefore we 
 ou^ht to say conscientia rccte vel malt actonwi. 
 Speaking of the stature of a man, we should not 
 say magnus vir, but procerus ; for magnus refers 
 to his virtues or actions. And with a little con- 
 sideration also, it will be easy to discover the 
 
238 
 
 mie force and meaning of a word, whether it is 
 taken in a metaphorical or literal sense : as finis 
 used for consilium ; we should not say bo7ius, 
 egregiiiSj but we may say certus^felix ; we should 
 not say materna lingua^ but vemacula. 
 
 Such and so many adjectives must also be 
 joined to the substantives, as will tend to define 
 their proper attributes and qualities, and thus il- 
 lustrate the whole subject. Speaking of benefits, 
 we shall find that number and greatness, being 
 the attributes of benefits, we may say, mnlta et 
 magna benejicia ; as, we ought to love God, 
 not on account of his benefits merely, but on ac- 
 count of his many and great benefits : and here, 
 if we wished to join some adjectives to GW, we 
 should find that the attributes of God, more 
 particularly applicable to the idea of this sen- 
 tence, are his liberality and his mercy ; there- 
 fore we may say, Deiim liberaUssimum ct benig- 
 nissimum. 
 
 Or, instead of an adjective, if we wish to de- 
 fine more clearly any one substantive, and to 
 give greater elegance and perspicuity to the sub- 
 ject, another substantive, denoting the quality, 
 the property, or the cause of the former, is oft- 
 en added, and then the first substantive, or pro- 
 noun /7/e, ^'C. is put in the genitive. Thus, Cic- 
 ero desiring the historian Lucceius to celebrate 
 his actions in his writings, tells him that he wishes 
 to enjoy the benefit of his testimony^ benevolence 
 and genius, But because the testimony of Luc- 
 ceius will have great weight among his readers, 
 he says^ auctoriiate testimonii : the testimony of 
 
2U 
 
 the historian will be a certain proof of his be- 
 jQevoIence, he says, mdicio benevolentite : and be- 
 cause the genius of an eminent and elegant wri- 
 ter conveys great pleasure and satisfaction to 
 the reader, he says, suavitate tngenii. 
 
 As : Though 1 had always wished most ard- 
 ently to see your writings, yet they gi-eatly ex- 
 ceeded my fondest expectations ; and I was so 
 charmed and enraptured with them, that I 
 quickly formed a wish to have the memorial of 
 my actions engraved on such lasting monuments. 
 Nor were my views carried merely to the hope 
 of living for ever in the annals of posterity, but 
 also to the desire of having the full enjoyment, 
 during my own life, of your testimony^ your be- 
 nevolence and your genius. 
 
 The army being drawn up, rather according 
 to the j)lace^ the decHvity of the hill, and accord- 
 ing to the time, than agreeable to order and the 
 rules of w ar, the legions were forced to engage 
 separately, some in one place, some in another 
 — (Here, nature of the place, and necessity of the 
 time, may be supplied.) 
 
 The peculiar beauty of Terence is elegance 
 vnd perspicuity. In the following passage, for 
 instance, Simo will be found to deliver himsell 
 in simple and appropriate language. It is et 
 doctis prohabilis, et planus imperttis. 
 
 Si sensero hodie quicquam in his te nuptiis 
 
 Fallacice conari, quo f ant minus, 
 
 4ut velle in ed re ostendere quam sis callidus : 
 
!':::[> 
 
 Verberibus ctesmuj ie inpisirinum^ Davc^ declam 
 usque ad necem ; 
 
 Ed lege atque omine ut^ si te inde cxemcrim^ 
 ego pro te molam. 
 
 Care must also be taken, that the order of the 
 words be Just and clear, that the members of the 
 sentence be not too prolix, that they be not 
 drawn out into superfluous divisions and subdi- 
 visions, w^hicli would only render the style ob- 
 scure and confused, and might perhaps answer 
 the purpose of that master in Quintilian, who 
 exhorted his scholars to study obscurity, and 
 who often used to exclaim, Tanto melius, ipse 
 91071 intelligo ; but would make the style neither 
 intelligible nor elegant. This Period of Pliny, 
 on the contrary, shows, that by avoiding any 
 unnecessary dilatation of the members, great 
 perspicuity may be given to the sentence : 
 
 Ut enim cruduyn vidnus medentiwn mamis re- 
 formidat, 
 
 Deiiide patitur, atque uliru rci/ui/it ; 
 
 Sic rccens animi dolor consolationes rejint nr 
 refugit, 
 
 Mox desiderata et clementer admotis adquicscit. 
 
 As therefore what we write or speak is with a 
 V iew to be understood, and to attract the atten- 
 tion of our readers or hearers, so perspicuity 
 must be regarded as the primary excellence of 
 language. But perspicuity does not merely re- 
 late to words, but also to arguments, and to a 
 nice and accurate arrangement of them ; in such 
 a manner that the sense may be perceived at 
 once, and that nothing be left to conjecture ; an 
 
 20* 
 
226 
 
 error which young beginners usually comniii. 
 who studying either too much copiousness or an 
 affectation of stvle, are liable to fall into obscuri- 
 ty : as they are apt to think beauty and difiuit} 
 of style consist hi the selection of fine words 
 and expressions, which are seldom used. But 
 dignity itself, as we have already seen, dej>ends 
 not so much on the w^ords as on the idea ; as, 
 what words can be more familiar and simple, 
 and at the same time moi'e sublime and digni- 
 fied than these : God said^ let there be lights and 
 there was light. 
 
 In naming the princijial sources of perspicui- 
 ty, we may mention causes, or argiuncnts, ex- 
 •imples, testimonies and comparisons; and as a 
 Theme, which is given and intended as a mod- 
 el or specimen not merely of perspicuity and el- 
 egant style, but of close and accurate reasoning 
 is generally distributed into these several parts o; 
 divisions, it may not be improper to lay down 
 a few rules, which may render its composition 
 more easy to the scholar : and indeed it must 
 have often been observed that boys may ha\ ( 
 accjuired a great readiness in writing good Lai 
 in, and may possess a kind of mechanical facili- 
 ty in versification, who will at the same time 
 entertain an almost invincible dread of Themes, 
 and who v\ ill not be abh* to venture alone on 
 this unpleasant task without the constant aid 
 ;ind particidar direction of the teacher. 
 
 It would seem almost unnecessary to observr 
 that when the ThcNis, or suJiJect, is given, the 
 sr]»(»lnr mu^t not <^it down an<! commit to pnnei* 
 
227 
 
 the first thought that arises in his mind. He 
 must not begin to write before he is fully ac- 
 quainted with the whole scope, and the differ- 
 ent bearings of his subject : before he has fully 
 weighed, maturely considered, and carefully, 
 compared with each other, the arguments u])on 
 wiiich the truth of his Thesis is to be establish- 
 ed. But above all, he must attend to the con- 
 nexion as well of the arginnents as of each par- 
 ticular sentence. Not only before he sits down 
 to writing ought he to consider this connexion 
 well, as far as it regards the w^iolc subject, but 
 also when he has committed to paper one or 
 two arguments, and adjusted together one part 
 of his materials, he must read over and examine 
 each sentence, to see whether the dependency 
 and relation of the parts is regular, and proper- 
 ly maintained : and even after the whole is fin- 
 ished, it should be well reconsidered, since what 
 appeared suitable and apparent at first, may not 
 upon a second review, appear equally so. 
 
 OF THE STRUCTURE OF THEMES. 
 
 Themes are nearly the same as what are call- 
 ed Onitiones Umbraticce^ or Linh(jLaxa7.Lxov. Their 
 business is to prove and to please. When the 
 Thesis, or subject, is given, the first considera- 
 tion will be to find out from what field of know 1- 
 edgCj and from w^hat sources, the whole appa- 
 ratus of proofs and arguments, is to be sought. 
 Speaking, for instance, of liberty, the Histories 
 of Greece and Rome would find an ample field 
 
228 
 
 ©f knowledge, from which araumenls might be 
 drawn. 
 
 Some \\ rJters have given its a number of cir- 
 cumstances as a kind of chie to direct us. They 
 ay, and not inaptly, that the whole invention 
 may be derived from all, or most of these seve- 
 ral points or circumstances : fHio and What ? 
 Where ? By what means and helps ? Why ? 
 How ? When f 
 
 Suppose the subject given is, ' Death ought 
 not to be feared P It will at first sight appear 
 that the whole apparatus of arguments is to be 
 derived from the history and exj)erience of man- 
 kind. The circumstance, Who? and What? 
 will suggest the idea, that all men are subject to 
 it : and here the question might be started, — 
 Why are all men subject to it ? The answer is, 
 Oa account of the structure of the human body. 
 But in the arrangement of these arguments, 
 there should be so intimate a connexion be- 
 tween them and the Thesis, that the illustra- 
 tion of each may visibly establish the truth of 
 the subject, which is proved by the conclusion. 
 Death is not to be feared. Why ? Because all men 
 are subject to it : which is confirmed by two 
 reasons, daily experience and the structure ofthr 
 body. Hence I conclude, if all men arc subject 
 toit^ f ous;ht not to fear it. How does that fol- 
 low ? — Why should a loise man fear that ichich 
 cannot be avoided ? Another and a posterior 
 cause may be given. It is the way to eternal hap- 
 piness. Is this true ? Yes. The Scriptures teach 
 it. — Then 1 conclude if death is the way to eter- 
 
229 
 
 nal happiness^ why should I fear that^ which leads 
 me to a better place ^ than that in which I live ? 
 
 Thus in writing upon any given subject, it 
 will be very easy to carry in our memory this 
 short clue of circumstances, and it will soon oc- 
 cur to us, what must answer to all or any one 
 of them. When, therefore, the scholar has fur- 
 nished himself with a sufficient apparatus of ma- 
 terials and arguments, the next business will be 
 to arrange them in their proper order, and to 
 distribute them into distinct parts or divisions. 
 
 The first part of which the Theme is com- 
 posed, is the Proposition, or the Premises, from 
 which the subject sets out, in which a general 
 view of the question is given, by amplifying or 
 explaining it more at large, or by the assertion 
 of some other principle closely connected with, 
 or easily referable to the main subject. The 
 next is the Ratio Probans, or what is called 
 by some the jEtiologia, in which we prove the 
 truth of the Theme, by some reason or argu- 
 ment. Thus the whole must assume the form 
 of a just and close reasoning. 
 
 In aid of this, will be introduced as another 
 division, the Confirmatio, which is generally a 
 common place or moral thought, which de- 
 monstrates the subject, or by inverting it,, or 
 showing the unreasonableness of a conti'ary o- 
 pinion, tends more fully to prove the ti'uth of the 
 Thesis. Suppose the Thesis is, Horatius Codes 
 is to be praised : the Reason or Mtiologia^ because 
 he is a great man ; the Common Place y or Con- 
 firmation, every brave man is to be praised. 
 
To this must be added illustrations of the sub- 
 ject draun from Similes, Comparisons, Exam- 
 ples and Testimonies. ^ 
 
 For instance ; the Thesis or Proposition is, It 
 is for the advantage of the Commonwealth that 
 there be many accusers^ provided they do not ca- 
 lumniate. 
 
 The reason to prove this, or jEtiologia, which 
 will include a common place, or confirmation, 
 may be thus : 
 
 Any one may be innocent, and yet not free 
 from suspicion : and though it be a misfortune, 
 yet the accuser may be forgiven, because the 
 innocent, if accused, may be acquitted, but the 
 guilty cannot be condemned without beins ac- 
 cused. It is better that the innocent should be 
 sometimes accused, than that the guiky should 
 not be brought to judgment. 
 
 This will be illustrated by a Simile : 
 
 Dogs are kept in the capitol, to announce by 
 their barking, the approach of thieves : and 
 though they may bark in the day-time, and at 
 the innocent, yet the error is on the right side. 
 Thus it is with pubUe accusers, who, though 
 they may be allowed to bark at innocence un- 
 knowingly, yet should cast all their wholesome 
 venom against the guilty. 
 
 This comparison is one of the chief sources of 
 perspicuity, since we can neither define nor 
 judge with sufficient accuracy of the magnitude, 
 beauty or (pialily of any thing, without com- 
 paring it with something else, which is at least 
 equally known and common* Thus, when I 
 
2S1 
 
 say, / love you sincerely^ I do not speak with s« 
 much perspicuity, as when I compare my love 
 for you, with the love of others, who are noted 
 for it : as, / love you^ as a father loves his children. 
 
 Comparison may be either longer and more 
 diffuse ; as when we previously explain and con- 
 firm, by illustrative arguments, the object to 
 which we compare any thing : as 
 
 Great is the love of parents to their children, 
 so that nothing can equal it : there is nothing, 
 indeed, which they will refuse to their advantage, 
 comforts and liappiness ; nay, parents will often 
 prefer the conveniences of their children to their 
 own. But, however great and transcendant that 
 love may be, yet I greatly doubt, whether the ten- 
 der affection I feel lor you is at all inferior to it. 
 
 Or, Comparison may be shorter ; as 
 1 love you as I love my father. 
 
 Or, metaphorically speaking : 
 
 You are a father to me, — In you I honor a 
 father. 
 
 A Simile should edso be apt and appropriate, 
 and should convey no low and offensive ideas to 
 the mind. It would be an uni)leasing idea to 
 compare the instruction of a master, with the 
 dung which softens and fertilizes the ground, 
 though it might be a just comparison. 
 
 But the comparison of a greater with a lesser 
 object, is chielly to be imitated, as conducive to 
 perspicuity. Our first business is to show the 
 apparently superior greatness of the object, to 
 which we compare any thing, and then show 
 the real superiority of the thiiag itself: as, 
 
232 
 
 Learnhio' is certainly glorious nnd desirabk% 
 as it enlightens the mind ; but how much more 
 glorious is virtue, which ennobles and purifies 
 the soul ! 
 
 Was there any one of us so void of taste, and 
 of so unfeeling a temper, as not to be affected 
 lately w ith the death of that excellent person ? 
 For though he died in an advanced age, yet such 
 was the excellence and inimitable beauty of his 
 art, that we thought him worthy of living for 
 ever. Was he then so great a favorite with ug 
 all, on account of the graceful motions of his body ; 
 and shall we be insensible to the surprising ener- 
 gy of the mind, and the sprightly sallies of genius? 
 
 Your forefathers often engaged in war, to re- 
 venge the insults offered to their merchants and 
 seamen. How then ought you to be fired, when 
 you call to mind, that in consequence of a sin- 
 gle express, so many thousand Roman citizens 
 ivere butchered in one day ? 
 
 If many of the greatest men have been care- 
 ful to leave their statues and pictures, these rep- 
 resentations not of their mvnds but of their bodies, 
 ought not we to be much more desirous of leav- 
 ing the portraits of our enterprizes and virtues, 
 drawn and finished by the most eminent artists? 
 
 One thing may be also compared with its op- 
 posite, or illustrated by contrasting it ; as the 
 beauty of any virtue will appear the brii^hter by 
 being conti'asted with the defonnliy of the op- 
 posite vice ; as, 
 
 Nothing is more base or unworthy of a man 
 
than avarice ; but let us consider liberality^ and 
 see how noble it is, and how much it is the 
 mark of a generous disposition. 
 
 Cicero thus compares his own study of the 
 sciences with the pursuit of other men after 
 pleasures : 
 
 Who then can censure me, or injustice be an- 
 gry with me, if these hours, which others em- 
 ploy in business, in pleasures, in celebrating pub- 
 lic solemnities, in refreshing the body, and un- 
 bending the mind ; if the time, which is spent 
 by some in midnight banqueting, in diversions, 
 and in gaming, 1 employ in reviewing these 
 studies ? 
 
 To this inust be added Examples : by w hich 
 we bring instances from history to corroborate 
 the truth of the Thesis, 
 
 Examples so far, have greater authority than 
 arguments, that they remove every doubt of the 
 possibihty or feasibility of any thing, convince 
 us that what has been done by others may be 
 achieved by ourselves, and place the truth of 
 whatever is to be proved immediately before 
 our eyes. An example must, in every feature 
 and pai'ticular, be suited to the subject of which 
 we treat. Thus if we speak of the contempt of 
 death, we may introduce Socrates, who did re- 
 ally contemn death, and not Cicero, who, though 
 he had beautifully discoursed upon it, yet trem- 
 bled at its approach. If we' speak of the con- 
 tempt of riches, we should instance the same 
 Socrates, or Fabricius, or Curius, who despised 
 riches when they were within thek reach, and 
 
 21 
 
234 
 
 Hot those, who behig poor, pretend to despise 
 what they cannot obtain, nor the rich, whose 
 contempt of what they enjoy, must be very sus- 
 picions. In our praise of any virtue, we must 
 not adduce a man who, though possessed of 
 that virtue, is disgraced by some notorious infa- 
 my ; lest, by that means, the autliority of the ex- 
 ample should be weakened. In praising valor, 
 the pahn should not be given to Catiline. Ex- 
 amples should also be true, and not fictitious ; 
 because the ignorant alone can be deceived by 
 fables. They may also be illustrated by some 
 argument, to show the motive and design with 
 which the action was done. As in adducing So- 
 crates, to exemplify a contempt of riches, va- 
 rious causes may be added, to corroborate the 
 Thesis itself; as, He knew that true riches con- 
 sisted ill wisdom and virtue, not in thinp^s exter- 
 nal and perishable. Or, He had learned that ev- 
 ery man who can be satisfied is siifficiently rich. 
 
 Cicero, speaking of the happy union of learn- 
 ing with an excellent and virtuous disposition, 
 thus introduces his examples. 
 
 " Such was that divine man, Africanus, whom 
 our fathers saw ; such were C. Laelius, and L. 
 Furius, persons of the greatest tem|)erance and 
 moderation ; such was ohl Cato, amanof^roat 
 bravery, and, for the times, of great learning, 
 who surely would never have applied to the 
 study of literature, had they thought it of no 
 service towards the acquisition and improve- 
 ment of virtue." 
 
 And again, Cicero having laid it down as it 
 
2:33 
 
 were a Thesis, that learning and studies^ must be 
 admired even by those that do not possess them, 
 says, 
 
 "Though we ourselves were incapable of 
 them, and had no relish for their charms, still 
 we should admire them, when we see them in 
 others." 
 
 And then he thus illustrates the subject by 
 this example, in which, celebrating the powers 
 of an inferior art, he takes occasion from thence 
 to bestow the more merited praise upon the su- 
 perior excellence of learning. 
 
 " Was there any of us so void of taste, and 
 of so unfeeUng a temper, as not to be affected 
 lately with the death of Roscius ? For though 
 he died in an advanced age, yet such was the 
 excellence and inimitable beauty of his art, that 
 we thought him worthy of living for ever. Was 
 he then so great a favorite with us all on ac- 
 count of the graceful motions of his body, and 
 shall we be insensible to the surprising energy 
 of the mind, and the sprightly sallies of genius? 
 
 It will also be necessary to introduce Quota- 
 tions into the Theme, which will serve to 
 strengthen what we say by the opinion and Tes- 
 timony of poets, or other good authors. These 
 may be either formally introduced, by mention- 
 ing the name of the author, and showing the 
 propriety of the application ; as Cicero often in- 
 serts whole verses from Ennius, by way of testi- 
 mony ; as where he says, that ignorant and fool- 
 ish old men often lay their own faults and infif- 
 
loi) 
 
 mitics lo the charge of old aj2;e, he then rcasows 
 upon the contrary practice of Ennius, in these 
 words : 
 
 Quod non faciebat u\ cujus modb meniwnem 
 fecty Ennius, 
 
 Si cut fort is equus, spatio qui scept supremo 
 
 Vicit Olympia, nunc scnio confectii^ quiescit. 
 
 Equifortis et victoris senectuti comparat sucun^ 
 ^c. 
 
 Or, quotations may be assimilated in a famil- 
 iar manner to the subject, and incorporated into 
 it ; as in this passage of Seneca : 
 
 Jnfrigora septenirionemque vergentibus imman- 
 sueta ingenia sunt, lit aitpoeta, 
 suoque simiUima ccelo. 
 
 Or, sometimes quotations are introduced by 
 authors, in different words from the original, and 
 clothed as it were in a new dress ; as where Ci- 
 cero has expressed these words of Euripides : 
 To & j^/:pa$ a^dog aisL 
 Boipvrepov Autvac, cxoniTji^nf 
 'ETtt xfxirl xstrat, 
 in his own language, and as a part of his own 
 argument : 
 
 Senectus plerisque senibus tarn odiosa est, ut 
 onus se jEtnd gravius dicant sustincre. 
 
 What has been said concerning Quotations or 
 Testimonies, may also be applied to Similes and 
 Examples, which it is by no means necessary 
 always to introduce distinctly and in separate 
 heads, but that they may be inserted into the 
 very body of the arjiument, so that when mate- 
 rials crowd upon the mind, tlic ardor of the wri- 
 
257 
 
 tcr i.^ not supposed to allow him to do more than 
 merely to advert to them in a short and curso- 
 ry manner. 
 
 The Conclusion, where it is regularly in- 
 troduced, and where the sense of it is not ex- 
 pressed in the body of the Theme, is a short re- 
 capitulation, tending to prove the truth of the 
 Thesis, and including some pertinent observa- 
 tion upon the subject. 
 
 Though some of the following specimens are 
 taken from Cicero's Orations, and other Latin 
 writers, and are chiefly applicable to longer dis- 
 sertations, yet they will easily admit of being 
 formed and adapted to the use of Themes, and 
 may with great propriety be received as elegant 
 models for introducing testimonies, examples, 
 quotations, &c. 
 
 FORMS OF CONFIRMATION. 
 
 Quam ego rem argumentis, non multis sed 
 probis validisque, sum probaturus. 
 
 Verbis tam discrtis, rationibus tam claris con- 
 firmata, ut non atramento, sed solis radio exa- 
 rata videantur. 
 
 Liceat autem hoc propositum, vcluti arcem 
 munitissimam fortissimis instruere propugnato- 
 vibus. 
 
 Quinetiam res ista voce naturae promulgata, 
 jure gentium sancitur, usu deniquc et consuetu- 
 dine firmatur. 
 
 Hie mihi liceat in aciem et justum praelium 
 cducere validissimarum rationum hastatos, re- 
 21 ^ 
 
238 
 
 luni certissiniarum principes, locupletibsimaj fi- 
 dei Triarios. 
 
 FORMS OF CITING EXAMPLES. 
 
 Plurima sunt ct obvia exempla. 
 
 Excmpla si qua^rantur illustriuiii virorum. 
 
 Excmplorum |)leiii libri, plenae mejiiorhe. 
 
 Exemplorum nullum illustrius, quam ilkul 
 Thalctis. 
 
 Inter multa pra^clara facinora alia, nihil clar- 
 ius quam quod .... 
 
 Atque ne ha^c obscura ct nuda vidcantur sine 
 cxenij)lorum appositionc, videte quaeso .... 
 
 Quam quidem rem probe intellexisse, ct recta 
 reputasse via mihi videntur, qui .... 
 
 Pristinam vcritatis facicm historia prisca rote- 
 git : hue provoco. 
 
 Non referam tibi Socratem, Chrysippum, &:c. 
 et ceteros, magnos quidem viros .... 
 
 Nonne profecto hoc illustravit ille omnium 
 prince ps .... 
 
 Pythagoras mihi primus e memoria in linguam 
 venit, Italia* splendor clarissimus. 
 
 Prodeat Pericles ille, cujus fulo;ura, tonitrua, 
 fulmina in concione visa ct audita metuerunt 
 Athenrn. 
 
 Quod ad mores indolemque, quid justius ? 
 Quid sanctius, in omni antiquitate ? Virtus ipsa 
 domicilium I^acedrrmone habuit; ct consensu 
 quodam in laudts masculi populi conspirasse 
 scriptores fere omncs videntur. 
 
 FORMS OP CrriNQ TESTIMONIES. 
 
 Haec ita clara, ita cxplorata simt, ut frustili 
 quis testium nubcm in (idem vocaverit. 
 
230 
 
 Cujus verba in praesidium advoco. 
 Testis niearum senteiitiariim .... 
 
 Ad vetercs provoco, ct antiquitutis magnum 
 illud, et venerabilc tribunal. 
 
 Nee disscntiunt a me prudentes .... 
 Quod poeta his versibus depinxit. 
 
 Aureum, facetum, et verum Bionis illud .... 
 
 Dignissima est aureis inscribi literis, menti 
 commendanda pcnitiis, et saepe memoria re- 
 tractanda ilia M. C. sententia. 
 
 Ad rem ct apposite Tullius. 
 
 Nee vates ille vanus qui cecinit. 
 
 Praiclara ilia vox, et praeclaro viro dignissima, 
 
 Non injuria exclamat ille .... 
 
 Judicio meo suffragatur philosophus; hujusrci 
 locupletissimus testis est .... 
 
 Atqui huic opinioni adstipulatur Seneca. 
 
 Non temere igitur dictum, si Hcsiodo credimus. 
 
 Qiiare bene sciteque praecijiit, canit .... 
 
 Herodotus, lac musarum. 
 
 Thuycydides, oculus verecundiae. 
 
 Honicrus, pcctarum antiquissinms : Phoebus 
 ille Poctarum. "Aptorog xat Oscoraro; tqv Ttoiyi- 
 tLjv. 
 
 Virgilius, Latinus Homerus, Mantuanus ille 
 vates, Poetarura princeps .... 
 
 Cicero: longe omnium qui scripserunt, aut 
 locuti sunt, copia dicendi et gravitate princeps. — 
 Disertissimus omnium Romuli nepotum-.Flos il- 
 libatus populi, suadaeque medulla. Quasi Deus 
 Oratoi um : noraudg ;^pt>aoto l:eovrog. 
 
 Demosthenes: frequens et magnus auditor 
 Platoni'^. 
 
84# 
 
 Qui unus inter omnes emicuit omni dicendi 
 generc. 
 
 Horatjus: Niimerosus ille Horatius: Latirm:5 
 Pindarus, Lyricorum priuceps, Venusinus illo 
 vates : 
 
 Romanse fidicen lyrae. 
 
 FORMS OF CONCLUDING. 
 
 Sed et uiide orsa est, in eodem terminetiir 
 oratio mea. 
 
 Jam vero, ne in vestram luimanitatem injuri- 
 osa longitudine peccet oratio mea .... 
 
 Non est autem cur pergam : orationis igitur 
 vela contraho .... 
 
 De qua re non plura dicam, ne vestrae benig- 
 nitatis aures, diutiiis obtundam ingratus. 
 
 Scd ut aliquando extrcmum habeat oratio mea, 
 finem jam faciam. 
 
 Rcliqua quae, &c. si persequerer, non deesset 
 oratio, decssent latera, quibus exclamarem, &c. 
 
 Habetis sermonem bene longum hominis uti« 
 nam non impudeutis, illud quidem corte, non 
 nimls verecundi, qui qnu^om. (]c kr, tnm nuilto 
 dixerim. 
 
SPECIMEN OF A LATIN THEME. 
 
 Ad pccnitcndum properat cito quijudicat, — Syr. 
 
 Prop. Bene cautus reruinjudex tempus et clil- 
 igentiam ad cas prius trutinandas adhibebit. 
 quam quicquam pro certo statuat. 
 
 Rat. Adeo enim densa crroris nebula mortales 
 visas obducta hebetat, ut res ssepcnumero iion 
 e^e videantur, quee sunt. 
 
 Conf. Quid autem obscurius, quid magis igno- 
 tum, quam verum est ? Finxerunt veteres in 
 imo puteo demersam latere veritatem ; hoc 
 scilicet comniento intellectum voluerunt, earn 
 non nisi longa argumentorum serie hauriri, 
 inque lucem proferri posse. Quare vitanda 
 est festinatio, quae turn omnibus in rebus, turn 
 maxime in vero indagando nocet. 
 
 Simi. Facilis currentibus lapsus ; per obscura 
 et ignota eunti, timide, caute et pedetentim 
 progrediendum est. 
 
 Argiim. Tempus rerum abdita promens in aper- 
 tum, temerc raptimque judicata reprehendit, 
 arguit, corrigit : dumque eunt dies, aliam men- 
 tern, aliud judicium firmioribus fultum argu- 
 mentis secum adferunt. Qui fit tandem, ut 
 priora ilia eversa ruerint, nisi quod non satis 
 altejacto fimdamento nitebanturp 
 
242 
 
 Test '* Da spatium tenuemquc moram ; mala 
 cuncta ministrat 
 
 Impetus." 
 Exam. Qiiis enim riescit cunctando rem olini 
 
 Romanam, duce Fabio, restitutam fuisse ? 
 Cone, Ut igitur quisque ad sentcntiam de rebus 
 
 minus pertpectis fcrendam maxime festinat ; 
 
 ita maxime verendum est, ne judicem temcra- 
 
 rium latae poeniteat 
 
 These are the several parts into which a Theme 
 is usually divided ; but it must be observed that 
 it is not necessary to adhere too rigidly to them. 
 For though this method tends to give a precision 
 of thinking to the scholar, yet it is not meant lo 
 preclude some partial deviation from this sys- 
 tem ; in such a manner, however, that he may 
 not be allowed to wander from the, subject, but 
 that in proving and illustrating his Thesis, he 
 may sometimes follow that arrangement which 
 will best suit his fancy or his capacity. In the 
 following specimen, for instance, it will be seen 
 that Examples form the most prominent features 
 of the Theme, and that the proofs and illustra- 
 tions are chiefly derived from thcni. 
 
24^3 
 
 Integer vitce, scelerlsquc purus, 
 No7i eget Mauri jaciilis. — Hor. 
 
 QuuM a Philosopho quodam quaererctur, u- 
 trr:m ad rempublicam tutandam, plus adjumenti 
 afJ'erret justilia, an arma; si, inquit, ex justitiae 
 prccceptis viveretur, nullum armis opus foret. 
 Praeclarum sane responsum ! E scelcre enini et 
 injuria bella solent prolicisci. Quae autem bella 
 integi'o vitae scelerisque puro sunt gerenda? 
 Quae pugna committenda ? Qui enses acuendi ? 
 llii cum onmibus pax intercedit. Summae enim 
 esset perversitatis et malitiae innocuo nocere. 
 
 iEneae, Troja capta, victores Danai peperce- 
 runt, quod pads, Helenaeque reddendae auctor 
 fuerat : ei igitur Patrem et Penates per medios 
 hostes, per caedes, et incendia portanti, tutum 
 fuit iter. Usque adeo pietas vel inter hostes 
 tuta et honorata est. 
 
 Quis nescit Numam ilium pium et tranquillum 
 legem ? Hoc regnante, ne unum quidem diem 
 Templum Jani apertum est; sed quadraginta 
 annos clausum stetit, dum pax florebat undique 
 perpelua, Justitia et lenitas sui Regis non Ro- 
 nianam gentem solum cultam et mansuetam 
 reddidit ; sed etiam ad proximas civitates, ab 
 ejus exemplo, ut a sacro quodam fonte, amor 
 yirtutis et justitiae fluxit. Neque odio, neque 
 invidioe erat obnoxius ; regni affectatio neque 
 privatas neque publicas in regnum insidias struxit. 
 Sive Deorum metus, qui plerumque pios tuentur, 
 sive illius virtu tis reverentia de improbis homi- 
 num cordibus tiiumphurit ; certum est, vel hy- 
 
246 
 
 To free any one from dangers, to avert them : deprecari 
 
 alicujus perirula, 
 
 p. 22. To be cast in a suit : causd cadere. 
 
 p. 25. Presence of mind : prcesentis animi consilium, 
 
 p. 26. To entertain too sanguine a hopie of success : spcm 
 
 fenierariam habere. 
 
 To abdicate the sovereign power or magistracy : imperium 
 
 deponere ; se magistratu abdicare, 
 
 p. 30. The thing in question : de quo agitur. 
 To serve for the twentieth time : vicesima stipcndin mcrcri. 
 To whose decision they appealed : quern judiccm fcccrint. 
 To assert one's right to a territory : agrum vindicare. 
 He rested the point of controversy : controversiatn refcrebat, 
 p. 31. To make a toil of pleasure: amara jucundis inter- 
 
 juiseere, 
 
 p. 32. When there is such a noise : vhi tot obstrepunt gra- 
 
 cult, 
 
 p. S3. It became the first object of my wishes to acquire 
 
 your love ; nihil optative f^^H^ quam ut abs te amnrer, 
 p. 34. To assault by covert ways : cunicuUs oppugnare, 
 p. 35. From motives of state policy : reiptibUcxe vausii. 
 No one invested with supreme power and authority : nemo 
 urn viribus plurimnm posset. 
 To condescend to listen to justice, wiiiiout a violent effort 
 
 on one's part : ad jus sine vi descendere. 
 
 p. 36, Which must from their antiquity have obtained the 
 
 force of nature : qucejam naturw vim obtineret per vetustatcm. 
 lie had erected monuments to his fame : monumenta ^ibi 
 
 extruxerat, . 
 
 p. 38. Toils and intrigues of ambition : ambitionis labor. 
 Having contracted a lameness from a wound : gravi- 
 
 Icr rhiiiflirnnti ex vulnere, 
 
 y. .; '. To bind any one by the strongest ties of ^^atitude : 
 
 1 ruf/ysi/num aliciii facer e, 
 
 p. 4J. 1 am bound to him by the strongest obligalioiis : hie 
 
 de me optima meritus est. 
 
 He obtained the first celebrity and pre-eminence in the fo- 
 
 1 am : clarus in tog/i, et princepa. 
 
 To have influence with any one : apiid aliqvrm valere, 
 p. 42. To pay attention to a thing : in aliqxiid incumbere^ 
 
 pel alicui rei. 
 
1'47 
 
 Entitled to the hiijhest commendation : suiinnd hiude flignus. 
 
 p. 44. I received inrormation of: rciiuntiatum est mihi de. 
 
 Not in endeavouring to blot out the memory of the ancient 
 quarrel, but in concerting measures to renew the war : 71011 ad 
 oblivionem vrteris belli, sed ad comparationem novi, 
 
 p. 45. Not unaccompanied with : plenam. 
 
 When no longer attended with danger : secura. 
 
 To be struck dumb with astonishment : obstupescere. 
 
 p. 48. To inform any one of what has been done : acta edo- 
 cere. 
 
 p. 50. With some degree of accuracy : acpiiraiiiis. 
 
 I must live and die with the conviction of: mihi vivendum 
 afque moricnditm conscio, 
 
 p. 51., To amuse himself with projecting the conquest of 
 I he world : orbem terramm inncere mcditaretur. 
 
 Common and possible events : commumn esse, ctjicri posse. 
 
 p. 52. To act from the best of motives, &:c. : optimo animo 
 ctjudicio agerc, 
 
 p. 53. To let slip an opportunity : oblatani occasionem di- 
 miftere, prcv.icnnittcrc. 
 
 The mind is filled with disappointment and bitter anguish : 
 spc destitutus graviter doleo. 
 
 p. 55. To be noted for the wisest person : inte?* sapientissi- 
 nios haben, 
 
 p. 56. To meet with a sudden reverse of fortune : ,9?{6/M re- 
 rum conversione pcenc npprimi, 
 
 p. 57. To have an ascendancy over any one : apud aVqxiem 
 auctoritatem hahere, volere. 
 
 lie knows and has found for certain : cognitum compertutn" 
 que sibi. 
 
 To be disaffected to : alicno animo esse in, 
 
 p. 60. Intoxicated with fury : furens audacia. 
 
 The smoke had intercepted their view : conspectum fumus 
 abstulerat. 
 
 p. 61. To weigh the force and motive of every duty: offici- 
 arum omnium momenta perpendere. 
 
 To give rules for the attainment of the liberal arts : vias op- 
 timarum nrtium tradcrc, 
 
 p. 62. To associate the sons into a share of the kingdom : 
 regni consortium jungere cum. 
 
 As his own free gift : ' sui muneris. 
 
246 
 
 To free any one from dangers, to avert them : depi^ecari 
 qVicujus pericula, 
 
 p. 22. To 1)6 cast in a suit : causit cadere. 
 
 p. 25. Presence of mind : prcpsentis animi consilium, 
 
 p. 26. To entertain too sanguine a hope of success ; spent 
 tenierariam habere. 
 
 To abdicate the sovereign power or magistracy : imperium 
 deponere ; se mngistraiii abdicare. 
 
 p. SO. The thing in question : de quo agitur. 
 
 To serve for the twentieth time : incesima stipend in mercri. 
 
 To whose decision they appealed : quem judicem fecerint. 
 
 To assert one's right to a territory : agnim vindicare. 
 
 He rested the point of controversy : controversiam referebat* 
 
 p. 31. To make a toil of pleasure: amara jucundis inter- 
 miscere, 
 
 y,. ^\1. When there is such a noise : vhi tot obstrepunt gra* 
 
 p. ?)o. It became the first object of my wislies to acquire 
 your love : nihil optative f^^if^ quam ut abs ie amnrer. 
 
 p. 34. To assault by covert ways : cunicuUs oppugnare, 
 
 p. 35. From motives of state policy : reipyblirce cansCi, 
 
 No one invested with supreme power and authority : nemo 
 cum virihus plurimnm posset. 
 
 To condescend to listen to justice, without a violent effort 
 on one's part : ad Jus sine I'i descendere. 
 
 p. 36. Which must from their antiquity have obtained the 
 force of nature : qucejam natura* vim ohiineret per vvtustatem. 
 
 lie had erected monuments to his fame : monumcnta ^ibi 
 extruxerat. 
 
 p. 38. Toils and intrigues of ambition : ambitionis labor. 
 Having contracted a lameness from a wound : gravi- 
 tcr claudicnnti ex vulnere. 
 
 p. 39. To bind any one by the strongest lies of Matltudc : 
 gratissimum alicvi facer c. 
 
 p. 41. I am bound to him by the strongest obligations : hie 
 de me optimr meritus est. 
 
 He obtained the first celebrity and pre-eminence in the fo- 
 rum : clarus in tog/i, et princeps. 
 
 To have influence with any one : apud aliqucm valere. 
 
 p. 42. To pay attention to a thing ; in aliquid incumbere, 
 vcl alicui rei. 
 
Entitled to the hic^hcst cuiimiendation : summtt laude dlgiius. 
 
 p. 44. I received inrormation of: rcniinliatum est mihi de. 
 
 Not in endeavouring to blot out the memory of the ancient 
 quarrel, but in concerting measures to renew the war : non ad 
 oblivionem vrteris belli, sed ad comparatioaem novi. 
 
 p. 45. Not unaccompanied with : plenam. 
 
 When no longer attended with danger : secura. 
 
 To be struck dumb with astonishment : ohstujyescere. 
 
 p. 48. To inform any one of what has been done : acta edo- 
 cere. 
 
 p. 50. With some degree of accuracy : accuratius. 
 
 I must live and die with the conviction of: mihi vivendwn 
 atque moricndum conscio. 
 
 p. 5 1.. To amuse himself with projecting the conquest of 
 'li? world : orhem terrarinn innccre meditaretur. 
 
 Common and possible events : communia esse, el Jicn posse, 
 
 p. 52. To act from tlie best of motives^ &c. : ojjtimo animo 
 ctjudicio agerc. 
 
 p. 53. To let slip an opportunity : ohlalain occasionem di- 
 mitterCj 'prccicrmittcrc. 
 
 The mind is filled with disappointment and bitter anguish : 
 spc destitatus grnviter doleo, 
 
 p. 55. To be noted for the wisest person : inter sapienlissi- 
 nios haberi. 
 
 p. 56. To meet with a sudden reverse of fortune : .<??«6/M re- 
 ritm conversione pwnc npprimi. 
 
 p. 57. To have an ascendancy over any one : apiid cd qiicm 
 auctoritatem habere^ valere. 
 
 lie knows and has found for certain : cognitum comptrtum" 
 que sibi. 
 
 To be disaffected to : alieno animo esse in, 
 
 p. 60. Intoxicated with fury : furcns audacia. 
 
 The smoke had intercepted their view : conspectum fumus 
 abstiderat. 
 
 p. 6l. To weigh the force and motive of every (hity: o^ci- 
 oruni omnium momenta perpenderc. 
 
 To give rules for the attainment of the liberal arts : vias op- 
 timarum nrtium trudcrc, 
 
 p. 62. To associate the sons into a share of the kingdom : 
 regni con^'^ortiumjungere cum. 
 
 As bis own free gift : sid nmneris. 
 
24S 
 
 To fall prostrate at the feet of any one : gcnibua advolvi 
 
 To have an absolute power over any one : omnia in aliquem 
 posse. 
 
 p. 63, The gods pour down their vengeance on so many 
 perjuries : Diis tot perjiiria vindicatitlbus. 
 
 To be reduced to eAtremc ncn ssity : ad incitas redigi ; 
 res ad extremum pcrducta, 
 
 p. 64. The skirts of places facilitate the knowledge of: ora 
 locorum faiiliorcm co^nitioncm dant. 
 
 To adhere to the rule proposed : mnnerc in iiutiivto suo. 
 
 The most splendid merit is recompensed by the small and 
 reluctant voice of praise : recti facto exigna laiis ct ab inviti^ 
 rpressa proponitur. 
 
 p. 65. To fall into neglect : ohsolere. 
 
 To promote with the greatest zeal and ardor : studiosins 
 ndaugere. 
 
 p. 66. To stand in the way of the designs of others : r/7/n- 
 rum consiJlis officerc. 
 
 p. 67. To sink into languor and inactivity :• in moUuicm ct 
 lertinm sold. 
 
 p. 68. It affords a heartfelt satisfaction to behold : incredi- 
 bUiter delectat videre. 
 
 p. 69. The mind becomes enervated by luxurious ease : lux- 
 nriatur otio animus. 
 
 A most efficacious method : res cfficacissima. 
 
 Every man distinguished for his bravery : fortissimus quis- 
 que vir. 
 
 Avaricious views divert into the pursuit of plunder : avari' 
 fia ad prwdam devocnt, 
 
 p. 70. Lvery improvement of human genius : omnem inge- 
 ii cultitm. 
 
 p. 71 • Intelligence was brought : nvnriatum est. 
 
 I)r!\< 1 to despair by the stings of an evil conscience : con- 
 
 i' ... , .relcrum cxagitatus. 
 
 To kill oneself: nerem sibi consciscen . 
 
 Without accomplishing a purpose: reitjn ., . 
 
 p. 72. Report by its rapidity anticipates: Jama sud, celcri- 
 fntf snperat.... 
 
 Their whole thoughts are bent on worldly and perishable 
 
 bjects : nihil nisi mortalc tcrrcnumque rogitunt. 
 p. 73. For pnsuming to inquire, or at all concern them.- 
 <ielve.s : quod nibi qnmrendum out cogitandum piUaront. 
 
249 
 
 They assumed the mask of hypocrisy, put on a iiurried step, 
 and displayed reserve and composure in tlieir countenances : 
 falsi ac frstinantes, vultuque composito 
 
 p. 75. Perfumes of a very high and sweet savor : ungucnta 
 summd ct acemniil suavitate condita, 
 
 p. 76, To take the foraging party in the rear ifrumentarios 
 a tergo aggredi. 
 
 To prove by the most convincing reasons : gravissimis ra- 
 tionibus evincerc. 
 
 To feel the breast glow with the warmest zeal : incredihill 
 studio rapi, 
 
 p. 77, To pay all possible respect to : maximum honorem 
 pj'cestare ; maximd observantil habere. 
 
 p. 79. We can be supplied with sufficient materials : nobis 
 suppctere potest. 
 
 The mind could not bear being stretched to such a degree : 
 animus non posset f err e tantam contentionem, 
 
 p. 80. In the hour of despair : spe abjectd. 
 
 p. 81. To leave off childish play : relinqucre nuces pueris, 
 
 p. 85. To make an impression on the senate : senatum com" 
 jnovere, 
 
 p. 86. To take a magnificent view of one's self: sc magni^ 
 Jicc circinnspicere. 
 
 To store the memory with an immense mass of... irjimensam,.. 
 copiam memoriO. comprehendere. 
 
 p. 88. It has subjected them to incurable diseases and insu(- 
 ferable pains : Us morbos insanabilcsy ct dolorcs intolerabiles 
 adjunxit. 
 
 Minds ready to sympathise with the pains of the bodies : 
 ammi corporum doloribus congruentes. 
 
 p. 89. If you will give me an opportunity of showing : si per 
 te miki licit umfucrit indicare, 
 
 p. 90. Any accident that may befal us : res incommodw. 
 
 p. 91. To oblige any one : de aliquo bene mereri. 
 
 p. 95. To inflict on the polluted offspring, the punishments 
 due to the crimes of the parents : parent um pwuas a conscele^ 
 ra t issim is filiis repctere. 
 
 To take pains: laborare ; laborem in aliquid impendere, 
 
 p. 96. To be invested with honorable offices : summis hon- 
 or Ibits funsi, 
 
 " • 22 ♦ 
 
250 
 
 ];. 98. Words removed from common usage : verba a cuir 
 muni iisu abducta. 
 
 Inelcgimfly coined by themselves : a se inconcinnc confictis. 
 
 1 o steal Cicero's invectives against Catiline : Ciceroni 
 ( \itilinari(is cotnpilare, 
 
 p. 102. The first object of moral beauty: primus honesli 
 iocus. 
 
 To bold the hand stretched out as a mark ; prcrhcrr pro 
 copula (lispausam mnnum, 
 
 p. 103. Nature p^ives this instinct : hoc a natural tributum. 
 
 p. 104. To aspire to honor ; ad honorem contendere, (en- 
 
 \ Wise man fashions the conduct ol his iilc according to the 
 language of the ignorant : sapientis vita ex insipientiinn scr- 
 none pendet. 
 
 What regards the gratification of the senses : quod spcciat 
 ad volupfatem. 
 
 p. 106. To remove imaginary anxieties: inancs solicit a- 
 dines detrahere, 
 
 p. 108. Moderation in the exercise of supreme power: in 
 unmnui potestaie tcrum omnium modus. 
 
 To keep closely besiegetl : clausum obsidere. 
 
 p. 109. To instruct any one to the perpetration of the vilest 
 practices : nliquem mala facinora edocere, 
 
 A supine indilVercnce, by which the state was nearl}'^ brought 
 > the brink of ruiu : socordia aique inertia per quas pcenc res- 
 nthlica interiit, 
 
 p. 110. To exhibit to the view the whole tissue of a man'* 
 \ ices and ini^juities : omnia w ( " ' 'ominis exempla profcrrc, 
 
 Tliis single trait retrieves 1 <• from eternal disLifire: 
 
 hoc unumf acinus labem oitemam dclet, 
 
 p. H2, I will grant you your request: cficiam quo ' 
 
 .Men of the first dignity and eminence : homines m»' 
 
 I claim the preference iu rising to address you : ego potissi' 
 mum tturgo. 
 
 Reason receiving its whole support from itself, and continu- 
 ; essive advances : ratio connixa per sc^ et 
 
 From the general disorder which prevails through the whole 
 norld : / ... ,^^^ 
 
 p. 111. ; ^^ ^€nd to : spcctarc ad. 
 
251 
 
 ll6. Di-awTi by motives of duty : aUqu.1 officii ratione ad- 
 ducerctur. 
 
 p. 119. Intent upon the recovery of liis rights : ad Uheriatem 
 erectus. 
 
 p. 120. To expose to the manifest view of all : proferre in 
 medium. 
 
 p. 121. To demand the payment of money : cx/^er(?/?ecwn/a5. 
 
 In an engaj^einent or pitched battle : collalis signis, 
 
 p.^123. What has a most extensive effect : quod latissimc 
 pafet. 
 
 Whose influence is felt: quod plurlm''m valet. 
 
 Thus our aml3ition is gratified : ila quce volumus consequi- 
 mur. 
 
 p. 123. There is this most fortunate circumstance attending 
 it : hoc adhuc pervommodr cadlt. 
 
 Tlie magisterial offices, witli which I have been invested by 
 the people : quos tnihi magistratus p.ipulus maiidavit, 
 
 p. 126. The religious obligation with which I bound myself 
 to discharge those offices : quci omnium qfficiortim ohstringor 
 religione. 
 
 The complexion of the times is such: tempus esthujusmodi, 
 
 p. 129- The manager of an impeachment : actor causK. 
 
 Should we not make him feel the full weight of public ven- 
 geance ? nonne puhlice. vindica/enus ? 
 
 p. 134. It contributes to make them strong, and to render 
 them of gigantic size : vires alit, et itnmani corporum rnagrn- 
 tudine homines efficit, 
 
 p. 1 37. Amicable alliances are founded on the basis of re- 
 eiprocal wants ; amicitice propter indigentiam coluntur, 
 
 p. 138. They are reused above every necessity of having re- 
 course to the assistance of uthers : minimc alterius indigent. 
 
 They do not give a metrical or harmonious termination to 
 their sentences : non claudunf numcris senfentias. 
 
 I seem to have preferred my own private interest : aliquam 
 bonam gratiam mi hi qua'sisse videor. 
 
 You ought to rest satisfied : satis habeas, 
 
 p. 139. I availed myself of the interest I had with your wife 
 and sister to prevail upon them to deter him : egi cum uxore 
 tuiijct cumvestrd sorore ut dctcrrerent. 
 
 His blind fury received no checker diminution : ncque furor 
 minuebatur. 
 
 He took up and conveyed all the money he could upon his 
 
own credit, or that of his friend : pecuniam sua aut arnicorutj} 
 fide s Uinta in n.utua . portare* 
 
 p. 140. He left m. no other alternative than to swear : nihil, 
 fnfii utjurarenij reUqtdt, 
 
 p. 141. On the distant view of the navigation of a vessel: 
 cum proriil cursum navigii videris. 
 
 p. 142. iMore perniciously prodigal: perditiiis prodigum, 
 
 p. 143. He showed the most persecuting and vindictive spir- 
 it towards his person : in (jus personam nmlta fecit asperius, 
 
 p. 145. To harrass the mind with phantoms of iniac-inary 
 
 ils : unimosjictorum maloruiu umbrd defatigavi 
 
 p. 146. It is unavoidable by me in that station lu wiiich I 
 have been raised : pro hoc gradu, in quo me P, R. collocavit, 
 neccssaria, 
 
 p. 148. He acts the part of an implacable enemy towards 
 me : se mihi implacabilem prcebet. 
 
 To be saved from the gallows : c fared rcdimi, 
 149. 1 foresaw its pernicious tendency : exit iosum fore videham. 
 
 Their cares attend us in our entrance into the world : curia 
 n08 adolescentes prosequuntur, 
 
 150. To pay one's debts : nomina liherare. 
 
 To break open the seal : linum mciderc. 
 
 p. 151. They are inured to poverty and iuuuMJip.^ : pauper- 
 tale usi ad vers 18 mala durati sunt. 
 
 p. 157. To pry curiously into the lives of others: aliorum 
 das curlosii'8 pcrscrutari, 
 
 p. 159. ii flow of genius: flumcn ingenii. 
 . p. 150. To drag forth before the tribunal of public justice from 
 mere patriotic motives : in judicium reipublitcB causa vovare* 
 
 A man stained with crimes of the blackest dye : homo dc" 
 tcrrimus. 
 
 To admit to terms of peace: infidem recipete. 
 p. 161. There has been an alarm : ad arma conclamafum est. 
 
 p. 16-?. This difference of opinion in our discussions being 
 
 .iried on till night : hdc controversid ^ usque ad nocfrmductd. 
 
 p. 16G. It shows a want of Iriendship, and of that regard, 
 which I have always felt fi)r you, to observe a silence of indif- 
 ference: nostrcB necessitudinis eaty mcoB in te benevolent ice ^ 
 Hon tacere. 
 
 By the ties of our mutual friendship : pro amove nostra. 
 
 p. 171. Nature has implanted that principle within us: hoc 
 fKUurd €st iimtum. 
 
25S 
 
 They have inflicted an awful punishment upon their moth- 
 ers : suppUcium de matre sinnserunt. 
 
 Those persons are entitled to our just abhorrence : justo odio 
 dig7u'ssi?ni sunt. 
 
 They take no precautions against the raisft>rtunes and troub- 
 les which await tliem . quos dolorcs et quas mokstias exceptU' 
 ri sint tiou provident, 
 
 p. 172. The oration is replete with charges of the most fla- 
 gitious nature against him: in oral lone per muUa in eum iur- 
 pia nc jia^iiioita dicuntur. 
 
 To feel a thirst for glory, and passion for fame : appetens 
 ^lorice, atqne ovidiis famce, 
 
 A stain contracted in the war : macula hello ^uscepta. 
 
 p. 173. An indelible blot on the reputation of the Roman 
 people: macula^ qnce inveteravit in popnli Romani nomine. 
 
 p. 176. Men of the first celebrity for learning and wisdom: 
 homines doctissi i os sapieniissi -osque. 
 
 As to defy the ingenuity of any man to comprehend their or- 
 der and connection : ut vix quisqnan arte ulla ordinem rerum 
 ac necessitudinem persequi possit. 
 
 He was so far from observing the appearance of any hea- 
 venly objects : nee solum nullum ci ohlata.f ccelestium speciem. 
 
 p. 177. I have been induced by an intimacy of such long 
 
 standing, and by that benevolence, which I have experienced 
 
 from your youth : andciticR nostrce vetustas^ et tua suinma er- 
 
 ^cl me henevoleniia^ quce mikijam a pueritidiud cognita est, 
 
 ue horfnta est. 
 
 p. 180. Continue in the enjoyment of that tranquility : y/'M- 
 <'re isto otio. 
 
 p. 1 84. They are so lost to every principle of virtue and 
 jeligion : ei iniquitatis at que i-tpiclatis pervenemnt. 
 
 What can be a mark of ^neater folly, than in a mode of life 
 which depends upon your will, to create an inability of contin- 
 uing it : quid stidtiuSy qua/a, quod h' ft*-' ^^f.^r facias, curare, ut 
 id diutius farere non passim. 
 
 p. 1 86. Their lives could be dispensed witli : tolerahilia 
 fuerun! ilia. 
 
 The atrocious crimes which a man has be^n guilty of a- 
 izainst the peace of society : jlagitiosiasima ulliits in rempubli- 
 cam fnrinora. 
 
 p. 187. The memory of which might have reflected lustre 
 
254 
 
 on my humble name : ex viemorid qnoi^m meum ignohile no- 
 ncn innotcscat. 
 
 Never shall his measures disconcert : nunqaaia iUc mc op- 
 primct concilio, 
 
 I know all his method of attack : novi omnes hominis pcti- 
 tioncs. 
 
 Under the influence of these terrors : in illo timore. 
 
 He roused him from his diffidence : diffidcntern suis rebus, 
 conjirmavit, 
 
 p. 188. With his hair nicely trimmed, and loaded with per- 
 fumes : composJto ct delibuto capillo. 
 
 Whence jjresuming on so well known an instance of their 
 bravery they laid claim to: qud exre Jien, uti eamm rerum 
 memorid sumerent 
 
 p. 1 89. Those who have the means as well as the power, 
 feel a natural inclination to do their utmost towards : n qui 
 valcnt opibits naturd incitantur ad 
 
 Without fixing the least suspicion : sine mspi done, 
 
 p. 190. How ignorant of the real interests of the people are 
 those : qitum itial ab its rapublicce consuliitn\ 
 
 p. 191. It is to your good offices that I owe the happy ter- 
 mination of this business : per tr negotiniu ex seatentid ptrfeii. 
 To enter into the designs of any one : idem sent ire rum ahquo, 
 
 p. 194. To be drowned amidst the shouts of armies : obstrC' 
 pi rlamore militum. 
 
 They are apt to entertain a suspicion of their being generally 
 marked as objects of scorn and derision : contcinni se ptttant, 
 despici, illudi, 
 
 p. 19^. But if he would retire and leave him in the undis- 
 turbed possession of his country : - * discessissef, ac libc- 
 ram possessionem regionis sibi trc ' t. 
 
 Misfortune has embittered every moment of my life : omnia 
 raihi A ^ ' ^/. 
 
 Tl. ijg some amelioration of destiny : ,«?;;<?.<? 
 
 (diciijus commodi aluptando recuperandi. 
 
 p. 198. An opportunity of informing yourself jn>i i.n^ m 
 your way : primuin ie ^pus diseendi nactus es, 
 
 p. 201. Lc • to your own conjectures to inform you : 
 
 ea vos rnnject:-. . ,;. jw'picitis. 
 
 I shall not expatiate on his great actions, with the unusual 
 surcess that has n; ' ' them : mm sum prcedicaiurus qucm- 
 tas res, quantdqiu ic gesserit. 
 
INDEX 
 
 OF THE 
 
 CHIEF CONTENTS OF THIS BOOK. 
 
 JBL^TIVE absolute, 62, 63. 
 M, 13. 
 
 Antequmn, priusquaniy &c. 90. 
 Alo, iriquam, 105. 
 ,%fjectiiesy 145, 146, 223, 224. 
 Adverbs, 158, 224. 
 Affirmative 186. 
 A^oy 189. 
 
 Being, 55. 
 
 r/a»aes, arrangement of, 117, fee. 
 
 < 'o7ij unctions, or connexion of 
 words and divisions of senten- 
 ces, 127, i^c. 
 
 Copiousness of Sty]e, 169, &ic. 
 
 Ctrcum locution, 179, toe. 
 
 Concinnitas, or equality of parts, 
 184, toe. and 216. 
 
 f irctiil, of a j)eriod, 204, toe. 
 
 Contigit, evenit, toe. 188. 
 
 Confirmaiio. Vide Themes. 
 
 Comparison Vide Themes. 
 
 Dignity of Style, 196, toe. 
 
 Elefrance, 1. 
 
 English, liovv to simplify it, in ren- 
 dering it into Latin, 6, 7, 8. 
 Every, 16. 
 
 Epistolary Style, 75. 
 Examples. Vide Themes. 
 
 Fore ut, 48. 
 
 Figures of Rbctoric, 167, toe. 
 
 Fac ecw, toe. 195. 
 Future perfect, 75, &tc. 
 
 Gerunds, 67. 
 Genitivts, 103. 
 Grecisnis, 52. 
 
 Homo and FtV, 12. 
 Harmony, 215. 
 
 Idioms, 4, toe. 
 
 Intermixture of words to be avoid- 
 ed, 9. 
 ///c and ?5/€, 12. 
 /p^e used for /o/u*, 15. 
 Is for <a/u, 13. 
 Idem (or item, toe. 15. 
 Instead of, 16, 17, 18, &c. 
 /£^ oMorf, 40. 
 Infinitive, 52, 65, toe. 
 Impersonal, 57, toe. 
 Intensive words , 32. 
 //a, 125, &^. 
 
 Moneo, 48. 
 
 Motion, 71. 
 
 -V//m', //6i, toe. 193. 
 
 Measure, prose. Vid. Harmony, toe. 
 
 jyescio qnis for quidam, 12. 
 
 JN-c quid em, 88. 
 
 Neque, 133, toe. 
 
 JVwj, 140. 
 
 »Yon morfd — fferf c/tow, 21 , 158 
 
256 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 JW^a/iVf, 132, he. and 31. 
 JVt)n 15 *i/m, quij Lc. 196. 
 • 
 
 One. another, 1(5. 
 Opiu est", 21. 
 Oportd, 2<>, 159. 
 Ortier, or arrangement of words, 
 
 87, 1«)(>, ^c. 
 0/Aer,91,6LC. 
 
 PersMadtOt 48. 
 
 Phrnsesy choice of, 2, 3, 4, 5. 
 
 Pofticnl endinsrs, 10. 
 
 Primus, u«u5, kc. 22. 
 
 Purtnplcsy 60, iiic. 159. &tc. 
 
 Pcrsoi.^i 74. 
 
 Pronouns, 97 &.C. 
 
 Prf positions, K>4, 155. SiC. 
 
 Plenita:^7nf 190, Stc. 
 
 Period, structure of, 204, &lc. 
 
 Perspicuity J 221, ^c. 
 
 Proper names, 97. 
 
 Q/ .■; vucc, 7Uorf, 28, fcc. 122. 
 
 (^ .i.f)in,h,(pmfjufwi, kc. 13. 
 
 r,' 
 
 f, iiic. 38, 40, 122. 
 
 (^ 'ly 50, L.C. 
 
 (^ ■<'? quod, 130. 
 
 <^u >'lsi, 141. 
 
 (^./o / uhi,qnodutinam, 194. 
 
 Qu/, ^'o, 15.3. 
 
 Quam ut,6\. 
 
 Qf/m,52, 53. 
 
 r ! 
 
 /. .J, 58. 
 
 (^u.niu, yo, kc. 125. 
 
 (^fr^qiif, 94. 
 
 40, 124, 192. 
 
 Qko/,,40,124, 164. 
 qnotits,AO, 122,38. 
 Quamdilt, 3S, 125. 
 Quolations. Vide Themes. 
 
 RepttHion, 178, 201, 
 
 Romans, phrases derived from CTls 
 
 toins of, 5,222. 
 Ratio probans. Vide Themes. 
 
 Some, 16, 17, &«. 
 So far from, 20. 
 Sw;//,25, 112 
 Sentences, 113,&,c. &ic. 
 Suftstantives, 145, &,c. &,c. 
 Supcrlallrts, 149, Lc. 
 Subjunctive, 29, kc. 47, kc . 
 Similes. Vide Themes. 
 
 Tenses, 73, kc. 
 
 Tenses, succession of, 78, &6. be. 
 
 and 85. 
 Tfuw, <«w, 131. 
 Tuhtiim abesl ut, ut, 21, 137. 
 To/n*, 158. 
 Thtme$, 221, kf^ kc. 
 Tts! (monies. Vide Themes. 
 
 r//, 47,kc.kc. 
 
 I7ft»', 126. 
 
 (// ui, ubi, %ibi, 192. 
 
 r*r6*, 47, kc. 156, &c. 
 
 Vocatives, 111. 
 
 Vurialiuh of words, 144, kc. 
 
 Fero, 193. 
 
 Fcreor, 44. 
 
 WUfiouty 23, 24. 
 
 ERR^^TA. — Page 19, for pojum— rend posmm. 
 
 31, fiir nrdtrit — read odtrit. 
 
 32. for mm — read turn. 
 
^RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 T0^-#> 202 Main Library 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 HOME USE 
 
 2 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 6 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 \ -month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405 
 
 6-month loons may be recharged by bringing books to Circulo 
 
 Desk 
 
 Renewals and rechorges moy be mode 4 days prior to due c 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 Aiin fi 1978 
 
 
 
 HUU 'yiM 
 
 Jl! ? 7fi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, 
 FORM NO. DD6, 40m, 3/78 BERKELEY, CA 947 2^^ 
 
"i 
 
 ^'^ 00076 
 
 U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 ^^903 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
■fh 
 
 tl^-^rV^ 
 
 M